CATEGORY 131 SYSTEM INFORMATION

CATEGORY 333 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

CATEGORY 433 INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION

CATEGORY 533 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

INDEX

GSM-100-030 Manual Revision

GMR-04
29 Aug 1997

68P02901W38-O
Motorola manual affected
This Manual Revision is applicable only to the manual number and version listed below: 68P02901W38-O Service Manual

Service requests
This revision provides a fix to the following service requests: N/A

Reason for revision

This revision provides additional and updated information as follows: Category 333, Chapter 2. Sections added for DSW2, GDP2 and DSWX modules. Various categories. Detailed comments are added as necessary to indicate requirements and constraints when using AMR hardware retrospectively in BSSC2 cabinets.

Action
Remove and replace pages in the Manual as follows: Remove All pages between the clear acetate front sheet and the blank backing sheet, remove from binder. Insert All pages of the GMR between the front sheet and the blank backing sheet, insert into binder.

Destroy all obsolete pages. Do not destroy this page. Insert this Manual Revision sheet in the front of the manual for future reference.

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR

29 Aug 1997

68P02901W38-O

GMR Page 1

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

GMR Page 2

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W38-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

Cellular Infrastructure Group

GSM-100-030

SERVICE MANUAL BSC/RXCDR

GMR-04
68P02901W38-O

GSM-100-030

SERVICE MANUAL BSC/RXCDR

GMR-04

68P02901W38-O

SERVICE MANUAL BSC/RXCDR

GSM-100-030

Service Manual BSC/RXCDR

E Motorola 19932003 All Rights Reserved Printed in the U.K.

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR

29 Aug 1997

68P02901W38-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

Copyrights, notices and trademarks

Copyrights
The Motorola products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyright computer programs, including the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyright computer program. Accordingly, any copyright Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this document may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the rights that arise by operation of law in the sale of a product.

Restrictions
The software described in this document is the property of Motorola. It is furnished under a license agreement and may be used and/or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of the agreement. Software and documentation are copyright materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part of the software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Motorola.

Accuracy
While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola assumes no liability resulting from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from the use of the information obtained herein. Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein to improve reliability, function, or design, and reserves the right to revise this document and to make changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product or circuit described herein; neither does it convey license under its patent rights of others.

Trademarks

and MOTOROLA are registered trademarks of Motorola Inc. M-Cell and Taskfinder are trademarks of Motorola Inc. All other brands and corporate names are trademarks of their respective owners.

ii

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W38-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

Issue status of this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . First aid in case of electric shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reporting safety issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warnings and cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Human exposure to radio frequency energy (PCS1900 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Beryllium health and safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Devices sensitive to static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motorola GSM manual set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GMR amendment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GMR amendment record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 2 4 5 6 7 9 12 14 15 16 19 20

Category 131 System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC cabinet configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet description external . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet description internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
i
11 11 11 12 12 12 12 13 13 13 14 14 15 15 15 16

Chapter 2 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive earth BSSC cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Negative earth BSSC cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back-up power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overcurrent protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
21 21 21 21 21 21 22 22 22 22 22 22

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR

29 Aug 1997

68P02901W38-O

iii

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

Category 333 Technical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC2 cabinet configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet description external . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet description internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Base station unit shelf assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSC numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shelf module fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backplane connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote transcoder unit shelf assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RXU numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RXU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shelf module fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backplane connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power distribution unit components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interconnect panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC Cabinet labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key to BSSC labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W38-O

i
i
11 11 11 12 12 12 12 13 13 13 14 15 15 16 17 18 18 18 19 110 112 112 113 113 113 114 115 117 117 118 118 118 118 118 119 119 119 119 120 120 120 121 122 122 122 123

iv

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

BSSC2 Cabinet labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Labelling diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Labelling tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC2 cabinet cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC cabinet cabling (PAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC cabinet cabling (PDB/AIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

124 124 124 126 127 127 128 129 130 131 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 133 133 134 135 136 136 137

Chapter 2 Digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSU and RXU shelf diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RXU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module front panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Full-size modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTC module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSW2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timeslot interchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote TDM highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion TDM highways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three party conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Self-diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slot position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
21 21 21 22 22 22 23 25 25 27 27 27 28 28 28 28 29 29 211 211 211 212 214 214 215 215

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR

29 Aug 1997

68P02901W38-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

GCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GCLK module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference dividers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference encoders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference fail detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock control/alarm logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Buffered test ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GCLK diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GDP2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GDP2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCU subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSP subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1 Line interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CRC-4 Error checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital crosspoint switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCAP interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TDM interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GDP2 diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPROC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPROC module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS and BSC GPROC functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RXCDR GPROC functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flash EPROM daughter card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPROC diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPROC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPROC2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSC GPROC2 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RXCDR GPROC2 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPROC2 diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W38-O

216 216 216 216 217 217 217 217 217 218 218 219 220 220 220 221 222 222 223 223 223 223 224 224 224 224 225 226 226 226 226 227 227 227 227 228 228 229 230 231 232 232 232 232 233 233 233 234 234 234 235 236

vi

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

KSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSW module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timing reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switchbound TDM interface structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion switchbound highways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timeslot interchange (TSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection RAM control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three-party conference (TPC) memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed/dynamic pattern registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outbound selection MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Highway monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Watchdog timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupt logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial interface logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSW switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSW in a BSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSW in a RXCDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSW diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interconnected KSWs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSI module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transcoded environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSI diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSI-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSI-2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transcoded environment (E1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transcoded environment (T1/JT1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSI-2 diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XCDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XCDR module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subrate multiplexer modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCAP interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TDM interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XCDR diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

237 237 237 237 238 238 238 239 239 239 240 240 240 240 240 241 241 241 241 241 242 243 244 244 244 245 245 246 246 248 249 249 249 250 250 251 251 251 254 255 255 255 256 256 256 257 257 257 258 258 258 258 259

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR

29 Aug 1997

68P02901W38-O

vii

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

GDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GDP module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCU subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSP subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subrate multiplexer modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1/T1 Line interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CRC-4 Error checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital crosspoint switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCAP interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TDM interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GDP diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NVM board description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of the NVM board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrogating the NVM board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Half-size modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBBX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBBX diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLKX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GCLK module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLKX diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSWX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSWX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSWX Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSWX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSWX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSWX diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W38-O

260 260 261 261 261 262 262 262 262 263 263 264 264 264 265 266 266 266 267 267 268 268 268 269 269 269 269 270 271 271 271 271 272 273 273 273 274 274 276 277 277 277 278 278 279

viii

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

LANX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LANX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local LAN data switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended LAN data switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bus arbiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shelf ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LANX diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

280 280 280 281 281 281 282 283 283 283 283 284 285 285 285 285 286

Chapter 3 Power, fans and interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DPSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DPSM view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DPSM diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EPSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EPSM view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EPSM diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPSM view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPSM diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DAB diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses and LEDs (BSSC2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch settings (BSSC2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
31 31 31 32 32 32 33 33 33 34 35 36 36 36 37 38 39 39 39 310 311 312 312 312 313 313 313 313 314 315 316 316 316

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR

29 Aug 1997

68P02901W38-O

ix

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

PAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses and LEDs (BSSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC status inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signal routeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signal timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDB and AIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIB description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIB view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDB description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDB diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC with PAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC with PDB/AIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interconnect panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type 43 interconnect board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T43 diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T43 connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balanced line interconnect board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIB diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIB connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

317 317 317 317 318 319 319 319 320 320 321 321 321 321 321 322 322 322 322 323 323 324 324 324 324 324 325 325 325 326 326 326 327 328 329 329 329 329 330 331 331 331 331 332

Category 433 Installation and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1 Site preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W38-O

i
i
11 11 11 11

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

Tool kits for installing GSM cellular equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool kit one . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool kit two . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site requirements and considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structural requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive earth BSSC cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Negative earth BSSC cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back up power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overcurrent protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handling optical fibres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protection of fibres and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning of fibres and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fibre connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum bend radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visiting the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before the visit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arriving at the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leaving the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rubbish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rural sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety on site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12 12 12 14 15 15 15 15 15 15 16 17 17 17 17 17 17 18 18 18 18 18 19 110 110 110 110 111 111 111 112

Chapter 2 Installing the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lifting cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transient/ lightning protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optical fibres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shipping crate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
21 21 21 21 21 21 22 22 22 23 23 23 24 24 24 24

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR

29 Aug 1997

68P02901W38-O

xi

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

Anchoring the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the cabinet air deflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing to connect dc power and earth cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC2 interconnect panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Negative earth BSSC interconnect panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive earth BSSC interconnect panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting dc power cables between cabinets and external equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power and earth cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power cables for ve earth cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power cables for +ve earth cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the main power source . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Factory installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing BBBX modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RXU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the NVM board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the NVM board in a BSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the NVM board in an RXCDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NVM board installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the control signal cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inter-cabinet fibre optic connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1/T1 line connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . End user I/O device cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX connector details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W38-O

25 25 25 26 26 26 26 27 28 28 29 29 210 211 212 213 213 213 214 214 214 215 215 216 216 216 217 217 217 218 218 218 219 219 220 221 222 222 222 222 223 224 225 225 225 225 226 226 227

xii

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

T43 to backplane connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS0 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS1 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS2 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS3 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS0 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS1 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS2 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS3 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIB to backplane connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS0 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS1 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS2 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS3 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS0 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS1 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS2 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS3 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

228 228 228 229 229 230 230 231 231 232 233 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241

Chapter 3 Decommissioning the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lifting cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Decommissioning a BSSC cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
31 31 31 31 32 32 32 32 34

Category 533 Maintenance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Related documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
i
11 11 11 11 11 11 12

Chapter 2 General procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test and Repair equipment lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repair equipment list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test equipment list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
21 21 22 22 23

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR

29 Aug 1997

68P02901W38-O

xiii

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

General repair procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Man machine interface (MMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMI uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locating faulty cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required tools and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the LMT to a GPROC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up the MMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identifying the faulty devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the alarm status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resetting and reinitializing a site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24 24 24 25 25 25 26 26 26 26 210 210 210 210 210 211 211 213 213 213 213 215 215 215

Chapter 3 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Maintenance procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air filter cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning cabinet air filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning cabinet air filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performing a physical inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annual physical inspection checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of the annual physical inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
31 31 31 32 32 32 32 33 33 33 33 34 34 34 34 35 36 37 38 38 38

Chapter 4 Replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W38-O

i
41 41 41 41

xiv

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

Air filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface board replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing an interface board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant clock extender (CLKX) module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing CLKXA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing CLKXB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-redundant CLKX replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the CLKX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a fan unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant GCLK module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a redundant GCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-redundant GCLK replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a single shelf configuration GCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a multi-shelf configuration GCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating the GCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GCLK calibration record form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPROC/GPROC2 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant GPROC considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nonredundant GPROC considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before going to the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locating the faulty GPROC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the GPROC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the GPROC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant KSW/DSW2 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

42 42 42 42 43 43 43 44 45 45 45 45 46 47 47 47 47 48 48 48 49 49 49 49 411 411 411 411 411 412 412 413 413 413 413 414 415 416 416 416 416 416 417 417 418 418 419 419 419 419 420

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR

29 Aug 1997

68P02901W38-O

xv

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

Non-redundant KSW module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant KSWX module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing KSWX A and B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-redundant KSWX module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration and indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant LANX replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the LANX associated with the active LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the LANX associated with the standby LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-redundant LANX replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSI and MSI-2 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-redundant systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XCDR replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-redundant Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GDP/GDP2 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-redundant Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NVM replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosing faults on the NVM board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the NVM board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel controls and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the PIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W38-O

421 421 421 421 421 423 423 423 424 425 426 426 426 426 427 427 427 427 428 429 429 429 430 430 430 430 430 431 432 432 432 432 432 433 434 434 434 434 435 435 437 437 437 437 438 439 439 439 439

xvi

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

Power supply module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a non-redundant power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a redundant power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

440 440 440 440 441 441

Chapter 5 Miscellaneous repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Miscellaneous repair procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Obtaining replacement authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing and replacing a circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a bus terminator card (BTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Obtaining replacement authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-redundant KSWs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant KSWs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the alarm board (DAB/PAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a new board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement of PDB and AIB boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDB removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDB installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIB removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIB installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the BSU digital cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Obtaining replacement authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
51 51 51 52 52 52 52 53 54 54 54 54 54 55 56 56 58 58 58 510 510 510 510 511 512 513 513 513 513 514 515 515 516 517 517 517 517 518 519 521 523 523 523 523 524

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR

29 Aug 1997

68P02901W38-O

xvii

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I1

xviii

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W38-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

Issue status of this manual

Issue status of this manual

Introduction
The following shows the issue status of this manual since it was first released.

Version information
The following lists the versions of this manual in order of manual issue: Manual issue O Date of issue 29 Aug 1997 Original issue Remarks

Resolution of Service Requests

The following Service Requests are now resolved in this manual: Service Request N/A GMR Number Remarks

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR

29 Aug 1997

68P02901W38-O

GMR-04

General information

GSM-100-030

General information
Important notice
If this manual was obtained when you attended a Motorola training course, it will not be updated or amended by Motorola. It is intended for TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY. If it was supplied under normal operational circumstances, to support a major software release, then corrections will be supplied automatically by Motorola in the form of General Manual Revisions (GMRs).

Purpose
Motorola Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) manuals are intended to instruct and assist personnel in the operation, installation and maintenance of the Motorola GSM equipment and ancillary devices. It is recommended that all personnel engaged in such activities be properly trained by Motorola. WARNING Failure to comply with Motorolas operation, installation and maintenance instructions may, in exceptional circumstances, lead to serious injury or death. These manuals are not intended to replace the system and equipment training offered by Motorola, although they can be used to supplement and enhance the knowledge gained through such training.

About this manual

The manual contains information about the base station system control (BSSC) cabinet and remote transcoder (RXCDR). This issue includes details of hardware modules introduced for use in the later BSC2/RXCDR2 cabinet, but which may also be used in the BSSC/RXCDR cabinet.

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W38-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

General information

Cross references
Throughout this manual, cross references are made to the chapter numbers and section names. The section name cross references are printed bold in text. This manual is divided into uniquely identified and numbered chapters that, in turn, are divided into sections. Sections are not numbered, but are individually named at the top of each page, and are listed in the table of contents.

Text conventions
The following conventions are used in the Motorola GSM manuals to represent keyboard input text, screen output text and special key sequences.

Input
Characters typed in at the keyboard are shown like this.

Output
Messages, prompts, file listings, directories, utilities, and environmental variables that appear on the screen are shown like this.

Special key sequences

Special key sequences are represented as follows: CTRLc ALTf | CR or RETURN Press the Control and c keys at the same time. Press the Alt and f keys at the same time. Press the pipe symbol key. Press the Return (Enter) key. The Return key is identified with the symbol on both the X terminal and the SPARCstation keyboards. The SPARCstation keyboard Return key is also identified with the word Return.

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR

29 Aug 1997

68P02901W38-O

GMR-04

First aid in case of electric shock

GSM-100-030

First aid in case of electric shock

Warning
WARNING Do not touch the victim with your bare hands until the electric circuit is broken. Switch off. If this is not possible, protect yourself with dry insulating material and pull or push the victim clear of the conductor.

Artificial respiration
In the event of an electric shock it may be necessary to carry out artificial respiration. Send for medical assistance immediately.

Burns treatment
If the patient is also suffering from burns, then, without hindrance to artificial respiration, carry out the following: 1. 2. 3. Do not attempt to remove clothing adhering to the burn. If help is available, or as soon as artificial respiration is no longer required, cover the wound with a dry dressing. Do not apply oil or grease in any form.

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W38-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

Reporting safety issues

Reporting safety issues

Introduction
Whenever a safety issue arises, carry out the following procedure in all instances. Ensure that all site personnel are familiar with this procedure.

Procedure
Whenever a safety issue arises: 1. 2. 3. Make the equipment concerned safe, for example, by removing power. Make no further attempt to tamper with the equipment. Report the problem directly to GSM Customer Network Resolution Centre +44 (0)1793 565444 (telephone) and follow up with a written report by fax +44 (0)1793 430987 (fax). Collect evidence from the equipment under the guidance of the Customer Network Resolution Centre.

4.

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR

29 Aug 1997

68P02901W38-O

GMR-04

Warnings and cautions

GSM-100-030

Warnings and cautions

Introduction
The following describes how warnings and cautions are used in this manual and in all manuals of the Motorola GSM manual set.

Warnings
Definition
A warning is used to alert the reader to possible hazards that could cause loss of life, physical injury, or ill health. This includes hazards introduced during maintenance, for example, the use of adhesives and solvents, as well as those inherent in the equipment.

Example and format

WARNING Do not look directly into fibre optic cables or optical data in/out connectors. Laser radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.

Cautions
Definition
A caution means that there is a possibility of damage to systems, or individual items of equipment within a system. However, this presents no danger to personnel.

Example and format

CAUTION Do not use test equipment that is beyond its calibration due date when testing Motorola base stations.

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W38-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

General warnings

General warnings
Introduction
Observe the following warnings during all phases of operation, installation and maintenance of the equipment described in the Motorola GSM manuals. Failure to comply with these warnings, or with specific warnings elsewhere in the Motorola GSM manuals, violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment. Motorola assumes no liability for the customers failure to comply with these requirements.

Warning labels
Personnel working with or operating Motorola equipment must comply with any warning labels fitted to the equipment. Warning labels must not be removed, painted over or obscured in any way.

Specific warnings
Warnings particularly applicable to the equipment are positioned on the equipment and within the text of this manual. These must be observed by all personnel at all times when working with the equipment, as must any other warnings given in text, on the illustrations and on the equipment.

High voltage
Certain Motorola equipment operates from a dangerous high voltage of 230 V ac single phase or 415 V ac three phase supply which is potentially lethal. Therefore, the areas where the ac supply power is present must not be approached until the warnings and cautions in the text and on the equipment have been complied with. To achieve isolation of the equipment from the ac supply, the ac input isolator must be set to off and locked. Within the United Kingdom (UK) regard must be paid to the requirements of the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989. There may also be specific country legislation which need to be complied with, depending on where the equipment is used.

RF radiation
High RF potentials and electromagnetic fields are present in the base station equipment when in operation. Ensure that all transmitters are switched off when any antenna connections have to be changed. Do not key transmitters connected to unterminated cavities or feeders. Refer to the following standards: S S ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3kHz to 300GHz. CENELEC 95 ENV 50166-2, Human Exposure to Electromagnetic Fields High Frequency (10kHz to 300GHz).

Laser radiation
Do not look directly into fibre optic cables or optical data in/out connectors. Laser radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR

29 Aug 1997

68P02901W38-O

GMR-04

General warnings

GSM-100-030

Lifting equipment
When dismantling heavy assemblies, or removing or replacing equipment, the competent responsible person must ensure that adequate lifting facilities are available. Where provided, lifting frames must be used for these operations. When equipments have to be manhandled, reference must be made to the Manual Handling of Loads Regulations 1992 (UK) or to the relevant manual handling of loads legislation for the country in which the equipment is used.

Do not ...
... substitute parts or modify equipment. Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification of equipment. Contact Motorola if in doubt to ensure that safety features are maintained.

Battery supplies
Do not wear earth straps when working with standby battery supplies.

Toxic material
Certain Motorola equipment incorporates components containing the highly toxic material Beryllium or its oxide Beryllia or both. These materials are especially hazardous if: S S S Beryllium materials are absorbed into the body tissues through the skin, mouth, or a wound. The dust created by breakage of Beryllia is inhaled. Toxic fumes are inhaled from Beryllium or Beryllia involved in a fire.

See the Beryllium health and safety precautions section for further information.

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W38-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

Human exposure to radio frequency energy (PCS1900 only)

Human exposure to radio frequency energy (PCS1900 only)

Introduction
This equipment is designed to generate and radiate radio frequency (RF) energy. It should be installed and maintained only by trained technicians. Licensees of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) using this equipment are responsible for insuring that its installation and operation comply with FCC regulations designed to limit human exposure to RF radiation in accordance with the American National Standards Institute IEEE Standard C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3kHz to 300GHz.

Definitions
This standard establishes two sets of maximum permitted exposure limits, one for controlled environments and another, that allows less exposure, for uncontrolled environments. These terms are defined by the standard, as follows:

Uncontrolled environment
Uncontrolled environments are locations where there is the exposure of individuals who have no knowledge or control of their exposure. The exposures may occur in living quarters or workplaces where there are no expectations that the exposure levels may exceed those shown for uncontrolled environments in the table of maximum permitted exposure ceilings.

Controlled environment
Controlled environments are locations where there is exposure that may be incurred by persons who are aware of the potential for exposure as a concomitant of employment, by other cognizant persons, or as the incidental result of transient passage through areas where analysis shows the exposure levels may be above those shown for uncontrolled environments but do not exceed the values shown for controlled environments in the table of maximum permitted exposure ceilings.

Maximum permitted exposures

The maximum permitted exposures prescribed by the standard are set in terms of different parameters of effects, depending on the frequency generated by the equipment in question. At the frequency range of this Personal Communication System equipment, 1930-1970MHz, the maximum permitted exposure levels are set in terms of power density, whose definition and relationship to electric field and magnetic field strengths are described by the standard as follows:

Power density (S)

Power per unit area normal to the direction of propagation, usually expressed in units of watts per square metre (W/m2) or, for convenience, units such as milliwatts per square centimetre (mW/cm2). For plane waves, power density, electric field strength (E) and magnetic field strength (H) are related by the impedance of free space, 377 ohms. In particular,
2 S + E + 377 377

H2

where E and H are expressed in units of V/m and A/m, respectively, and S in units of W/m 2. Although many survey instruments indicate power density units, the actual quantities measured are E or E2 or H or H2.

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR

29 Aug 1997

68P02901W38-O

GMR-04

Human exposure to radio frequency energy (PCS1900 only)

GSM-100-030

Maximum permitted exposure ceilings

Within the frequency range, the maximum permitted exposure ceiling for uncontrolled environments is a power density (mW/cm2) that equals f/1500, where f is the frequency expressed in MHz, and measurements are averaged over a period of 30 minutes. The maximum permitted exposure ceiling for controlled environments, also expressed in mW/cm 2, is f/300 where measurements are averaged over 6 minutes. Applying these principles to the minimum and maximum frequencies for which this equipment is intended to be used yields the following maximum permitted exposure levels: Uncontrolled Environment 1930MHz Ceiling 1970MHz Controlled Environment 1930MHz 1970MHz 6.567mW/cm 2

1.287mW/cm 2 1.313mW/cm 2 6.433mW/cm 2

If you plan to operate the equipment at more than one frequency, compliance should be assured at the frequency which produces the lowest exposure ceiling (among the frequencies at which operation will occur). Licensees must be able to certify to the FCC that their facilities meet the above ceilings. Some lower power PCS devices, 100 milliwatts or less, are excluded from demonstrating compliance, but this equipment operates at power levels orders of magnitude higher, and the exclusion is not applicable. Whether a given installation meets the maximum permitted exposure ceilings depends, in part, upon antenna type, antenna placement and the output power to which this equipment is adjusted. The following example sets forth the distances from the antenna to which access should be prevented in order to comply with the uncontrolled and controlled environment exposure limits as set forth in the ANSI IEEE standards and computed above.

10

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W38-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

Human exposure to radio frequency energy (PCS1900 only)

Example calculation
For a base station with the following characteristics, what is the minimum distance from the antenna necessary to meet the requirements of an uncontrolled environment? Transmit frequency: 1930 MHz Base station cabinet output power, P: +39.0 dBm (8 watts) Antenna feeder cable loss, CL: 2.0 dB Antenna input power Pin: PCL = +39.02.0 = +37.0 dB (5watts) Antenna gain, G: 16.4 dBi (43.65) Using the following relationship: G + 4p r W Pin
2

Where W is the maximum permissible power density in W/m2 and r is the safe distance from the antenna in metres, the desired distance can be calculated as follows: r+

GPin + 43.65 5 + 1.16m 4p W 4p 12.87

where W = 12.87 W/m2 was obtained from table listed above and converting from mW/cm 2 to W/m2. NOTE The above result applies only in the direction of maximum radiation of the antenna. Actual installations may employ antennas that have defined radiation patterns and gains that differ from the example set forth above. The distances calculated can vary depending on the actual antenna pattern and gain.

Power density measurements

While installation calculations such as the above are useful and essential in planning and design, validation that the operating facility using this equipment actually complies will require making power density measurements. For information on measuring RF fields for determining compliance with ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, see IEEE Recommended Practice for the Measure of Potentially Hazardous Electromagnetic Fields - RF and Microwave, IEEE Std C95.3-1991. Copies of IEEE C95.1-1991 and IEEE C95.3-1991 may be purchased from the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc., Attn: Publication Sales, 445 Hoes Lane, P.O. Box 1331, Piscattaway, NJ 08855-1331, (800) 678-IEEE or from ANSI, (212) 642-4900. Persons responsible for installation of this equipment are urged to consult these standards in determining whether a given installation complies with the applicable limits.

Other equipment
Whether a given installation meets ANSI standards for human exposure to radio frequency radiation may depend not only on this equipment but also on whether the environments being assessed are being affected by radio frequency fields from other equipment, the effects of which may add to the level of exposure. Accordingly, the overall exposure may be affected by radio frequency generating facilities that exist at the time the licensees equipment is being installed or even by equipment installed later. Therefore, the effects of any such facilities must be considered in site selection and in determining whether a particular installation meets the FCC requirements.

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR

29 Aug 1997

68P02901W38-O

11

GMR-04

Beryllium health and safety precautions

GSM-100-030

Beryllium health and safety precautions

Introduction
Beryllium (Be), is a hard silver/white metal. It is stable in air, but burns brilliantly in Oxygen. With the exception of the naturally occurring Beryl ore (Beryllium Silicate), all Beryllium compounds and Beryllium metal are potentially highly toxic.

Health issues
Beryllium Oxide is used within some components as an electrical insulator. Captive within the component it presents no health risk whatsoever. However, if the component should be broken open and the Beryllium Oxide, which is in the form of dust, released, there exists the potential for harm.

Inhalation
Inhalation of Beryllium Oxide can lead to a condition known as Berylliosis, the symptoms of Berylliosis are similar to Pneumonia and may be identified by all or any of the following: Mild poisoning causes fever, shortness of breath, and a cough that produces yellow/green sputum, or occasionally bloodstained sputum. Inflammation of the mucous membranes of the nose, throat, and chest with discomfort, possibly pain, and difficulty with swallowing and breathing. Severe poisoning causes chest pain and wheezing which may progress to severe shortness of breath due to congestion of the lungs. Incubation period for lung symptoms is 2-20 days. Exposure to moderately high concentrations of Beryllium in air may produce a very serious condition of the lungs. The injured person may become blue, feverish with rapid breathing and raised pulse rate. Recovery is usual but may take several months. There have been deaths in the acute stage. Chronic response. This condition is more truly a general one although the lungs are mainly affected. There may be lesions in the kidneys and the skin. Certain features support the view that the condition is allergic. There is no relationship between the degree of exposure and the severity of response and there is usually a time lag of up to 10 years between exposure and the onset of the illness. Both sexes are equally susceptible. The onset of the illness is insidious but only a small number of exposed persons develop this reaction.

First aid
Seek immediate medical assistance. The casualty should be removed immediately from the exposure area and placed in a fresh air environment with breathing supported with Oxygen where required. Any contaminated clothing should be removed. The casualty should be kept warm and at rest until medical aid arrives.

12

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W38-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

Beryllium health and safety precautions

Skin contact
Possible irritation and redness at the contact area. Persistent itching and blister formations can occur which usually resolve on removal from exposure.

First aid
Wash area thoroughly with soap and water. If skin is broken seek immediate medical assistance.

Eye contact
May cause severe irritation, redness and swelling of eyelid(s) and inflammation of the mucous membranes of the eyes.

First aid
Flush eyes with running water for at least 15 minutes. Seek medical assistance as soon as possible.

Handling procedures
Removal of components from printed circuit boards (PCBs) is to take place only at Motorola approved repair centres. The removal station will be equipped with extraction equipment and all other protective equipment necessary for the safe removal of components containing Beryllium Oxide. If during removal a component is accidently opened, the Beryllium Oxide dust is to be wetted into a paste and put into a container with a spatula or similar tool. The spatula/tool used to collect the paste is also to be placed in the container. The container is then to be sealed and labelled. A suitable respirator is to be worn at all times during this operation. Components which are successfully removed are to be placed in a separate bag, sealed and labelled.

Disposal methods
Beryllium Oxide or components containing Beryllium Oxide are to be treated as hazardous waste. All components must be removed where possible from boards and put into sealed bags labelled Beryllium Oxide components. These bags must be given to the safety and environmental adviser for disposal. Under no circumstances are boards or components containing Beryllium Oxide to be put into the general waste skips or incinerated.

Product life cycle implications

Motorola GSM and analogue equipment includes components containing Beryllium Oxide (identified in text as appropriate and indicated by warning labels on the equipment). These components require specific disposal measures as indicated in the preceding (Disposal methods) paragraph. Motorola will arrange for the disposal of all such hazardous waste as part of its Total Customer Satisfaction philosophy and will arrange for the most environmentally friendly disposal available at that time.

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR

29 Aug 1997

68P02901W38-O

13

GMR-04

General cautions

GSM-100-030

General cautions
Introduction
Observe the following cautions during operation, installation and maintenance of the equipment described in the Motorola GSM manuals. Failure to comply with these cautions or with specific cautions elsewhere in the Motorola GSM manuals may result in damage to the equipment. Motorola assumes no liability for the customers failure to comply with these requirements.

Caution labels
Personnel working with or operating Motorola equipment must comply with any caution labels fitted to the equipment. Caution labels must not be removed, painted over or obscured in any way.

Specific cautions
Cautions particularly applicable to the equipment are positioned within the text of this manual. These must be observed by all personnel at all times when working with the equipment, as must any other cautions given in text, on the illustrations and on the equipment.

Fibre optics
The bending radius of all fibre optic cables must not be less than 30 mm.

Static discharge
Motorola equipment contains CMOS devices that are vulnerable to static discharge. Although the damage caused by static discharge may not be immediately apparent, CMOS devices may be damaged in the long term due to static discharge caused by mishandling. Wear an approved earth strap when adjusting or handling digital boards. See Devices sensitive to static for further information.

14

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W38-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

Devices sensitive to static

Devices sensitive to static

Introduction
Certain metal oxide semiconductor (MOS) devices embody in their design a thin layer of insulation that is susceptible to damage from electrostatic charge. Such a charge applied to the leads of the device could cause irreparable damage. These charges can be built up on nylon overalls, by friction, by pushing the hands into high insulation packing material or by use of unearthed soldering irons. MOS devices are normally despatched from the manufacturers with the leads shorted together, for example, by metal foil eyelets, wire strapping, or by inserting the leads into conductive plastic foam. Provided the leads are shorted it is safe to handle the device.

Special handling techniques

In the event of one of these devices having to be replaced observe the following precautions when handling the replacement: S S S S S S Always wear an earth strap which must be connected to the electrostatic point (ESP) on the equipment. Leave the short circuit on the leads until the last moment. It may be necessary to replace the conductive foam by a piece of wire to enable the device to be fitted. Do not wear outer clothing made of nylon or similar man made material. A cotton overall is preferable. If possible work on an earthed metal surface. Wipe insulated plastic work surfaces with an anti-static cloth before starting the operation. All metal tools should be used and when not in use they should be placed on an earthed surface. Take care when removing components connected to electrostatic sensitive devices. These components may be providing protection to the device.

When mounted onto printed circuit boards (PCBs), MOS devices are normally less susceptible to electrostatic damage. However PCBs should be handled with care, preferably by their edges and not by their tracks and pins, they should be transferred directly from their packing to the equipment (or the other way around) and never left exposed on the workbench.

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR

29 Aug 1997

68P02901W38-O

15

GMR-04

Motorola GSM manual set

GSM-100-030

Motorola GSM manual set

Introduction
The following manuals provide the information needed to operate, install and maintain the Motorola GSM and GSM Packet Radio Service (GPRS) equipment.

Generic GSM manuals

The following are the generic manuals in the GSM manual set, these manuals are release dependent: Classification number GSM-100-101 GSM-100-201 GSM-100-202 GSM-100-311 GSM-100-313 GSM-100-320 GSM-100-321 GSM-100-403 GSM-100-423 GSM-100-413 GSM-100-501 GSM-100-520 GSM-100-521 GSM-100-523 GSM-100-503 GSM-100-721 GSM-100-712 Name System Information: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Information: GSM System Operation . . . Operating Information: OMC-R System Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Description: OMC-R in a GSM System . . Technical Description: OMC-R Database Schema . Technical Description: BSS Implementation . . . . . . . Technical Description: BSS Command Reference . Installation & Configuration: GSM System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation & Configuration: BSS Optimization . . . . Installation & Configuration: OMC-R Clean Install . . Maintenance Information: Alarm Handling at the OMC-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Information: BSS Timers . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Information: Device State Transitions Maintenance Information: BSS Field Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Information: GSM Statistics Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software Release Notes: BSS/RXCDR . . . . . . . . . . Software Release Notes: OMC-R System . . . . . . . . Order number 68P02901W01 68P02901W14 68P02901W19 68P02901W31 68P02901W34 68P02901W36 68P02901W23 68P02901W17 68P02901W43 68P02901W47 68P02901W26 68P02901W58 68P02901W57 68P02901W51 68P02901W56 68P02901W72 68P02901W74

16

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W38-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

Motorola GSM manual set

Related GSM manuals

The following are related Motorola GSM manuals: Classification number GSM-001-103 GSM-002-103 GSM-002-703 GSM-005-103 GSM-008-103 GSM-008-703 GSM-TOOLS-001 GSM-TOOLS-002 GSM-TOOLS-701 GSM-TOOLS-702 GSM-006-202 GSM-006-413 GSM-006-712 Name System Information: BSS Equipment Planning . . . . System Information: DataGen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software Release Notes: DataGen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Information: GSM Advance Operational Impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Information: Network Health Analyst . . . . . . Software Release Notes: Network Health Analyst . System Information: Cell Optimization (COP) . . . . . System Information: Motorola Analysis and Reporting System (MARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software Release Notes: Cell Optimization (COP) . Software Release Notes: Motorola Analysis and Reporting System (MARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Information: OMC-R System Administration (OSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation & Configuration: OSI Clean Install . . . . . Software Release Notes: OMC-R OSI System . . . . Order number 68P02900W21 68P02900W22 68P02900W76 68P02900W25 68P02900W36 68P02900W77 68P02900W90 68P02900W94 68P02900W69 68P02900W68 68P02901W10 68P02901W39 68P02901W70

Generic GPRS manuals

The following are the generic manuals in the GPRS manual set, these manuals are release dependent: Classification number GPRS-300-101 GPRS-300-202 GPRS-300-222 GPRS-300-311 GPRS-300-313 GPRS-300-321 GPRS-300-423 GPRS-300-413 GPRS-300-501 GPRS-300-503 GPRS-300-722 GPRS-300-712 Name System Information: GPRS Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Information: OMC-G System Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Information: GSN System Administration Technical Description: OMC-G in a GPRS System . Technical Description: OMC-G Database Schema . Technical Description: GSN Command Reference . Installation & Configuration: GSN Clean Install . . . . Installation & Configuration: OMC-G Clean Install . Maintenance Information: Alarm Handling at the OMC-G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance Information: GSN Statistics Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software Release Notes: GSN System . . . . . . . . . . Software Release Notes: OMC-G System . . . . . . . . Order number 68P02903W01 68P02903W03 68P02903W37 68P02903W29 68P02903W46 68P02903W18 68P02903W47 68P02903W04 68P02903W19 68P02903W20 68P02903W76 68P02903W70

Related GPRS manuals

The following are related Motorola GPRS manuals: GPRS-001-103 GPRS-005-103 System Information: GPRS Equipment Planning . . 68P02903W02 System Information: GSN Advance Operational Impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02903W38

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR

29 Aug 1997

68P02901W38-O

17

GMR-04

Motorola GSM manual set

GSM-100-030

BSS service manuals

The following are the Motorola Base Station service manuals, these manuals are not release dependent. The internal organization and makeup of service manual sets may vary, they may consist of from one to four separate manuals, but they can all be ordered using the overall catalogue number shown below: Classification number GSM-100-020 GSM-100-030 GSM-105-020 GSM-106-020 GSM-201-020 GSM-202-020 GSM-203-020 GSM-206-020 GSM-205-020 GSM-204-020 GSM-207-020 GSM-209-020 GSM-208-020 GSM-101-SERIES GSM-103-SERIES GSM-102-SERIES GSM-104-SERIES GSM-200-SERIES Name Service Manual: BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: M-Cell2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: M-Cell6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ . . . . . . . Service Manual: M-Cellaccess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: Horizonmicro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: Horizoncompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: Horizonmacro Indoor . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: Horizonmacro Outdoor . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: Horizonoffice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Manual: Horizonmicro2 Horizoncompact2 . Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 Carrier Outdoor ExCell4 Documentation Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ExCell6 Documentation Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TopCell Documentation Set (GSM900) . . . . . . . . . . . TopCell Documentation Set (DCS1800) . . . . . . . . . . M-Cellmicro Documentation Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Order number 68P02901W37 68P02901W38 68P02901W75 68P02901W85 68P02901W95 68P02901W65 68P02902W36 68P02902W15 68P02902W06 68P02902W12 68P02902W46 68P02902W61 68P02902W66 68P02900W50 68P02900W70 68P02901W80 68P02902W80 68P02901W90

GPRS service manuals

The following are the Motorola GPRS service manuals, these manuals include the Packet Control Unit (PCU) service manual which becomes part of the BSS for GPRS: Classification number GPRS-301-020 GPRS-302-020 Name Order number

Service Manual:GPRS Support Nodes (GSN) . . . . . 68P02903W05 Service Manual: Packet Control Unit (PCU) . . . . . . . 68P02903W10

Classification number
The classification number is used to identify the type and level of a manual. For example, manuals with the classification number GSM-100-2xx contain operating information.

Order number
The Motorola 68P order (catalogue) number is used to order manuals.

Ordering manuals
All orders for Motorola manuals must be placed with your Motorola Local Office or Representative. Manuals are ordered using the order (catalogue) number. Remember, specify the manual issue required by quoting the correct suffix letter. Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W38-O

18

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

GMR amendment

GMR amendment
Introduction to GMRs
Changes to a manual that occur after the printing date are incorporated into the manual using General Manual Revisions (GMRs). GMRs are issued to correct Motorola manuals as and when required. A GMR has the same identity as the target manual. Each GMR is identified by a number in a sequence that starts at 01 for each manual at each issue. GMRs are issued in the form of loose leaf pages, with a pink instruction sheet on the front.

GMR procedure
When a GMR is received, check on the GMR amendment record page of this manual that previous GMRs, if any, have been incorporated. If not, contact your administrator or Motorola Local Office to obtain the missing GMRs. Remove and replace pages in this manual, as detailed on the GMR pink instruction sheet.

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR

29 Aug 1997

68P02901W38-O

19

GMR-04

GMR amendment record

GSM-100-030

GMR amendment record

Instructions
When a GMR is inserted in this manual, the amendment record below must be filled in to record the insertion. Retain the pink instruction sheet that accompanies each GMR and insert it in a suitable place in this manual for future reference.

Amendment record
Record the insertion of GMRs in this manual in the following table:

GMR number 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

Incorporated by (signature) Incorporated Incorporated Incorporated Incorporated (this GMR)

Date 17 Dec 1997 10 Aug 2001 31 Aug 2002 29 Aug 2003

20

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W38-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION

CHAPTER 2 SPECIFICATION

Category 131

System Information

29 Aug 1997

System Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W06-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-131

ii

System Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W06-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-131

Category 131 System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC cabinet configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet description external . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet description internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
i
11 11 11 12 12 12 12 13 13 13 14 14 15 15 15 16

Chapter 2 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive earth BSSC cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Negative earth BSSC cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back-up power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overcurrent protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
21 21 21 21 21 21 22 22 22 22 22 22

29 Aug 1997

System Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W06-O

iii

GMR-04

GSM-100-131

iv

System Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W06-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

Chapter 1

Introduction

29 Aug 1997

System Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W06-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-131

ii

System Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W06-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-131

Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC cabinet configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet description external . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet description internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
11 11 11 12 12 12 12 13 13 13 14 14 15 15 15 16

29 Aug 1997

System Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W06-O

iii

GMR-04

GSM-100-131

iv

System Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W06-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-131

Overview

Overview
Introduction
This chapter is a mechanical and electrical description of the base station system control (BSSC) cabinet. A BSSC cabinet can be configured as: S S S A base station controller (BSC) containing digital hardware modules configured to control the radio subsystem. A remote transcoder (RXCDR) containing digital hardware modules configured to provide an interface between the BSC and mobile switching centre (MSC). A combination of the BSC and RXCDR functions.

The difference between the BSC and RXCDR configurations is in the complement of digital modules on the backplane. The information in this chapter applies to all three of the above configurations and, unless otherwise indicated, to GSM, GSM850, extended GSM (EGSM), DCS1800 and PCS1900 systems.

Cabinet types
The earlier BSSC cabinet is the same as the BSSC2 except in its handling of power distribution and alarms. The differences are described in the BSSC differences section of this chapter. The BSSC and BSSC2 cabinets can be powered by a positive earth (48 V or 60 V) or negative earth (+27 V) supply. The only difference in the cabinets is the inclusion of fan power converters in the 48/60 V versions of the BSSC to derive +27 V power for the cooling fans. NOTE Where the BSSC and BSSC2 are the same, only the BSSC is mentioned.

29 Aug 1997

System Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W06-O

11

GMR-04

BSSC cabinet configuration

GSM-100-131

BSSC cabinet configuration

Configuration options
BSC configuration
The BSSC cabinet configured as a BSC contains at least one base station unit (BSU) shelf assembly. This assembly is in the lower portion of the cabinet; the upper portion of the cabinet can contain a second BSU configured either as a separate BSC or as an expansion of the BSU on the lower shelf. Transcoding can be performed at the BSC. In this case, the upper portion of the cabinet contains a separate transcoder unit (RXU) shelf assembly instead of a second BSU. The top shelf contains the power distribution unit (PDU) which consists of a distribution alarm board and a dc circuit breaker panel.

RXCDR configuration
The BSSC2 cabinet configured as an RXCDR contains at least one RXU shelf assembly, located in the lower portion of the cabinet. A second RXU can be located in the upper portion of the cabinet. The top shelf contains the PDU, which consists of a distribution alarm board and a dc circuit breaker panel.

BSU and RXU shelves

Each shelf in a cabinet can be configured as a separate network element. The BSU and RXU shelf assemblies consist of: S S S A backplane. Two vertical slot module shelves. A three compartment shelf.

The lower portion of the two vertical slot shelves holds 26 full size digital modules in slots numbered L0 to L28. The upper portion of the shelf holds 28 half size digital modules in slots numbered U0 to U28. There are three compartments at the bottom of the BSU/RXU shelf assembly, with slide-in mountings for power supply modules. The left compartment is for an optional redundant power supply module.

Location
The BSC can be located at the same site as the radio (collocated). They can also share the same cabinet. Alternatively, the BSC at one site can control several radio subsystems at remote sites. The transcoding function of the BSS can be located either: S S With the BSC. Remotely between the BSC and the MSC.

Locating the transcoding function between the BSC and the MSC is the most common option and is referred to as the RXCDR.

Equipment
The exact digital hardware module equipment in the cabinet depends on the BSS application. Chapter 2 of this manual contains descriptions of the digital hardware modules used in the BSSC cabinet.
12

System Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W06-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-131

Cabinet description external

Cabinet description external

Introduction
This section describes the external appearance of a typical BSSC cabinet.

External view
Figure 1-1 shows an external view of a typical BSSC cabinet:

INTERCONNECT PANEL

INTAKE AIR VENTS

DOOR HINGES EXHAUST AIR VENTS

INTAKE AIR VENTS

EXHAUST AIR VENTS

Figure 1-1 BSSC cabinet (external view)

29 Aug 1997

System Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W06-O

13

GMR-04

Cabinet description external

GSM-100-131

Dimensions
The cabinet has the following dimensions: Height Width Depth 2100mm 711 mm 416 mm excluding lifting eyelets excluding isolation strips excluding isolation strip

External features
The cabinet door is hinged on the left side of the cabinet, and has four air vents with grilles: S S Intake vents have air filters. Exhaust vents have exhaust fans fitted behind the vents.

All connections to the cabinet are at the interconnect panel, which is on top of the cabinet. This panel also has feed-through tubes for routeing fibre optic inter-cabinet cables in and out of the cabinet. All cabinets are RF/EMI shielded.

14

System Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W06-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-131

Cabinet description internal

Cabinet description internal

Introduction
This section describes the internal appearance of a typical BSSC cabinet.

Internal view
Figure 1-2 shows an internal view of a typical BSSC cabinet:

POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT (PDU) HALF-SIZE DIGITAL BOARD SHELF

FULL-SIZE DIGITAL BOARD SHELF

POWER SUPPLY MODULES

HALF-SIZE DIGITAL BOARD SHELF

FULL-SIZE DIGITAL BOARD SHELF

POWER SUPPLY MODULES

FANS

EXTERIOR DOORS REMOVED TO SHOW DETAIL

Figure 1-2 BSSC cabinet (internal view)

29 Aug 1997

System Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W06-O

15

GMR-04

Cabinet description internal

GSM-100-131

Internal units
As shown in Figure 1-2, the BSSC can contain two card cages, each with one full-size and one half-size digital board shelf. A card cage can contain either a BSU or an RXU. All cabinets contain a power distribution unit PDU and a fan cooling system. Card cages are equipped according to the required function of the cabinet, as shown in the Table 1-1: Table 1-1 Cabinet type cage equippage Cabinet type BSC RXCDR Combined BSC and RXCDR BSU Lower card cage Lower card cage RXU Lower card cage Upper card cage PDU p p p Fans p p p

The upper card cage of a BSC or RXCDR can be used to increase capacity by fitting a second BSU or RXU as appropriate.

16

System Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W06-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

Chapter 2

Specification

29 Aug 1997

System Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W06-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-131

ii

System Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W06-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-131

Chapter 2 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive earth BSSC cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Negative earth BSSC cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back-up power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overcurrent protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
21 21 21 21 21 21 22 22 22 22 22 22

29 Aug 1997

System Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W06-O

iii

GMR-04

GSM-100-131

iv

System Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W06-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-131

Specification

Specification
Overview
The BSSC cabinet specifications, including frequency band characteristics are tabulated in this chapter.

Environment
The environmental limits are shown in Table 2-1. Table 2-1 Environmental limits Environment Operating Storage Temperature 5 _C to +45 _C 45 _C to +70 _C Humidity 5% to 95% non-condensing 8% to 100% non-condensing

Dimensions
The dimensions are shown in Table 2-2. Table 2-2 Dimensions Height BSSC 2100 mm Width 711 mm Depth 416 mm

Weights
The weight figures are shown in Table 2-3. Table 2-3 Weights Weight BSSC 136 kg (unequipped) Weight 230 kg (with two BSU cages)

Power consumption
NOTE Maximum power consumption figures are theoretical values derived under extreme conditions and are affected by variables such as temperature, component tolerances, transmission power and supply voltage. Although these figures must be considered when planning site power requirements, typical measured consumption values will be lower. Table 2-4 shows the nominal and maximum power consumption figures for the cabinet. Table 2-4 BSSC cabinet power consumption Ambient temperature 0 to +50 C Nominal power consumption 1500 W Maximum power consumption 2400 W

29 Aug 1997

System Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W06-O

21

GMR-04

Power requirements

GSM-100-131

Power requirements
Introduction
BSSC cabinets can operate from either positive or negative earth supplies (determined by customer request and configured during initial build) at various voltages.

Positive earth BSSC cabinets

Positive earth BSSC cabinets operate from a 48 V or 60 V dc supply. The maximum power requirements are: S S (48 V) = 50 A. (60 V) = 40 A.

Negative earth BSSC cabinets

Negative earth BSSC cabinets operate from a nominal +27 V dc (+3 V, 5 V dc) supply. The maximum power requirement is: S (+27 V) = 90 A.

Back-up power
BSSC cabinets can be connected to an external battery to provide a dc input power back-up for dynamic random access memory (DRAM) devices. The DRAM backup maximum power requirement for each cabinet is: S 4 A (maximum) at +27 V dc. NOTE An adequate means of routeing cables from the power source to the equipment, for example a cable trough, must be provided (BS 7671 Reference Method 11).

Overcurrent protection
The cabinet overcurrent protection device can be: S S a fuse conforming to BS88 (IEC 51-3). a main circuit breaker conforming to BS EN 60898 (IEC 898).

The device must be of the following rating: S S S

22

+27 V cabinets: 100 A. 48 V cabinets: 63 A. 60 V cabinets: 63 A. System Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W06-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

CHAPTER 2 DIGITAL MODULES

CHAPTER 3 POWER/FAN/CONNECTIONS

Category 333

Technical Description

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

ii

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

Category 333 Technical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC2 cabinet configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet description external . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet description internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Base station unit shelf assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSC numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shelf module fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backplane connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote transcoder unit shelf assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RXU numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RXU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shelf module fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backplane connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power distribution unit components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interconnect panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC Cabinet labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key to BSSC labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
i
11 11 11 12 12 12 12 13 13 13 14 15 15 16 17 18 18 18 19 110 112 112 113 113 113 114 115 117 117 118 118 118 118 118 119 119 119 119 120 120 120 121 122 122 122 123

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

iii

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

BSSC2 Cabinet labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Labelling diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Labelling tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC2 cabinet cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC cabinet cabling (PAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC cabinet cabling (PDB/AIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

124 124 124 126 127 127 128 129 130 131 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 133 133 134 135 136 136 137

Chapter 2 Digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSU and RXU shelf diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RXU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module front panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Full-size modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTC module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSW2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timeslot interchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote TDM highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion TDM highways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three party conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Self-diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slot position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv

i
21 21 21 22 22 22 23 25 25 27 27 27 28 28 28 28 29 29 211 211 211 212 214 214 215 215
29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

GCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GCLK module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference dividers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference encoders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference fail detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock control/alarm logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Buffered test ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GCLK diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GDP2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GDP2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCU subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSP subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1 Line interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CRC-4 Error checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital crosspoint switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCAP interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TDM interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GDP2 diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPROC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPROC module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS and BSC GPROC functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RXCDR GPROC functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flash EPROM daughter card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPROC diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPROC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPROC2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSC GPROC2 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RXCDR GPROC2 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPROC2 diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

216 216 216 216 217 217 217 217 217 218 218 219 220 220 220 221 222 222 223 223 223 223 224 224 224 224 225 226 226 226 226 227 227 227 227 228 228 229 230 231 232 232 232 232 233 233 233 234 234 234 235 236

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

KSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSW module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timing reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switchbound TDM interface structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion switchbound highways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timeslot interchange (TSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection RAM control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three-party conference (TPC) memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed/dynamic pattern registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outbound selection MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Highway monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Watchdog timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupt logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial interface logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSW switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSW in a BSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSW in a RXCDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSW diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interconnected KSWs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSI module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transcoded environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSI diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSI-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSI-2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transcoded environment (E1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transcoded environment (T1/JT1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSI-2 diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XCDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XCDR module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subrate multiplexer modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCAP interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TDM interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XCDR diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vi

237 237 237 237 238 238 238 239 239 239 240 240 240 240 240 241 241 241 241 241 242 243 244 244 244 245 245 246 246 248 249 249 249 250 250 251 251 251 254 255 255 255 256 256 256 257 257 257 258 258 258 258 259
29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

GDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GDP module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCU subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSP subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subrate multiplexer modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1/T1 Line interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CRC-4 Error checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital crosspoint switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCAP interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TDM interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GDP diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NVM board description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of the NVM board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrogating the NVM board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Half-size modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBBX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBBX diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLKX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GCLK module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLKX diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSWX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSWX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSWX Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSWX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSWX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSWX diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

260 260 261 261 261 262 262 262 262 263 263 264 264 264 265 266 266 266 267 267 268 268 268 269 269 269 269 270 271 271 271 271 272 273 273 273 274 274 276 277 277 277 278 278 279

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

vii

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

LANX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LANX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local LAN data switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended LAN data switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bus arbiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shelf ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LANX diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

280 280 280 281 281 281 282 283 283 283 283 284 285 285 285 285 286

Chapter 3 Power, fans and interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DPSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DPSM view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DPSM diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EPSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EPSM view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EPSM diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPSM view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPSM diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DAB diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses and LEDs (BSSC2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch settings (BSSC2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
viii

i
31 31 31 32 32 32 33 33 33 34 35 36 36 36 37 38 39 39 39 310 311 312 312 312 313 313 313 313 314 315 316 316 316
29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

PAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses and LEDs (BSSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC status inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signal routeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signal timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDB and AIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIB description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIB view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDB description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDB diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC with PAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC with PDB/AIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interconnect panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type 43 interconnect board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T43 diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T43 connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balanced line interconnect board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIB diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIB connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

317 317 317 317 318 319 319 319 320 320 321 321 321 321 321 322 322 322 322 323 323 324 324 324 324 324 325 325 325 326 326 326 327 328 329 329 329 329 330 331 331 331 331 332

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

ix

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

Chapter 1

General Information

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

ii

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

Chapter 1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC2 cabinet configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet description external . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet description internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Base station unit shelf assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSC numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shelf module fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backplane connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote transcoder unit shelf assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RXU numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RXU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shelf module fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backplane connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power distribution unit components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interconnect panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC Cabinet labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key to BSSC labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC2 Cabinet labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Labelling diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Labelling tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
11 11 11 12 12 12 12 13 13 13 14 15 15 16 17 18 18 18 19 110 112 112 113 113 113 114 115 117 117 118 118 118 118 118 119 119 119 119 120 120 120 121 122 122 122 123 124 124 124 126

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

iii

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

BSSC2 cabinet cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC cabinet cabling (PAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC cabinet cabling (PDB/AIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

127 127 128 129 130 131 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 133 133 134 135 136 136 137

iv

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

Overview

Overview
Introduction
This chapter is a mechanical and electrical description of the base station system control (BSSC) cabinet. A BSSC cabinet can be configured as: S S S A base station controller (BSC) containing digital hardware modules configured to control the radio subsystem. A remote transcoder (RXCDR) containing digital hardware modules configured to provide an interface between the BSC and mobile switching centre (MSC). A combination of the BSC and RXCDR functions.

The difference between the BSC and RXCDR configurations is in the complement of digital modules on the backplane. The information in this chapter applies to all three of the above configurations and, unless otherwise indicated, to GSM, extended GSM (EGSM), DCS1800 and PCS1900 systems. NOTE The BSSC and BSSC2 cabinet are similar, the BSSC2 cabinet is described. Where there are differences these are described in the text.

Cabinet types
The earlier BSSC cabinet is the same as the BSSC2 except in its handling of power distribution and alarms. The differences are described in the BSSC differences section of this chapter. The BSSC and BSSC2 cabinets can be powered by a positive earth (48 V or 60 V) or negative earth (+27 V) supply (this is requested by the customer and configured during initial installation). The only difference in the cabinets is the inclusion of fan power converters in the 48/60 V versions of the BSSC to derive +27 V power for the cooling fans.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

11

GMR-04

BSSC2 cabinet configuration

GSM-100-333

BSSC2 cabinet configuration

Configuration options
BSC configuration
The BSSC2 cabinet configured as a BSC contains at least one base station unit (BSU) shelf assembly. This assembly is in the lower portion of the cabinet; the upper portion of the cabinet can contain a second BSU configured either as a separate BSC or as an expansion of the BSU on the lower shelf. Transcoding can be performed at the BSC. In this case, the upper portion of the cabinet contains a separate transcoder unit (RXU) shelf assembly instead of a second BSU. The top shelf contains the power distribution unit (PDU) which consists of a distribution alarm board and a dc circuit breaker panel.

RXCDR configuration
The BSSC2 cabinet configured as an RXCDR contains at least one RXU shelf assembly, located in the lower portion of the cabinet. A second RXU can be located in the upper portion of the cabinet. The top shelf contains the PDU, which consists of a distribution alarm board and a dc circuit breaker panel.

BSU and RXU shelves

Each shelf in a cabinet can be configured as a separate network element. The BSU and RXU shelf assemblies consist of: S S S A backplane. Two vertical slot module shelves. A three compartment shelf.

The lower portion of the two vertical slot shelves holds 26 full size digital modules in slots numbered L0 to L28. The upper portion of the shelf holds 28 half size digital modules in slots numbered U0 to U28. There are three compartments at the bottom of the BSU/RXU shelf assembly, with slide-in mountings for power supply modules. The left compartment is for an optional redundant power supply module.

Location
The BSC can be located at the same site as the radio (collocated). They can also share the same cabinet. Alternatively, the BSC at one site can control several radio subsystems at remote sites. The transcoding function of the BSS can be located either: S S With the BSC. Remotely between the BSC and the MSC.

Locating the transcoding function between the BSC and the MSC is the most common option and is referred to as the RXCDR.

Equipment
The exact digital hardware module equipment in the cabinet depends on the BSS application. Chapter 2 of this manual contains descriptions of the digital hardware modules used in the BSSC2 cabinet.
12

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

Cabinet description external

Cabinet description external

Introduction
This section describes the external appearance of the BSSC2 cabinet.

External view
Figure 1-1 shows an external view of the BSSC2 cabinet:

INTERCONNECT PANEL

INTAKE AIR VENTS

DOOR HINGES EXHAUST AIR VENTS

INTAKE AIR VENTS

EXHAUST AIR VENTS

Figure 1-1 BSSC2 cabinet - external view

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

13

GMR-04

Cabinet description external

GSM-100-333

External features
The cabinet door is hinged on the left side of the cabinet, and has four air vents with grilles: S S Intake vents have air filters. Exhaust vents have exhaust fans fitted behind the vents.

All connections to the cabinet are at the interconnect panel, which is on top of the cabinet. This panel also has feed-through tubes for routeing fibre optic inter-cabinet cables in and out of the cabinet. All cabinets are RF/EMI shielded.

14

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

Cabinet description internal

Cabinet description internal

Introduction
This section describes the internal appearance of the BSSC2 cabinet.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

15

GMR-04

Cabinet description internal

GSM-100-333

Internal view
Figure 1-2 shows an internal view of the BSSC2 cabinet:

POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT (PDU) HALF-SIZE DIGITAL BOARD SHELF

FULL-SIZE DIGITAL BOARD SHELF

POWER SUPPLY MODULES

HALF-SIZE DIGITAL BOARD SHELF

FULL-SIZE DIGITAL BOARD SHELF

POWER SUPPLY MODULES

FANS

EXTERIOR DOORS REMOVED TO SHOW DETAIL

Figure 1-2 BSSC2 cabinet - internal view

16

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

Cabinet description internal

Internal units
As shown in the internal view on the previous page, the BSSC2 can contain two card cages, each with one full-size and one half-size digital board shelf. A card cage can contain either a BSU or an RXU. All cabinets contain a power distribution unit PDU and a fan cooling system. Card cages are equipped according to the required function of the cabinet, as shown in the Table 1-1: Table 1-1 Cabinet type cage equippage Cabinet type BSC RXCDR Combined BSC and RXCDR BSU Lower card cage Lower card cage RXU Lower card cage Upper card cage PDU p p p Fans p p p

The upper card cage of a BSC or RXCDR can be used to increase capacity by fitting a second BSU or RXU as appropriate.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

17

GMR-04

Base station unit shelf assembly

GSM-100-333

Base station unit shelf assembly

Overview
A base station unit (BSU) shelf assembly consists of: S S A backplane. Two vertical-slot module shelves containing the required digital modules: S The upper shelf holds half size digital modules. The lower shelf holds full size digital modules.

A three-compartment shelf for the power supply modules.

Every cabinet must be fitted with the following digital cards: S S Two bus termination cards (BTC). One local area network extender (LANX) module.

All other digital modules are optional, and their inclusion depends upon the cabinet configuration.

BSC numbering
In a BSC, BSUs are numbered from 0 forward using the sixteen position (0 to F hex) rotary switch on the LANX module. This rotary switch sets the BSU LAN address.

18

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

Base station unit shelf assembly

BSU shelf
Figure 1-3 shows a base station unit shelf:
PART OF BSU BACKPLANE AI0 AI1 AI2 KS0 MS0 DR5 DR4 MS1 DR3 DR2 HALF SIZE MODULES MS2 DR1 DR0 MS3 KS1 GK0

FULL SIZE MODULES

BLANKING PLATE

DPSM, IPSM, OR EPSM

Figure 1-3 BSU shelf

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

19

GMR-04

Base station unit shelf assembly

GSM-100-333

Shelf module fit

Table 1-2 shows the module positions in a fully-equipped BSU shelf assembly: NOTE If AMR hardware modules are installed, in Table 1-2, where appropriate: Read KSW as DSW2 Read XCDR as GDP2 Read GPROC as GPROC3

Table 1-2 BSU shelf module positions Slot U0 U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7 U8 U9 U10 U11 U12 U13 U14 U15 U16 U17 U18 U19 U20 U21 U22 U23 U24 U25 U26 U27 Half size modules KSWX L KSWX L KSWX R or CLKX KSWX R or CLKX KSWX R or CLKX KSWX R or CLKX KSWX R or CLKX KSWX R or CLKX KSWX E KSWX E Not used in this cabinet Not used in this cabinet Not used in this cabinet Not used in this cabinet Not used in this cabinet Not used in this cabinet PIX or BBBX PIX or BBBX PIX or BBBX LANX LANX KSWX E KSWX E KSWX E KSWX R KSWX R KSWX R KSWX R Slot L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12 L13 L14 L15 L16 L17 L18 L19 L20 L21 L22 L23 L24 L25 L26 L27 GCLK (note 1) MSI or XCDR (note 2) MSI or XCDR (note 2) MSI or XCDR (note 2) MSI or XCDR (note 2) MSI or XCDR (note 2) MSI or XCDR (note 2) MSI or XCDR (note 2) MSI or XCDR (note 2) MSI or XCDR (note 2) MSI or XCDR (note 2) MSI or XCDR (note 2) MSI or XCDR (note 2) GPROC GPROC GPROC GPROC GPROC GPROC GPROC GPROC Spare KSW
29 Aug 1997

Full size modules BTC KSW

GCLK (note 1)

110

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

Base station unit shelf assembly

U28 Notes:

KSWX R

L28

BTC

1. GCLK modules take up two slots: L2 and L3, or L4 and L5. 2. Maximum six XCDR modules in any MSI slot positions. 3. GDP modules will use XCDR slot positions.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

111

GMR-04

Base station unit shelf assembly

GSM-100-333

Ventilation
Blanking plates are inserted in all unused full size and power supply module slots to assist with the correct airflow and ventilation.

Backplane connectors
Table 1-3 shows the function of each connector fitted at the top of the BSU backplane: Table 1-3 BSU backplane connectors Connector AI0 AI1 AI2 KS0 KS1 GK0 MS0 MS1 MS2 MS3 DR0 DR1 DR2 DR3 DR4 DR5 Function Serial bus primary (lower BSU only), to DAB Serial bus redundant (lower BSU only), to DAB +5 V DRAM power, from BBBX TTY test connector, to KSW/DSW2 in slot L27 TTY test connector, to KSW/DSW2 in slot L1 GPS receiver connector, to interconnect panel on top of cabinet MSI connector, to interconnect panel T43/BIB on top of cabinet MSI connector, to interconnect panel T43/BIB on top of cabinet MSI connector, to interconnect panel T43/BIB on top of cabinet MSI connector, to interconnect panel T43/BIB on top of cabinet Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used

112

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

Remote transcoder unit shelf assembly

Remote transcoder unit shelf assembly

Overview
A remote transcoder unit (RXU) shelf assembly consists of: S S A backplane. Two vertical-slot module shelves containing the required digital modules: S The upper shelf holds half size digital modules. The lower shelf holds full size digital modules.

A three-compartment shelf for the power supply modules.

Every cabinet must be fitted with: S S Two bus termination cards (BTC). One local area network extender (LANX) module.

All other digital modules are optional, and their inclusion depends upon the cabinet configuration.

RXU numbering
In a RXCDR, RXUs are numbered 0 or 1 using the sixteen position (0 to F hex) rotary switch on the LANX module. This rotary switch sets the RXU LAN address.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

113

GMR-04

Remote transcoder unit shelf assembly

GSM-100-333

RXU shelf
Figure 1-4 shows a remote transcoder unit shelf:
PART OF RXU BACKPLANE AI0 AI1 AI2 KS0 MS0 MS1 MS2 HALF SIZE MODULES MS3 KS1

FULL SIZE MODULES

BLANKING PLATE

DPSM, IPSM OR EPSM

Figure 1-4 RXU shelf

114

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

Remote transcoder unit shelf assembly

Shelf module fit

Table 1-4 shows the module positions in a fully-equipped RXU shelf assembly: NOTE If AMR hardware modules are fitted retrospectively in BSSC installations, for the purpose of Table 1-2: For KSWX, read DSWX as relevant. For KSW, read DSW2 as relevant. For GDP, read GDP2 as relevant Table 1-4 BSU shelf module positions Parameter U0 U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7 U8 U9 U10 U11 U12 U13 U14 U15 U16 U17 U18 U19 U20 U21 U22 U23 U24 U25 U26 U27 Valid Input KSWX L KSWX L KSWX R or CLKX KSWX R or CLKX KSWX R or CLKX KSWX R or CLKX KSWX R or CLKX KSWX E or CLKX KSWX E KSWX E Not used in this cabinet Not used in this cabinet Not used in this cabinet Not used in this cabinet Not used in this cabinet Not used in this cabinet PIX or BBBX PIX or BBBX PIX or BBBX LANX LANX KSWX E KSWX E KSWX E KSWX R KSWX R KSWX R KSWX R Default L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12 L13 L14 L15 L16 L17 L18 L19 L20 L21 L22 L23 L24 L25 L26 L27 GCLK * XCDR, GDP or MSI XCDR, GDP or MSI XCDR, GDP or MSI XCDR, GDP or MSI XCDR, GDP or MSI XCDR, GDP XCDR, GDP XCDR, GDP XCDR, GDP XCDR, GDP XCDR, GDP XCDR, GDP XCDR, GDP XCDR, GDP XCDR, GDP XCDR, GDP XCDR, GDP XCDR, GDP XCDR, GDP or NVM GPROC GPROC KSW GCLK * Default BTC KSW

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

115

GMR-04

Remote transcoder unit shelf assembly

GSM-100-333

Parameter U28

Valid Input KSWX R

Default L28

Default BTC

* GCLK boards take up two slots: L2 and L3, or L4 and L5

116

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

Remote transcoder unit shelf assembly

Ventilation
Blanking plates are inserted in all unused full size and power supply module slots to assist with the correct airflow and ventilation.

Backplane connectors
Table 1-5 shows the function of each connector fitted at the top of the RXU backplane: Table 1-5 RXU backplane connectors Connector AI0 AI1 AI2 KS0 KS1 MS0 MS1 MS2 MS3 Function Serial bus primary (lower RXU shelf only), to DAB Serial bus redundant (lower RXU shelf only), to DAB +5 V DRAM power, from BBBX TTY test connector, to KSW in slot L27 TTY test connector, to KSW in slot L1 MSI connector, to interconnect panel T43/BIB on top of cabinet MSI connector, to interconnect panel T43/BIB on top of cabinet MSI connector, to interconnect panel T43/BIB on top of cabinet MSI connector, to interconnect panel T43/BIB on top of cabinet

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

117

GMR-04

Power distribution unit components

GSM-100-333

Power distribution unit components

Introduction
This section describes the cabinet dc power distribution arrangements.

Overview
The power distribution unit (PDU) is located on the top shelf of the cabinet and: S S Distributes dc power throughout the cabinet. Provides an alarm interface.

It consists of: S S A distribution alarm board (DAB). A circuit breaker panel containing seven dc circuit breakers.

Input power
DC input power is applied at the interconnection panel on top of the cabinet and is routed to: S S The VIN bus bar. The earth (GND) bus bar in the PDU.

A second bus bar obtains +27 V power from: S S The integrated power supply modules (IPSMs) in the lower BSU in positive earth (48/60 V) cabinets. The VIN and GND busbars, via busbar links, in negative earth (+27 V) cabinets.

Circuit breakers
The seven circuit breakers distribute power to units within the cabinet. S S CB1 (30 A) provides +27 V to the DAB. CB5 to CB10 (60 A) provide: 48/60 V to the IPSMs in a positive earth cabinet. +27 V to the EPSMs in a negative earth cabinet.

118

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

Fan cooling system

Fan cooling system

Overview
Each fan tray assembly contains three exhaust fans. Cabinet baffling divides the cabinet cooling system into upper and lower cabinet cooling sub-systems. The cooling system, in conjunction with the correct use of shelf airflow deflectors, provides adequate cooling for all cabinet equipment. Each fan has a fan stall sensor which is connected to alarm circuits in the DAB through connector PC5.

Location
The fan cooling system is mounted directly below each BSU/RXU shelf assembly.

Requirements
Power for the fans is derived from the +27 V busbar and is routed to the +27 V terminal on the DAB, then from connector PC9 on the DAB to the fans.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

119

GMR-04

Interconnect panel

GSM-100-333

Interconnect panel
Overview
The interconnect panel is mounted on the top of the cabinet and provides connections for: S S S S DC input power. E1/T1 line interconnect modules. Customer defined alarm equipment input/output. +27 V battery backup input for DRAM.

The Interconnect panel has feed-through tubes for routeing fibre optic inter-cabinet cables into and out of the cabinet. The E1/T1 line interconnection modules are: S S Type 43 (T43) interconnect boards. Balanced line interconnect boards (BIB).

Panel layout
Figure 1-5 shows the interconnect panel:
FIBRE OPTIC CABLES FEED THROUGH TUBE

GKO BATTERY BACKUP PIX 1 EARTH STUD V IN PIX 0 48/60 V dc or +27 V dc 0V

Figure 1-5 Interconnect panel

120

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

Interconnect panel

Connectors
Table 1-6 shows the interconnect panel connector functions: Table 1-6 |Interconnect panel connectors Connector +27 V Battery Back-up MS0 to MS3 Function DRAM back-up battery Multiple serial interface ports (up to six E1/T1 circuits at each h connector; t six i Tx and six Rx circuits) Customer alarm input/output ports Internal destination PAB connector PC4 and BBBX connector PC2 MS0 to MS3 connectors on lower BSU/RXU backplane MS4 to MS7 connectors on upper BSU/RXU backplane Front edge connector of PIX modules Customer alarm equipment External destination +27 V back-up battery

E1/T1 circuits source or termination equipment (via a T43 or BIB)

MS4 to MS7

PIX0 and PIX1

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

121

GMR-04

BSSC Cabinet labels

GSM-100-333

BSSC Cabinet labels

Introduction
This section details the warning, advisory and other labels on the BSSC cabinet.

BSSC labels
Figure 1-6 shows the position of labels on the BSSC cabinet: 6 5 4 3 2 7 8 9

Motorola

1 10 11 12 13 14

26 25

15 16 17 18

24 23

19 22 20 21

FRONT OF DOOR Figure 1-6 BSSC cabinet labels

122

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

BSSC Cabinet labels

Key to BSSC labels

Table 1-7 details the labels on the BSSC cabinet: Table 1-7 BSSC cabinet labels Key 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Safety glasses
Fuse map Circuit breaker CE mark Safety EN60 950 T43 connection Rating label Danger energy hazard Earth label Serial number Warning live terminals Panel must be in place Warning possible laser radiation Caution isolate Warning disconnect fuse Panel must be in place Warning live terminals ESD Halfsize module laser hazard Caution isolate Warning disconnect fuse ESD and card map Warning possible laser radiation Open door handle ESD and card map Safety glasses

Description

Part Number
5402275W01 5402347W01 5402349W03 5402349W04 5402470W01 5402489W01 5402401W01 5402284W03 5402284W04 5402192W01 5402098W01 N/A 5409954E01 5409816E01 5402274W01 5402374W01 N/A 5409816E01 5409954E01 5409951E01 5402281W01 5402374W01 N/A 5402305W01 5402274W01 5402471W01 5402305W01 5402275W01

Comments

Factory marked

Part of fan

-48/-60V cabinets only

Part of fan

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

123

GMR-04

BSSC2 Cabinet labels

GSM-100-333

BSSC2 Cabinet labels

Overview
The following diagrams and tables show the location of the warning, advisory and specific labels applied to the BSSC2 equipment cabinet. Refer to the labelling table for the key to the numbers on the diagrams.

Labelling diagrams
Figure 1-7 and Figure 1-8 show the location of labels on the BSSC2 cabinet. Table 1-8 and Table 1-9 give details of the information displayed on the indicated label.

Door front

Figure 1-7 BSSC2 cabinet labels - door front

124

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

BSSC2 Cabinet labels

Internal labelling
5 4 3 2 1 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 21 14 15

20

16

19 17 18

Figure 1-8 BSSC2 cabinet labels

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

125

GMR-04

BSSC2 Cabinet labels

GSM-100-333

Labelling tables
Table 1-8 explains the label on the door front diagram: Table 1-8 BSSC2 cabinet door front label details Key 1 Safety glasses Description Part number 5402275W01 Comments

Table 1-9 explains the labels on the internal labelling diagram: Table 1-9 BSSC2 cabinet internal labelling details Key 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Fuse map Circuit breaker CE mark Safety EN60 950 T43 connection Rating label Danger energy hazard Earth label Serial number Warning live terminals Warning possible laser Caution isolate Warning live terminals Warning disconnect fuse Half size module laser hazard ESD Caution isolate Warning disconnect fuse ESD and card map Warning possible laser radiation ESD and card map Description Part number 5402347W01 5402349W03 5402349W04 5402470W01 5402489W01 5402401W01 5402284W03 5402284W04 5402192W01 5402098W01 N/A 5409954E01 5402274W01 5402374W01 5409954E01 N/A 5402281W01 5409951E01 5402374W01 N/A 5402305W01 5402274W01 5402305W01 Part of fan 48/60 V cabinet only Part of fan Comments

126

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

BSSC2 cabinet cabling

BSSC2 cabinet cabling

Overview
This section contains the following cabinet cabling diagrams for a BSSC2 with a DAB type PDU:

Diagram 1
BSSC2 cabinet (48/60 V) dc power and alarm cabling diagram.

Diagram 2
BSSC2 cabinet (+27 V) dc power and alarm cabling diagram.

Diagram 3
BSSC2 cabinet digital cabling diagram.

Diagram 4
Example of BSU and RXU module to T43 or BIB connections.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

127

GMR-04

BSSC2 cabinet cabling

GSM-100-333

Diagram 1
BSSC2 cabinet (48/60 V) dc power and alarm cabling diagram.

128

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

BSSC2 cabinet cabling

Diagram 2
BSSC2 cabinet (+27 V) dc power and alarm cabling.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

129

GMR-04

BSSC2 cabinet cabling

GSM-100-333

Diagram 3
BSSC2 cabinet digital cabling diagram

130

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

BSSC2 cabinet cabling

Diagram 4
Example of BSU and RXU module to T43 or BIB connections.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

131

GMR-04

BSSC differences

GSM-100-333

BSSC differences
Introduction
The BSSC cabinet is the same as the BSSC2 except in terms of its power distribution and alarm handling arrangements. This section describes these differences; it must be read with reference to the rest of this chapter. NOTE This section does not apply to DCS1800 and PCS1900 systems.

Types of PDU
The BSSC PDU is available in two forms that are functionally the same. These two types comprise: S S A power distribution board (PDB), an alarm interface board (AIB) and a circuit breaker panel. A power alarm board (PAB) and a circuit breaker panel.

The PAB combines the PDB and AIB functions. The distribution alarm board (DAB), as used by the BSSC2, supersedes both of these types.

PDB
The power distribution board distributes +27 V and +5 V to units in the cabinet via 25 fuses. The PDB is described in chapter 3.

AIB
The alarm interface board monitors alarm lines, passes individual alarms to the GPROC and provides a signal for the cabinet alarm LED. The AIB is described in chapter 3.

PAB
The power alarm board distributes +27 V and +5 V to units in the cabinet via 30 fuses, monitors alarm lines, passes individual alarms to the GPROC and provides a signal for the cabinet alarm LED. The PAB is described in chapter 3.

Circuit breakers
Power from the VIN bus bar is distributed to power supplies within the cabinet via the circuit breaker panel described in chapter 3.

132

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

BSSC cabinet cabling (PAB)

BSSC cabinet cabling (PAB)

Overview
This section contains the following cabinet cabling diagrams for a BSSC with PAB type PDU:

Diagram 1
BSSC cabinet (48/60 V) dc power and alarm cabling.

Diagram 2
BSSC cabinet (+27 V) dc power and alarm cabling. NOTE This section does not apply to DCS1800 and PCS1900 systems.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

133

GMR-04

BSSC cabinet cabling (PAB)

GSM-100-333

Diagram 1
BSSC cabinet (48/60 V) dc power and alarm cabling.

134

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

BSSC cabinet cabling (PAB)

Diagram 2
BSSC cabinet (+27 V) dc power and alarm cabling.

SURGE CAPACITOR GK0

VIN

0V

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

135

GMR-04

BSSC cabinet cabling (PDB/AIB)

GSM-100-333

BSSC cabinet cabling (PDB/AIB)

Overview
This section contains the cabinet cabling diagram for a BSSC with PDB/AIB type PDU:

Diagram 1
BSSC cabinet dc power and alarm cabling. NOTE This section does not apply to DCS1800 and PCS1900 systems.

136

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

BSSC cabinet cabling (PDB/AIB)

Diagram 1
BSSC cabinet dc power and alarm cabling.

SURGE CAPACITOR GK0

VIN

0V

PC5

PC 7

PC3 CABINET DOOR LED PC1 AIB

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
C B5 C B4 C B3 C B2 C B1 C B0

PC2 PC3
PC 1

PC4 GND PC6 PCB PC5

5 2 4 1 3 PC7 0

PS29 PS29 PS19 PS19 PS9 PS9

PC 6

PC9 PC2

PC 8
PS 2 8

PS 1 8

PS 2 8

PS 1 8

PS 8

PS 8

+27V

PDB

GDN BUS BAR (GBB)

UPPER

BSU BA CKPLANE (OPTIONAL)

CB5 (RED) CB4 (RED) CB3 (RED) GBB (BLK) GBB (BLK) GBB (BLK)

LO WER BSU BA CKPLANE

CB2 (RED) CB1 (RED) CB0 (RED) GBB (BLK) GBB (BLK) GBB (BLK)

ig.196.rh

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

137

GMR-04

BSSC cabinet cabling (PDB/AIB)

GSM-100-333

138

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

Chapter 2

Digital modules

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

ii

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

Chapter 2 Digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSU and RXU shelf diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RXU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module front panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Full-size modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTC module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSW2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timeslot interchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote TDM highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion TDM highways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three party conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Self-diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slot position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GCLK module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference dividers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference encoders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference fail detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock control/alarm logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Buffered test ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GCLK diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GDP2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GDP2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCU subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSP subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1 Line interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CRC-4 Error checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital crosspoint switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCAP interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TDM interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GDP2 diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
21 21 21 22 22 22 23 25 25 27 27 27 28 28 28 28 29 29 211 211 211 212 214 214 215 215 216 216 216 216 217 217 217 217 217 218 218 219 220 220 220 221 222 222 223 223 223 223 224 224 224 224 225

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

iii

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

GPROC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPROC module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS and BSC GPROC functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RXCDR GPROC functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flash EPROM daughter card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPROC diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPROC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPROC2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSC GPROC2 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RXCDR GPROC2 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPROC2 diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSW module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timing reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switchbound TDM interface structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion switchbound highways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timeslot interchange (TSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection RAM control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three-party conference (TPC) memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed/dynamic pattern registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outbound selection MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Highway monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Watchdog timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupt logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial interface logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSW switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSW in a BSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSW in a RXCDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSW diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interconnected KSWs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSI module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transcoded environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSI diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv

226 226 226 226 227 227 227 227 228 228 229 230 231 232 232 232 232 233 233 233 234 234 234 235 236 237 237 237 237 238 238 238 239 239 239 240 240 240 240 240 241 241 241 241 241 242 243 244 244 244 245 245 246 246 248
29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

MSI-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSI-2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transcoded environment (E1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transcoded environment (T1/JT1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSI-2 diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XCDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XCDR module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subrate multiplexer modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCAP interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TDM interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XCDR diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GDP module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCU subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSP subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subrate multiplexer modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1/T1 Line interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CRC-4 Error checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital crosspoint switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCAP interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TDM interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GDP diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NVM board description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of the NVM board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrogating the NVM board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Half-size modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBBX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBBX diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

249 249 249 250 250 251 251 251 254 255 255 255 256 256 256 257 257 257 258 258 258 258 259 260 260 261 261 261 262 262 262 262 263 263 264 264 264 265 266 266 266 267 267 268 268 268 269 269 269 269 270

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

CLKX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GCLK module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLKX diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSWX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSWX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSWX Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSWX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSWX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSWX diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LANX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LANX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brief description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local LAN data switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended LAN data switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bus arbiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shelf ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LANX diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

271 271 271 271 272 273 273 273 274 274 276 277 277 277 278 278 279 280 280 280 281 281 281 282 283 283 283 283 284 285 285 285 285 286

vi

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

Overview

Overview
Introduction
This chapter describes the digital modules used in BSS equipment cabinets (BSC and RXCDR). The digital modules fit into the base station unit (BSU) and remote transcoder unit (RXU) shelves.

In this chapter
CAUTION Do not fit digital modules in any equipment for which they are not suitable.

NOTE Some AMR hardware modules can be installed retrospectively in BSSC installations (non-AMR). Technical details of these modules are included in this chapter, but it important to note the performance constraints indicated for non-BSSC3 installations. All information given is valid for GSM, EGSM, DCS1800 and PCS1900 systems unless otherwise indicated.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

21

GMR-04

BSU and RXU shelf diagrams

GSM-100-333

BSU and RXU shelf diagrams

Introduction
This section contains BSU and RXU shelf module assignments and associated information. Subsequent sections in this chapter describe each module.

BSU shelf
Figure 2-1 shows the BSU shelf slot assignment and backplane connectors:

Figure 2-1 BSU shelf layout

BSU Module slots

S S S S Slots are numbered from 0 to 28 from right to left. Half-size modules are fitted in the upper row. Full-size modules are fitted in the lower row. Master slots must be equipped first for initialization purposes: S
22

Slot L5 GCLK. Slot L20 GPROC. Slot L16 MSI/2. Slot L27 KSW.

All unused slots must be fitted with a blanking plate. Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O
29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

BSU and RXU shelf diagrams

BSU backplane connectors

S S S S S S AI0 and AI1 are 10-pin headers. AI2 is a 4-pin power connector to the back up supply (BBBX). KS0 and KS1 are 20-pin headers and provide TTY access to serial ports for KSW/DSW2 boards. DR0 to DR5 are 20-pin headers and provide TTY access to serial ports for DRI/MSI boards. GK0 is a 9-pin D-type and provides a GCLK synchronization input. MS0 to MS3 are 37-pin D-types for connecting E1/T1 circuits.

RXU shelf
Figure 2-2 shows the RXU shelf slot assignment and backplane connectors:

Figure 2-2 RXU shelf layout

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

23

GMR-04

BSU and RXU shelf diagrams

GSM-100-333

RXU module slots

S S S S Slots are numbered from 0 to 28 from right to left. Half-size modules are fitted in the upper row. Full-size modules are fitted in the lower row. Master slots must be equipped first for initialization purposes. S Slot L5 GCLK. Slot L25 GPROC. Slot L10 MSI/2, XCDR, GDP / GDP2 Slot L27 KSW/DSW2.

All unused slots must be fitted with a blanking plate.

Backplane connectors.
S S S S AI0 and AI1 are 10-pin headers. AI2 is a 4-pin power connector to the back up supply (BBBX). KS0 and KS1 provide TTY access to serial ports for KSWs / DSW2s. MS0 to MS3 are 37-pin D-types for connecting E1/T1 lines.

24

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

Module front panels

Module front panels

Introduction
This section is a quick reference guide to the status indicators and switches on the front panels of the digital modules in BSU and RXU shelves. Subsequent sections in this chapter describe each module. The reset switch on a module will not return a Disabled or Locked module to service. If the module was BU or EU before the module was reset then it will return to an inservice state either Busy or Enabled. Once a module is locked disabling the module will have no effect on the status of the module as displayed via MMI, disabling a module results in isolating the module from the cage. Modules not listed below have no status indicators or front panel switches. Table 2-1 gives details of the status indicators found on module front panels, and what given indications mean. Table 2-1 Module front panel status indicators Module
GCLK

Status indicators
Green LED on only Red LED on only Both LEDs on Both LEDs off =Master, no alarms =Alarms, not Master =Master and alarms =Not Master, no alarms (or no power) (alarms: oscillator or PLL failure, ref. counter overflow) Green LED on only =Processor running, no alarms Red LED on only =Processor halted or in reset Both LEDs on =Processor running, board is disabled or other alarm Both LEDs off =No power to board Both LEDs flashing =Bootstrap reprogram in progress Green LED on only =Processor running, no alarms Red LED on only =Processor halted or in reset Both LEDs on =Processor running, board is disabled or other alarm Both LEDs off =No power to board Green LED on only =Processor running, no alarms Red LED on only =Processor halted or in reset Both LEDs on =Processor running, board is disabled or other alarm Both LEDs off =No power to board Green LED on only =Processor running, no alarms Red LED on only =Processor halted or in reset Both LEDs on =Processor running, board is disabled or other alarm Both LEDs off =No power to board Green LED on =Master, no alarms Green LED blinking =Slave, no alarms Green LED off =TDM bus or Clock alarms (or no power)

Front panel switches

Toggle switch (three position) Up (momentary) =Reset board Middle =Normal operation Down =Disable board for extraction Potentiometer =Adjustment for the VCXO**

GPROC

Toggle switch (three position) Up (momentary) =Reset board, download code Middle =Normal operation Down =Disable board for extraction

KSW/DSW2

Toggle switch (three position) Up (momentary) =Reset board, download code Middle =Normal operation Down =Disable board for extraction

MSI

Toggle switch (three position) Up (momentary) =Reset board, download code Middle =Normal operation Down =Disable board for extraction

XCDR and GDP

Toggle switch (three position) Up (momentary) =Reset board Middle =Normal operation Down =Disable board for extraction

KSWX/DSWX

Toggle switch (three position) Up (momentary) =Reset board Middle =Normal operation Down =Disable board for extraction

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

25

GMR-04

Module front panels

GSM-100-333

Module
NVM

Status indicators
Board status LEDs: Green LED on only =Processor running, no alarms Red LED on only =Alarms, board reset or board awaiting initialization Both LEDs off =Total power failure Card status LEDs: Green LED on only =PCMCIA card operational Red LED on only =Fault on PCMCIA card Both LEDs flashing =Software writing data to the card Both LEDs off =Card slot not in use None

Front panel switches

Toggle switch (three position) Up (momentary) =Reset board Middle =Normal operation Down =Disable board for extraction Card swap switch: Operation not currently supported Card eject: Operation not currently supported

LANX

Rotary switch (16 position) For setting shelf ID number =No alarms =Customer alarm detected None

PIX

Green LED on Green LED off

26

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

Full-size modules

Full-size modules
Introduction
Full-size modules fit into slots in the lower card cage of a BSU or RXU shelf. The slots are numbered, right to left, from L0 to L28. The following sections describe the full-size modules that can be mounted in a BSU or RXU. The quantity fitted depends upon the specific configuration of the BSU or RXU.

The modules
The following full-sized modules are described: S S S S S S S S S Bus terminator card (BTC). Digital radio interface extended memory (DRIM). Generic clock (GCLK). Generic processor (GPROC/2). Kiloport switch (KSW) Double Kiloport switch (DSW2) Multiple serial interface (MSI/2). Transcoder (XCDR). Generic DSP Processor (GDP and GDP2). Non Volatile Memory (NVM).

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

27

GMR-04

BTC

GSM-100-333

BTC
Purpose
The bus termination card (BTC) terminates the backplane to keep signals on a BSU or RXU shelf at the proper TTL level. The BTC terminates: S S S S Both MCAP buses. Both BSS serial buses. Both reference clocks. All TDM buses (Expansion, Remote and Local).

Requirements
Two BTC modules must be fitted in each BSU or RXU shelf, in slot L0 and slot L28, at all times. While a faulty BTC is being replaced, another BTC must be fitted in a KSW slot to maintain the above requirement.

BTC module
Figure 2-3 shows a BTC module:

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

ig.199.rh

Figure 2-3 BTC module

28

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

DSW2

DSW2
Purpose
The double kiloport switch 2 (DSW2) module is a time division multiplex (TDM), multiple access digital switch designed to support a non-blocking switching fabric. The DSW2 is compatible with legacy software, and can be used in place of the KSW in BSSC2 installations. NOTE When installed retrospectively in BSSC installations, the DSW2 operates in a KSW mode. In this situation the full DSW2 performance detailed in this section will be constrained as indicated in the text. The DSW2: S S S S S S S Performs timeslot interchange for the active TDM highway. Communicates with the controlling GPROC2 via the MCAP bus. At a BSC, routes logical channels dynamically, on a per-call basis. At an RXCDR provides fixed switching for traffic between the BSC and MSC. Supports 3-party conferencing (TPC). Provides a range of diagnostic features. Provides expanded capacity via multiple-DSW2 configurations.

The DSW2 is shown in Figure 2-4.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29

GMR-04

DSW2

GSM-100-333

Figure 2-4 DSW2 module

Alarm (Red) LED. Normally OFF Active (Green) LED. Normally ON

Backplane connector

RESET/DISABLE switch

210

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

DSW2

Timeslot interchange
The primary function of the DSW2 is to switch data from a given timeslot on the active inbound (switchbound) ) TDM highway, to a given timeslot on the active outbound TDM highway. DSW2 switching at the BSC is variable; physical channel mapping on the A interface is performed for each call, and at every handover. DSW2 switching in an RXU3 shelf is fixed; it provides one-to-one physical mapping between the traffic to and from the BSC and the traffic to and from the MSC. The DSW2 can be configured to use the following TDM highways, according to requirements: S S S Local TDM highway. Remote TDM highway. Three Expansion TDM highways.

These are described in the following sections.

Local highway
The Local TDM inbound highway uses the Local Highway 0 port on the DSW2. This port is used for Highway 0 traffic within the same physical cage as the DSW2.

Remote TDM highway

The Remote TDM inbound highway uses the Remote Highway 0 port on the DSW2. This port is used to extend the switching functions of a local DSW2 to other cages. Since there is no increase in the number of DSW2s, there is no expansion or increase in the switching capacity. Each remote cage is linked to the primary cage by a fibre optic cable, via DSW extender modules. In the primary cage a Remote DSW extender (DSWXR) module interfaces the fibre optic to the Remote TDM Highway. At each remote cage a Local DSWX module (DSWXL), provides a Local TDM Highway within the cage. An example of a DSW2 extended to a second cage is shown in Figure 2-5.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

211

GMR-04

DSW2

GSM-100-333

Figure 2-5 DSW2 extended connection

Inbound local Outbound highway

TSI

PRIMARY BSU/RXU SHELF

DSW2

DSWXR Fibre optic cables

REMOTE BSU/RXU SHELF

DSWXL

Local TDM highway

Expansion TDM highways

Highways 1-3 are Expansion inbound TDM highways. These highways allow multiple DSW2s located in different cages to be configured in parallel, via Expansion DSW extender (DSWXE) modules. Because the number of DSW2s is increased, the available switching capacity is expanded accordingly. The three highways enable up to four DSW2s to be connected in this way, including the DSW2 in the primary cage. An example of three DSW2s connected in parallel is shown in Figure 2-6.

212

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

DSW2

Figure 2-6 DSW2 expansion

Inbound local 2048 ports Each DSW2 routes inbound data to the TSI section and to the expansion outbound highway TSI Outbound highway 2048 ports Expansion outbound highway is sent to each DSWXE DSWXE

DSW2

BSU/RXU SHELF

DSWXE

Inbound local 2048 ports TDM data is sent to/from DSWXE to DSWXE TSI

Outbound highway 2048 ports

DSW2

BSU/RXU SHELF
Fibre optic cables

DSWXE

Data from other DSW2s is sent to the TSI section (2048 each)

DSWXE

Inbound local 2048 ports TSI

Outbound highway 2048 ports

BSU/RXU SHELF
DSW2 All expansion inbound data is sent (along with the inbound local) to the TSI for switching to the outbound highway

DSWXE

DSWXE

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

213

GMR-04

DSW2

GSM-100-333

Outbound TDM highways

The RAM based Timeslot Assigner (TSA) generates output enables to select the inbound data for each outbound timeslot. In this way the correct data to be sent outbound from the DSW2 is captured by selectively enabling the outputs of all possible data sources. The possible data sources encompass: S S S S S Timeslot Interchange (TSI) data. This is the normal operating mode. Three-party Conference data. Fixed patterns for A-law and u-law idle channel codes. Dynamic and static patterns generated by the DSP for test purposes. Remote outbound highway. Used to extend the switching capacity to other cages, via DSWX cards. Note that the switching capacity is extended, not expanded or increased. Local outbound highway. Used for traffic within the same physical cage as the DSW2. A 12-timeslot delay is introduced on this path to maintain timing alignment with the remote outbound highway, which is subject to various TDM delays.

The DSW2 outbound highway interface itself comprises:

Double-rate TDM bus:The maximum outbound TDM highway bandwidth is 131.072 Mb/s, partitioned into 2048 timeslots. This double rate TDM bus can be used when the DSW2 is configured in extended mode, which allows the capacity to be shared between cages. Note that the backplane clock frequency is not changed. Supported channel types include 64, 32, 16 and 8 kbit/s. The DSW2 therefore supports a maximum of 2048 64kbit/s channels, 4096 32 kbit/s channels, 8192 16kbit/s channels, or 16384 8 kbit/s channels. One TDM frame can contain any combination of these channels. Standard-rate TDM bus: The DSW2 also supports a KSW mode of operation, for which the outbound highway is partitioned into 1024 timeslots to provide a standard rate TDM bus. The potential bandwidth of the outbound highway is thus halved in this mode of operation. The usable switching capacity of each DSW2 depends on site hardware and software configurations because certain modules require a number of ports for their own use. The DSW2 is controlled by the local GPROC2 or GPROC3 via the MCAP bus.

Three party conference

Three party conference mode is effected by decoding and summing the timeslots of two A-law or two u-law PCM-encoded channels. The summed data is then re-encoded/compressed, and selected as the data source for the active outbound highway. A-law or u-law selection is not intended to change on a timeslot basis. The DSW2 supports any number of three party conference calls, within its maximum channel capacity.

Self-diagnostics
Timeslot interchange: Fixed/dynamic pattern generation is used in conjunction with timeslot monitoring to provide extensive self-diagnostics for the timeslot interchange section. DSP: The DSP is monitored by a watchdog timer. The DSP writes to a memory-mapped address that periodically resets the watchdog timer, ensuring that it does not time out. If the DSP stops running, the watchdog timer times out and causes the red LED on the front panel to illuminate. An interrupt is also generated and sent to the GPROC3 via the MCAP bus. If a DSP fails, the TSI section of the DSW2 still switches data, but no new path connections are implemented. This results in existing calls being held while the system is reconfigured around the failed DSW2.
214

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

DSW2

Serial interface
The serial interface logic supports the TTY interface. This interface is connected to a dedicated backplane connector port. This port is a buffered RS232 type. The TTY can be used to control the DSW2, monitor DSW2 status, and support DSW2 diagnostics.

Slot position
The DSW2 is located in the following slots in a BSU or RXU3 shelf assembly: S S L1 for TDM highway B. L27 for TDM highway A.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

215

GMR-04

GCLK

GSM-100-333

GCLK
Purpose
The generic clock (GCLK) module generates all the timing reference signals that the BSU or RXU requires. The master TDM clock is normally synthesized from a 16.384 MHz 0.05 ppm stable reference (temperature stabilized crystal oscillator) and a 2.048 MHz or 1.544 MHz clock recovered from one of the E1 or T1 lines.

Requirements
The GCLK module fits in slots L3 and L5 in the BSU and RXU shelf assemblies. The module is two slots wide and covers L2/L3 and L4/L5. There must be a GCLK module in slot L5 of all BSU and RXU shelf assemblies. A second GCLK module in slot L3 provides n + 1 redundancy. Mutually redundant GCLKs must reside in the same BSU or RXU.

GCLK module
Figure 2-7 shows a GCLK module:

ALARM LED (RED) ACTIVE LED (GREEN)

E1/T1 IN 16.384 MHz OUT 6.12S OUT 60mS OUT 125uS OUT GROUND FREQUENCY ADJUST RESET/DISABLE SWITCH UP (MOMENTARY) = RESET MIDDLE = NORMAL OPERATION DOWN = DISABLE BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

Figure 2-7 GCLK module

216

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

GCLK

Brief description
Refer to the functional block diagram at the end of this section. The GCLK module generates all timing reference signals required by the BSS: S S S S 16.384 MHz TDM clock. 125 ms frame reference. 60 ms synchronization reference. 6.12 s superframe reference.

The GCLK is phase-locked to the recovered clock of a selected E1/T1 line from an MSI or XCDR module. If the recovered clock signal is lost, and no long term average (LTA) is available upon which to synchronize, then the GCLK free-runs, providing reference stability better than 0.05 ppm. The module incorporates self-diagnostics to detect and isolate board faults and to select a redundant board in the event of module failure. When a redundant GCLK is present, the GCLKs operate in a master/slave configuration with the slaved outputs synchronized to the master. If an error is detected, the clock control circuit reverses the master/slave status of the two GCLKs. Fault status is reported to the main processor via the MCAP bus.

Reference oscillator
The reference oscillator uses a phase lock loop (PLL) and a frequency multiplier to synthesize 16.384 MHz from a E1/T1 line. The PLL consists of: S S S S A digital phase detector. A loop filter. A voltage controlled crystal oscillator (VCXO). A divide by eight loop divider.

If a fault is detected on the signal from both E1/T1 lines, the oscillator either uses the LTA (if available) or free runs with stability being maintained by the VCXO.

Reference dividers
The 125 ms, 60 ms, and 6.12 s reference dividers consist of cascaded programmable binary counters to divide the input signal to the correct output frequency. The reference dividers are synchronized to the master clock. The output of each reference counter is routed to a multiplexer, which is used to switch the reference output from the master or the slave GCLK. The output of each reference counter is also routed to the reference encoder.

Reference encoders
The reference encoder encodes the reference signals together while maintaining phase relationships. The encoded clock signals are routed via the backplane to a CLKX to be transmitted to other shelves at the site, via fibre optic cables.

Reference fail detect

The reference fail detect circuit monitors the signal on the two E1/T1 lines. Failures are reported to the clock control/alarm logic. In the event of a reference failure, the GCLK either uses the LTA (if available) or selects the secondary E1/T1 line reference. In either case an alarm is reported to the controlling GPROC via the MCAP bus.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

217

GMR-04

GCLK

GSM-100-333

Clock control/alarm logic

The clock control/alarm logic determines the GCLK master/slave status based on module faults and GPROC commands, and reports the operational status to the GPROC.

Buffered test ports

Buffered test ports are supplied on the front of the GCLK module for test and measurement of the input reference signal and output clock and reference signals. The test jacks are recessed.

218

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

GCLK

GCLK diagram
Figure 2-8 is a block diagram of the GCLK module:

Figure 2-8 GCLK block diagram

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

219

GMR-04

GDP2

GSM-100-333

GDP2
Purpose
The Generic DSP Processor 2 (GDP2) module is a transcoder board that supports Adaptive Multi Rate (AMR) speech, as well as data transcoding and rate adaption. The board supports 60 traffic channels, which can be dynamically switched between half rate, full rate and enhanced full rate (EFR) speech. The board can also be used to replace the GDP in an existing RXU backplane. NOTE This section describes the full design performance for the GDP2. If the GDP2 is installed retrospectively in BSSC installations (which do not have AMR speech capability), its performance will be constrained accordingly. In particular, its AMR capabilities are not used and it supports a single E1 line interface only. The GDP2 supports a redundant DSP block, which is transparently switched in the event of a single DSP block failure. This significantly increases availability compared to the original GDP board. NOTE The GDP2 module can be used only with systems running GSR7 software or later releases, as this contains the necessary software support to allow operation. For a BSC the transcoder boards it connects to must all be GDP2, not XCDR. The GDP2 module: S S S Provides the transcoding interface to the MSC. The GDP2 module is located at the RXCDR, or at a BSC where transcoding is integrated within the BSC. Interfaces two E1 serial lines to the internal cabinet TDM highway, which is in a parallel format. Transcodes 64 kbit/s data from the E1 lines, into 16 kbit/s or 8 kbit/s data., and vice versa.

Each GDP2 supports 60 compressed voice and data channels, using 8 + 1 DSPs. These channels, and the synchronization and link control signalling channels, can be placed in any of the 1024 channels on the TDM highway under control of the GPROC3.

Terminology
One wire pair (balanced or unbalanced) equals one E1 serial data stream. Two E1 serial data streams (transmit and receive) equal one E1.

Requirements
The GDP2 module is fitted in: S S Slots L6 to L17 (but maximum 6 modules in total) in the BSU shelf assembly. Slots L6 to L24 (maximum 19 modules) in the RXU3 shelf assembly.

An MSI-2 or GDP2 must be located in at least one of the BSU locations below for BSC initialization purposes. S S S Shelf 0 slot 16 (Software communicates via either group A or group B). Shelf 0 slot 14 (Software communicates via group A). Shelf 1 (if second BSU in BSC) slot 16 (Software communicates via group A).

An RXU3 initialization uses slot 10 instead of slot 16, and slot 8 instead of slot 14.
220

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

GDP2

GDP2 module
Figure 2-9 shows a GDP2 module, with the front panel interface shown in Figure 2-10. Figure 2-9 GDP2 module.

Alarm (Red) LED. Normally OFF

Backplane Connector

Active ( Green) LED. Normally ON

RESET/DISABLE switch

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

221

GMR-04

GDP2

GSM-100-333

Figure 2-10 Front panel interface

GDP2 Fail LED

GDP2 Operational LED Reset

Disable

Ethernet (RJ45)

Brief description
Refer to the GDP2 block diagram at the end of this section. The GDP2 module contains a digital signal processor (DSP) unit that performs: S S S GSM-defined speech encoding. GSM-defined speech decoding. Submultiplexing functions.

The speech transcoder bi-directionally interfaces the 64 kbit/s E1 line in the land network to the 13 kbit/s vocoder format used on the air interface. Signalling channels pass through the transcoder transparently.

Architecture
The GDP2 module contains the following major systems: S S S S S S
222

MCU subsystem. DSP subsystem. E1 Line interface. Digital crosspoint switch. MCAP interface. TDM interface. Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O
29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

GDP2

MCU subsystem
The main component of the processor system is the microcontroller unit (MCU), which S S S S S S S S Controls and interfaces the other major systems on the GDP2 module. Performs self-diagnostics and error monitoring. A watchdog timer. 256 kbytes of RAM. 512 kbytes of Flash EPROM. 1 kbyte of dual port RAM for MCAP messaging. 1 kbyte of dual port RAM for TDM interface. A power monitor circuit.

Other components of the processor system are:

The watchdog timer is periodically strobed by the MCU; an alarm is generated if it is not strobed before a pre-set timeout.

DSP subsystem
The DSP subsystem consists of 8 identical blocks plus one redundant, each with: S S S S One 275 MHz DSP processor 256kB x 32 dedicated SDRAM for program and data storage. Two Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interfaces (ESSIs) for traffic. On-board phase-locked loops (PLL) to maintain a clock in the event that the 16.384 clock input is lost. The PLL is designed to be stable enough to remain within range when the clock input is restored.

DSP firmware is downloadable. The MCU uses the host port to connect to the parallel bus of all DSPs for control, monitoring and download purposes. All the ESSI signals to the DSPs are buffered by tristate devices.

Multiplexer
There is a multiplexer within the serial data formatter. The multiplexer converts data from the DSP subsystem ESSI format to the digital crosspoint switch, ST Bus Format. This multiplexes four data streams from the switch into a single datastream for the DSPs. Each DSP receives the same timeslot data . The software running on the DSP maps which timeslot is to be transcoded by that DSP.

E1 Line interface
The line interface systems perform: S S Impedance matching. Secondary surge protection from high voltage transients (such as lightning strikes), which may come down the E1 lines.

The impedance matching and isolation circuits consist of isolation transformers and Zener diodes. After impedance matching and isolation each E1 line receive signal is input into a line interface unit/framer., which performs the clock recovery, data conversion, and framing. The clock extraction section extracts the E1 clock to which all BSU/RXU3 shelves can be synchronized. The framer performs frame decoding law CCITT recommendation G.704 for digital multiplex equipment. Traffic is then routed to the switching system. The GDP2 provides a loopback from each line input to line output, for E1 link troubleshooting.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

223

GMR-04

GDP2

GSM-100-333

CRC-4 Error checking

A GDP2 module configured for use with an E1 serial line supports CRC-4 error checking. This is set by default to the on state 0. All associated switches (MSCs) must also have CRC-4 error checking set to the on state, so allowing communication across the A-interface To check if the GDP2 board CRC-4 state is set, use the MMS_config_type CM database command. disp_element MMS_config_type <location> Refer to Technical Description: BSS Command Reference (68P02901W23) for information on the above CM database command. To ensure the correct setting of CRC-4 error checking at the MSC, consult the vendor supplied equipment manual.

Digital crosspoint switch

The switching system consists of a digital switch, which performs the following functions:. S S Transmission of E1 line data and TDM data streams. Connection between the processor section and the E1 line interface system.

MCAP interface
The MCAP interface system supports two redundant MCAP buses to the GDP2. The GDP2 communicates with the GPROC3 in the same way as all other full-size modules.

TDM interface
The TDM interface system takes traffic data from the TDM bus and converts it from parallel data to serial data. The serial data is then sent to the switching system.

224

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

GDP2

GDP2 diagram
Figure 2-11 shows a block diagram of the GDP2 module: Figure 2-11 GDP2 block diagram BACKPLANE

E1 Line Interface

E1 Line Interface

TDM Interface

ESSI Test Port

Digital Crosspoint Switch

MCAP Interface

Serial Data Formatters

ESSI

ESSI SCI Mix

MCU SubSystem SCI

TTY A

DSP SubSystem

TTY B

Host Bus

Traffic channel signalling & data 2048 kbit/s Traffic channel data 8192 kbit/s Data/Control

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

225

GMR-04

GPROC

GSM-100-333

GPROC
Purpose
The generic processor (GPROC) module provides the processing power to control a BSC, RXCDR or BTS. GPROCs in a BSU or RXU exchange control signalling via several links: S S A token ring local area network (LAN). The LAN can link processors in several shelves via fibre optic cable. A Motorola cellular advanced processor (MCAP) bus, which extends the processors address, data and control buses to peripheral modules in the same shelf. A serial bus, which communicates alarm information between GPROCs and half-size modules. This serial bus extends to the PDU. The active time division multiplex (TDM) highway. NOTE GPROC modules can be used in a BSU or RXU shelf assembly running software up to and including GSR3. GSR4 and later software releases require the use of GPROC2 modules.

S S

Requirements
The GPROC module fits into: S S Slots L18 to L25 in a BSU shelf assembly. Slot L25 and slot L26 in an RXU shelf assembly.

Each BSU/RXU requires at least one GPROC. A GPROC must be fitted in slot L20 of BSU 0, and slot L25 of RXU 0, for use in initialization.

Communication
The GPROC communicates with other full-size modules via the MCAP bus, and with half-size modules (and modules not on the module shelf) via the BSS serial bus. There are two other serial ports which are not currently used. The LAPD processor and the TDM interface controller communicate via a high-speed private bus. The private bus arbiter is the interface between the MC68030 address/data bus and the high-speed private bus. The parallel port controls output signals to the front panel LEDs, and receives input signals (via the register ports) from the backplane. These contain: S S S S
226

Shelf ID. Slot ID. Backplane type. Backplane revision level. Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O
29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

GPROC

GPROC module
Figure 2-12 shows a GPROC module.

ALARM LED (RED) ACTIVE LED (GREEN) GREEN LED ON, RED LED = PROCESSOR RUNNING, NO FAILURES GREEN LED OFF, RED LED ON = PROCESSOR HALTED, OR IN RESET BOTH LEDS ON = PROCESSOR RUNNING, MODULE IS DISABLED OR OTHER ALARM RESET/DISABLE SWITCH UP (MOMENTARY) = RESET MIDDLE = NORMAL OPERATION DOWN = DISABLE TTY CONNECTOR (OPTICALLY ISOLATED TEST PORT)
ig.202.rh

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

Figure 2-12 GPROC module

Brief description
Refer to the functional block diagram at the end of this section. The GPROC module contains: S S S A Motorola MC68030 16-bit processor operating at 25 MHz. The LAN processor, which is the interface between the GPROC and the token ring LAN. The COMM processor which, in conjunction with the TDM interface controller, is the interface between the GPROC and the TDM highway.

Memory
The GPROC module is equipped with 16 Mbytes of DRAM. There is also 512 kbytes of EPROM (expandable to 1 Mbyte). The EPROM contains the bootstrap code.

Troubleshooting and diagnostics

A fully buffered TTY maintenance port is available on the front panel, to which a personal computer (PC) can be connected. The TTY can be used for monitoring and controlling software when performing maintenance or troubleshooting. The maintenance port meets the requirements of the EIA RS232C and CCITT V.24 specifications. The GPROC runs on-board self-diagnostics during initial power-up and on command from the maintenance TTY.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

227

GMR-04

GPROC

GSM-100-333

Software
Every GPROC is identical in terms of hardware; its function depends upon the software loaded into it. The processor functions for BTS and BSC applications are different from those for an RXCDR application and are described separately in the following sections.

BTS and BSC GPROC functions

The GPROC performs the following processor functions: S S S S S S S S S S S Fault Manager (FM). Configuration Manager (CM). Message Transfer Protocol (MTP). Signalling Connection Control Part (SCCP) State Machine (SSM). Radio Resource State Machine (RRSM). Cell Resource Machine (CRM). Switch Manager (SM). Connectionless Manager (CLM). Radio Subsystem (RSS). Operations and Maintenance System (OMS). Maintains a copy of the application code for collocated peripheral modules.

GPROC task groups and device types

The processor functions can be grouped into six task groups depending on the software loaded into a given GPROC. When a group of tasks is assigned to a GPROC, it is considered to be a unique GPROC device type. The exception to this is the code storage facility processor (CSFP), which is not considered to be a unique device type. Table 2-2 shows the device types and task groups: Table 2-2 GPROC device types GPROC device
Type 0 Type1

BSC task groups N/A Base Site Control Processor (BSP) Link Control Processor (LCP)

BTS task groups Base Transceiver Processor (BTP) Base Transceiver Processor (BTP) Digital Radio Host Processor (DHP) Base Transceiver Processor (BTP) Digital Radio Host Processor (DHP) Radio System Link Processor (RSLP)

BSC/BTS interface Motorola proprietary Motorola proprietary

Type 2

Base Site Control Processor (BSP) Link Control Processor (LCP) Operations and Maintenance Processor (OMP)

Motorola proprietary

NOTE A code storage facility processor (CSFP) can also be equipped.

29 Aug 1997

228

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

GPROC

RXCDR GPROC functions

The RXCDR GPROC processor functions are similar to the BSC and BTS GPROCs and comprise: S S S Fault Manager (FM). Switch Manager (SM). Configuration Manager (CM).

These processor functions: S S S S S S S S S S Maintain the switch database for the KSWs. Maintain a copy of the application code for collocated peripheral modules. Initialize the RXCDR network element. Maintain the configuration database. Communicate with other network elements via a 64 kbit/s LAPD serial data link. Communicate with the OMC via an X.25 link. Communicate with the local monitor via a man-machine interface (MMI). Communicate with collocated digital modules. Handle redundancy between duplicated modules. Control operational software downloads to digital highway modules such as MSIs, KSWs, and XCDRs.

Fault manager
The RXCDR FM communicates with the BSS FM function via the optional transcoder BSC link (XBL), a dedicated 64 kbit/s channel.

Switch manager
The SM: S S S Makes connections between the terrestrial links on the A interface (MSC to BSS) and the radio (traffic) channels on the air interface. Interacts with the call processing and fault management functions. Provides switching functionality for the BSS distributed within the BSC and BTS.

Configuration manager
The CM maintains and updates a configuration database which contains all parameters and operational software currently in use. Changes to the database are restricted to the highest level password protection, due to the potential for down time caused by incorrect changes to the configuration database.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

229

GMR-04

GPROC

GSM-100-333

Flash EPROM daughter card

The flash EPROM (flash memory) feature allows GPROCs equipped to reprogram to the latest bootstrap code automatically. This feature eliminates the need to visit every site to manually replace EPROMs every time the bootstrap code changes. Reprogramming is an automatic part of code downloading and requires no GSM network operator interaction. One flash EPROM GPROC daughter card is needed for each upgraded GPROC module.

Hardware
The flash EPROM contains four 256 kbyte flash EPROMs that contain the bootstrap code for a total of 1 Mbyte of code space. The upper 4 kbytes of this address space accesses control logic on the daughter card to enable and disable the programming voltage. This portion of memory is therefore unavailable for program storage. The contents of the flash EPROM can be loaded in the field with the required software load. The flash EPROM daughter card resides in the address range $0 to $FFFFF on the GPROC.

Control circuits
The flash EPROM contains control circuits that the software uses to enable and disable the application of the programming voltage to the flash EPROMs, to provide protection from accidental writes. The programming voltage is enabled by a write to a specific address and disabled by a read to another specific address. The address range $FF000 to $FFFFF is unavailable for program storage. The control circuits on the card provide sufficient programming current to program all four flash EPROMs simultaneously.

Software
The downloadable bootstrap flash EPROM works in all GPROC configurations. The new bootstrap software is downloaded as a new code object and distributed to all GPROCs using the current code object download and distribution scheme. The RAM code programs the new bootstrap code into place. Having transitioned from ROM to RAM code, the software must determine if the new bootstrap code object is the same as that currently programmed into EPROM. If it is not, and if the GPROC has been reworked to use flash EPROMs, the GPROC updates its flash EPROM to the code contained in the new bootstrap code object.

Programming
All four flash EPROMs are programmed simultaneously. This minimizes the total reprogramming time of the flash EPROMs, to reduce the possibility of resetting the card in the middle of the reprogramming cycle and thus rendering the bootstrap (and the GPROC) useless. On startup, the ROM code provides the memory management unit write protection over the flash EPROM area. This helps guard against accidental writes to the bootstrap code. When the bootstrap reprogramming cycle is in progress, both the red and green LEDs on the GPROCs front panel flash in unison. This is a visual sign to an onsite technician that the reprogramming cycle is in progress. An MMI command is available to verify that the bootstrap programming has been successful. If the technician operates from the OMC, the GPROC(s) are monitored with printed messages via the rlogin capability from the OMC.
230

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

GPROC

GPROC diagram
Figure 2-13 shows a block diagram of the GPROC module:

Figure 2-13 GPROC block diagram

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

231

GMR-04

GPROC2

GSM-100-333

GPROC2
Purpose
The GPROC2 generic processor module provides the processing power to control a BSC or RXCDR. NOTE A GPROC2 cannot be used with software version less than GSR2 and must be used for software version GSR4 and above. A GPROC2 in a BSU or RXU exchange control signalling in several ways: S S S S A token ring local area network (LAN). The LAN can link processors in several shelves via fibre optic cable. A Motorola cellular advanced processor (MCAP) bus, which extends the processor address, data and control buses to peripheral modules in the same shelf. A serial bus, which communicates alarm information between GPROC2s and half-size modules. This serial bus extends to the power distribution unit. The active time division multiplex (TDM) highway.

Requirements
The GPROC2 module fits into: S S Slots L18 to L25 in a BSU shelf assembly. Slot L25 and slot L26 in an RXU shelf assembly.

Each BSU/RXU requires at least one GPROC2. A GPROC2 must be fitted in slot L20 or L24 in a BSC.

Brief description
The GPROC2 module contains: S S S A Motorola MC68040 32-bit processor operating at 33 MHz. The LAN processors which are the interface between the GPROC2 and the token ring LAN. The COMM processor which in conjunction with the TDM interface controller is the interface between the GPROC2 and the TDM highway.

232

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

GPROC2

GPROC2 module
Figure 2-14 shows a GPROC2 module.

ALARM LED (RED) ACTIVE LED (GREEN) GREEN LED ON, RED LED = PROCESSOR RUNNING, NO FAILURES GREEN LED OFF, RED LED ON = PROCESSOR HALTED, OR IN RESET BOTH LEDS ON = PROCESSOR RUNNING, MODULE IS DISABLED OR OTHER ALARM RESET/DISABLE SWITCH UP (MOMENTARY) = RESET MIDDLE = NORMAL OPERATION DOWN = DISABLE TTY CONNECTOR (OPTICALLY ISOLATED TEST PORT)
ig.202.rh

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

Figure 2-14 GPROC2 module

Communication
The GPROC2 communicates with other full-size modules via the MCAP bus, and with half-size modules (and modules not on the module shelf) via the BSS serial bus. The LAPD processor and the TDM interface controller communicate via a high-speed private bus. The private bus arbiter is the interface between the MC68040 address/data bus and the high-speed private bus. The parallel port controls output signals to the front panel LEDs, and receives input signals (via the register ports) from the backplane. These contain: S S S S Shelf ID. Slot ID. Backplane type. Backplane revision level.

Memory
The GPROC2 module is equipped with 32 Mbytes of DRAM and 1 Mbyte of EPROM. The EPROM contains the bootstrap code.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

233

GMR-04

GPROC2

GSM-100-333

Troubleshooting and diagnostics

A fully buffered TTY maintenance port is available on the front panel, to which a personal computer (PC) can be connected. The TTY can be used for monitoring and controlling software when performing maintenance or troubleshooting. The maintenance port meets the requirements of the EIA RS232C and ITUTSS V.24 specifications. The GPROC2 runs on-board self-diagnostics during initial power-up and on command from the maintenance TTY connection.

Software
Every GPROC2 is identical in terms of hardware; its function depends upon the software loaded into it. The processor functions for BSC applications are different from those for an RXCDR application and are described separately in the following sections.

BSC GPROC2 functions

The GPROC2 performs the following processor functions: S S S S S S S S S S S Fault Manager (FM). Configuration Manager (CM). Message Transfer Protocol (MTP). Signalling Connection Control Part (SCCP) State Machine (SSM). Radio Resource State Machine (RRSM). Cell Resource Machine (CRM). Switch Manager (SM). Connectionless Manager (CLM). Radio Subsystem (RSS). Operations and Maintenance System (OMS). Maintains a copy of the application code for collocated peripheral modules.

GPROC2 task groups and device types

The processor functions can be grouped into six task groups depending on the software loaded into a given GPROC2. When a group of tasks is assigned to a GPROC2, it is considered to be a unique GPROC2 device type. The exception to this is the code storage facility processor (CSFP), which is not considered to be a unique device type.

234

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

GPROC2

Table 2-3 shows the device types and task groups: Table 2-3 GPROC2 device types GPROC2 device
Type 0 Type1

BSC task groups N/A Base Site Control Processor (BSP) Link Control Processor (LCP)

BSC/BTS interface Motorola proprietary Motorola proprietary

Type 2

Base Site Control Processor (BSP) Link Control Processor (LCP) Operations and Maintenance Processor (OMP)

Motorola proprietary

NOTE A code storage facility processor (CSFP) can also be equipped.

RXCDR GPROC2 functions

The RXCDR GPROC2 processor functions are similar to the BSC GPROC2s and comprise: S S S Fault Manager (FM). Switch Manager (SM). Configuration Manager (CM).

These processor functions: S S S S S S S S S S Maintain the switch database for the KSWs. Maintain a copy of the application code for collocated peripheral modules. Initialize the RXCDR network element. Maintain the configuration database. Communicate with other network elements via a 64 kbit/s LAPD serial data link. Communicate with the OMC via an X.25 link. Communicate with the local monitor via a man-machine interface (MMI). Communicate with collocated digital modules. Handle redundancy between duplicated modules. Control operational software downloads to digital highway modules such as MSIs, KSWs, and XCDRs.

Fault manager
The RXCDR FM communicates with the BSS FM function via the optional transcoder BSC link (XBL), a dedicated 64 kbit/s channel.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

235

GMR-04

GPROC2

GSM-100-333

Switch manager
The SM: S S S Makes connections between the terrestrial links on the A interface (MSC to BSS) and the radio (traffic) channels on the air interface. Interacts with the call processing and fault management functions. Provides switching functionality for the BSS distributed within the BSC.

Configuration manager
The CM maintains and updates a configuration database which contains all parameters and operational software currently in use. Changes to the database are restricted to the highest level password protection, due to the potential for down time caused by incorrect changes to the configuration database.

GPROC2 diagram
Figure 2-15 shows a block diagram of the GPROC2 module:

Figure 2-15 GPROC2 block diagram

236

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

KSW

KSW
Purpose
The kiloport switch (KSW) module is a time division digital switch, and: S S S Performs timeslot interchange for the active TDM highway. Communicates with the controlling GPROC via the MCAP bus. At a BSC the KSW routes logical channels dynamically, on a per-call basis.

Requirements
The KSW module fits in the following slots in a BSU or RXU shelf assembly: S S L1 for TDM highway B. L27 for TDM highway A.

KSW module
Figure 2-16 shows a KSW module:

ALARM LED (RED) ACTIVE LED (GREEN)

RESET/DISABLE SWITCH UP (MOMENTARY) = RESET MIDDLE = NORMAL OPERATION DOWN = DISABLE BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

ig.205.rh

Figure 2-16 KSW module

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

237

GMR-04

KSW

GSM-100-333

Architecture
Refer to the KSW block diagram at the end of this section. A Motorola MC56001 digital signal processor (DSP) controls the KSW internally. The DSP: S S S Executes port connects between the switchbound TDM highway and the outbound TDM highway. Controls the timeslot interchange (TSI) section via the connection RAM control section. Performs on-line and off-line self diagnostics, including: S S S Internal (KSW-related) tests. External (TDM bus-related) tests.

Controls inbound and outbound multiplexers. Processes alarms. Updates the dynamic pattern registers.

The DSP communicates via the MCAP bus interface logic, the DSP data/address bus, and the serial interface logic.

Timing reference
The timing reference section generates various clock signals, timeslot counts, and frame counts required by other sections of the KSW. The TDM counters section is an offset counter that adds a fixed offset to the master TDM timeslot counter. The GSM counters section contains four separate counters: S S S S GSM sub-timeslot counter. GSM sequence counter. GSM timeslot counter. GSM frame counter.

Switchbound TDM interface structure

The switchbound TDM highway interface consists of a series of multiplexers that are used to select one of four switchbound highways (numbered 0 to 3). The DSP controls the switchbound multiplexers via highway control logic. Switchbound highway 0 and the outbound highway are split into local and remote parts.

Local
The local switchbound highway 0 and local outbound highways are active when the KSW is communicating with highway interface modules in the same shelf.
238

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

KSW

Remote
The remote switchbound highway 0 and remote outbound highways are active when the KSW is communicating with highway interface modules in remote shelves. This effectively extends the TDM bus to multiple shelves. In the remote case, the KSW sends and receives TDM data to and from a remote KSW Extender (KSWXR) in the same shelf as the KSW. The remote KSWXR communicates via fibre optic links with a local type KSWXL in the remote shelf. Local switchbound highway 0 has a delay circuit which adds a fixed 12 timeslot delay. This delay is equal to the delay associated with the KSWX extension operation, and keeps the local and remote switchbound highways in phase. The modules on the TDM bus are: S S S S DRIM. MSI. XCDR. GPROC/GPROC2.

Expansion switchbound highways

Expansion switchbound highway 1, 2 and 3 data originates from highway interface modules associated with other KSWs. These remote highway interface modules send and receive data between their respective KSWs. Each KSW re-transmits data received on its switchbound highway 0 (local or remote) to other KSWs via dedicated KSWXE fibre optic links. Data is received on switchbound highways 1, 2 and 3 of remote KSWs. This architecture results in each KSW receiving data from all 1024 timeslots of all expansion highways connected to the KSW and retransmitting that data on the 1024 timeslots associated with its own highway interface modules to the other KSWs. The DSP can write data to any of the four switchbound highways. This allows known static data patterns to be inserted into any switchbound timeslot, and data can be looped back to switchbound highway 0 from the TSI section, enabling self diagnostics. When the KSW is performing self diagnostics, data is compared at two highway monitors, one before the TSI section and one after the TSI section.

Timeslot interchange (TSI)

The TSI section is the main section of the KSW. It switches data from a given timeslot on one of the four switchbound TDM highways to a given timeslot on the outbound TDM highway. The TSI section consists of four independent TSI blocks operating in parallel to support sub-rate switching. Each TSI block switches 16 kbit/s of data. If a particular timeslot is associated with a 64 kbit/s channel, then one TSI block contains the same path connection for that timeslot. Conversely, if a timeslot is associated with two 32 kbit/s channels, two TSIs contain a similar path connection and the other two contain a different path connection. When a timeslot contains four 16 kbit/s channels, each TSI section has a different path connection.

Connection RAM control

The connection RAM control is the interface between the DSP and the TSI section. The connection RAM control isolates the DSP from strict timing constraints associated with the TSI section.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

239

GMR-04

KSW

GSM-100-333

Three-party conference (TPC) memory

After traffic data leaves the TSIs, it is sent to either the TSI mode multiplexer, which selects full-rate or sub-rate switching as required, or to the three party conference (TPC) memory section. The TPC memory operates in real time allowing the KSW to support any number of three party conference calls.

Fixed/dynamic pattern registers

The fixed/dynamic pattern registers can generate fixed patterns and a variety of dynamic patterns that generate tones, data sequences, or dynamic test patterns.

Outbound selection MUX

The outbound selection multiplexer selects the correct source data to be sent to the outbound highway. Although referred to as a multiplexer, this section does not contain a physical multiplexer. Instead, multiplexing is implemented by connecting the outputs of all the possible data sources together and selectively enabling one of these sources during each timeslot. After data is sent from the outbound selection multiplexer, a parity bit is added to the data before it is placed on the outbound TDM highway. Output from the outbound multiplexer is sent directly to the remote outbound highway, but data for the local outbound highway is sent through a delay circuit to keep the remote and local outbound highways in phase. This delay is 12 timeslots.

Highway monitor
The KSW has two highway monitor sections: S S The switchbound monitor logic which selectively monitors one of the four switchbound TDM highways at the inputs of the TSI section. The outbound monitor logic which monitors the output of the outbound selection MUX.

The DSP uses these monitors for monitoring inbound and outbound data on any timeslot. When used in conjunction with the various DSP controlled data sources and fixed/dynamic pattern selection, these monitors allow the KSW to perform extensive self diagnostics on the TSI section.

Watchdog timer
The watchdog timer ensures that the DSP is functioning normally. The DSP writes to a memory address that resets the watchdog timer, ensuring that it does not time out. If the DSP stops running, the watchdog timer times out and causes the red LED on the front panel to illuminate. An interrupt is also generated and sent to the GPROC via the MCAP bus. If a DSP fails, the TSI section of the KSW still switches data, but no new path connections are implemented. This results in existing calls being held while the system is reconfigured around the failed KSW.
240

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

KSW

Interrupt logic
The interrupt logic generates two interrupts to the DSP: S S Interrupt-A prompts the DSP to perform certain periodic tasks such as updating the watchdog timer and the dynamic pattern registers. Interrupt-B, processes alarms such as clock and reference alarms, and parity alarms.

Serial interface logic

The serial interface logic supports the TTY interface. This interface is connected to a dedicated backplane connector port. This port is a buffered RS232 type. The TTY can be used to control the KSW, monitor KSW operation status, and support KSW diagnostics.

KSW switching
The usable switching capacity of each KSW depends on site hardware and software configurations because certain modules require a number of ports for their own use. The KSW is controlled by the local GPROC via the MCAP bus. Each KSW can switch connections between 1024 inputs and 1024 outputs. However, total switching capacity can be expanded by interconnecting up to three additional KSWs via KSWXs. In this configuration, each KSW has the ability to switch data between 2048 (2 x 1024), 3072 (3 x 1024) or 4096 (4 x 1024) 64 kbit/s input ports and its 1024 outbound ports. Each KSW has access to all 2, 3 or 4 switchbound highways, although each KSW only drives its own 1024 port outbound TDM highway.

KSW in a BSC
KSW switching at the BSC is variable. Physical channel mapping on the A interface is performed for each call, and at every handover.

KSW in a RXCDR
KSW switching in an RXU shelf is fixed. It provides one to one physical mapping between the traffic to and from the BSC and the traffic to and from the MSC.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

241

GMR-04

KSW

GSM-100-333

KSW diagram
Figure 2-17 shows a block diagram of the KSW module:

Figure 2-17 KSW block diagram

242

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

KSW

Interconnected KSWs
Figure 2-18 shows three interconnected KSWs:

Figure 2-18 KSW interconnection diagram

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

243

GMR-04

MSI

GSM-100-333

MSI
Purpose
The Multiple Serial Interface (MSI) module drives two separate interface lines to and from the TDM bus.

MSI module
The MSI module can drive two European 2.048 Mbit/s (E1) data lines. One of the E1 lines is referred to as group A, the other E1 line is known as group B. The E1 lines can come from either: S S A balanced-line interconnect board (BIB). Type 43 (T43) interconnect board.

The MSI can also extract the clock synchronization from the E1 line data stream. An RS232 maintenance port, to which a personal computer (PC) can be connected for testing and debugging, is provided at the top of the BSU or RXU shelf.

Terminology
One wire pair (balanced or unbalanced) equals one E1 serial data stream. Two E1 serial data streams (transmit and receive) equal one E1 line.

Requirements
The MSI module is fitted in: S S Slots L6 to L17 of the BSU shelf assembly. Slots L6 to L10 of the RXU shelf assembly.

An MSI, MSI2, XCDR or GDP must be located in at least one of the BSU locations below for BSC initialization purposes. S S S Shelf 0 slot 16 (Software communicates via either group A or group B) Shelf 0 slot 14 (Software communicates via group A) Shelf 1 (if second BSU in BSC) slot 16 (Software communicates via group A)

An RXU initialization uses slot 10 instead of slot 16, and slot 8 instead of slot 14.

244

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

MSI

MSI module
Figure 2-19 shows an MSI module:

ALARM LED (RED) ACTIVE LED (GREEN)

RESET/DISABLE SWITCH UP (MOMENTARY) = RESET MIDDLE = NORMAL OPERATION DOWN = DISABLE BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

Figure 2-19 MSI module

General features
The MSI converts signals from the E1 lines from serial format to the parallel format that the TDM highway requires, and converts signals transmitted to the E1 lines from parallel to serial. The MSI also provides surge protection and frame alignment. Each serial line can carry the following to and from the active TDM highway in the BSU: S S S One 64 kbit/s channel for synchronization. One 64 kbit/s channel for control signalling. Thirty 64 kbit/s channels that can each be used as follows: Traffic (four 16 kbit/s compressed voice/data channels each). Additional control channels.

If all 30 channels are allocated to traffic, 120 traffic channels are possible. These channels can be placed in any of the 1024 channels on the TDM highway under the control of the GPROC/GPROC2. The interfaces provided by MSIs depend upon the transcoding location: S S If transcoding is integrated with the BSC, the MSI provides the BSC to BTS interface. If transcoding is not integrated with the BSC, the MSI provides the RXCDR to BSC and BSC to BTS interfaces.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

245

GMR-04

MSI

GSM-100-333

Transcoded environment
The MSI can support 240 x 16 kbit/s traffic channels in a transcoded environment, as defined by GSM. To accomplish this, four 16 kbit/s channels are multiplexed into one 64 kbit/s timeslot, as shown in the following example: 30 x 4 x 2 = 240 64 kbit/s timeslots of a serial data stream Submultiplexed 16 kbit/s traffic channels E1 lines 16 kbit/s traffic channels

Functional description
Refer to the MSI block diagram at the end of this section.

MC68000 processor
A Motorola MC68000 processor, operating at 8 MHz, controls: S S S S S S S S The E1 line to TDM interface function. A multiplexer that selects the extracted clock to be routed to the GCLK. Extracted clock failures. Frame alignment errors. Multiframe alignment errors. Bipolar violations. CRC4 errors. Transmit or receive failures.

The processor reports the following to the controlling GPROC on the MCAP bus:

EPROM
The EPROM contains 128 kbytes of bootstrap program code. At power-up the bootstrap program sends a request message to the GPROC to download the MSI operating program into the SRAM. The SRAM also stores program variables, and can be permanently saved in EEPROM.

E1 line to TDM interface circuits

There are two identical E1 lines to TDM interface circuits on the MSI module. This functional description applies to both. The TDM interface section converts incoming data from E1 line serial to TDM parallel. The two E1 lines are interleaved onto the TDM bus in groups of two and are spaced out by 32 timeslots. The sequence is as follows: S S S S Group A timeslot 0, group B timeslot 0. Group A timeslot 1, group B timeslot 1. Group A timeslot 30, group B timeslot 30. Group A timeslot 31, group B timeslot 31.

Outgoing traffic data is converted from parallel to serial. The serial data is then sent to the E1 line transmitter which converts it to standard E1 line levels. The E1 line data is then HDB3 and CRC4 encoded. After encoding, the data is routed to the loopback multiplexer and to a level converter. The level converter converts from split-phase, TTL level unipolar to bipolar.
246

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

MSI

Table 2-4 illustrates the E1 line to TDM Interface circuit actions: Table 2-4 TDM interface circuit actions Stage 1 2 3 4 5 Action The system matches impedance and isolates the signal The E1 line receive signal is applied to a level converter The level converter converts the signal from bipolar to split-phase TTL level unipolar The signal passes to the HDB3 decoder and clock extraction circuit The signal goes through a crosspoint switch for: S Diagnostic purposes. S S Distance measurements. Drop and insert feature utilization.

The impedance matching circuits consist of isolation transformers and Zener diodes, which: S S Impedance match the two sides of the interface. Provide secondary surge protection from high voltage transients, such as lightning strikes, which may come down the E1 lines.

The drop and insert feature allows a timeslot coming in on group A, which is meant for another BTS, to be routed back out on group B.

Clock extraction
The clock extraction section extracts the E1 clocks, to which the entire site (either BTS or BSC) can be synchronized. The two extracted clocks are routed to a multiplexer that selects which clock signal (if any) is routed to the GCLK.

Frame decoding
The HDB3 and CRC4 decoding section performs frame decoding according to CCITT recommendation G.704 for digital multiplex equipment.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

247

GMR-04

MSI

GSM-100-333

MSI diagram
Figure 2-20 shows a block diagram of the MSI module.

Figure 2-20 MSI block diagram

248

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

MSI-2

MSI-2
Purpose
The Multiple Serial Interface (MSI-2) module is the interface between the inter-site communication lines and the TDM highway.

MSI-2 module
The MSI-2 module is a software configured board and has the following drive capability: S S S North American 1.544 Mbit/s (T1). European 2.048 Mbit/s (E1). Japanese 1.544 Mbit/s (JT1).

One of the E1/T1/JT1 lines is referred to as group A, the other E1/T1/JT1 line is known as group B. The E1/T1/JT1 lines are connected at the interconnect panel via either: S S A balanced-line interconnect board (BIB). Type 43 (T43) interconnect board.

The MSI-2 can also extract the clock synchronization data from the E1/T1/JT1 line data stream in order to phase lock the GCLK to the line. An RS232 maintenance port, to which a personal computer (PC) can be connected for testing and debugging, is provided at the top of the BSU or RXU shelf.

Terminology
One wire pair (balanced or unbalanced) equals one E1/T1/JT1 serial data stream. Two E1/T1/JT1 serial data streams (transmit and receive) equal one E1/T1/JT1 line.

Requirements
The MSI-2 module is fitted in: S S Slots L6 to L17 of the BSU shelf assembly. Slots L6 to L10 of the RXU shelf assembly.

An MSI, MSI-2, XCDR or GDP must be located in at least one of the BSU locations below for BSC initialization purposes. S S S Shelf 0 slot 16 (Software communicates via either group A or group B) Shelf 0 slot 14 (Software communicates via group A) Shelf 1 (if second BSU in BSC) slot 16 (Software communicates via group A)

An RXU initialization uses slot 10 instead of slot 16, and slot 8 instead of slot 14.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

249

GMR-04

MSI-2

GSM-100-333

MSI-2 module
Figure 2-21 shows an MSI-2 module:

ALARM LED (RED) ACTIVE LED (GREEN)

RESET/DISABLE SWITCH UP (MOMENTARY) = RESET MIDDLE = NORMAL OPERATION DOWN = DISABLE BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

Figure 2-21 MSI-2 module

General features
The MSI-2 converts signals from the E1/T1/JT1 lines from serial format to the parallel format that the TDM highway requires, and converts signals transmitted to the E1/T1/JT1 lines from parallel to serial.

E1 Data
Each serial line can carry the following to and from the active TDM highway in the BSU: S S S One 64 kbit/s timeslot for synchronization. One 64 kbit/s timeslot for control signalling. Thirty 64 kbit/s timeslots that can each be used as follows: Traffic (four 16 kbit/s compressed voice/data channels each). Additional control timeslots.

If all 30 timeslots are allocated to traffic, 120 traffic channels are possible.

T1 Data
Each serial line can carry the following to and from the active TDM highway in the BSU: S Twenty-four 64 kbit/s timeslots that can each be used as follows: Traffic (four 16 kbit/s compressed voice/data channels each). Additional control timeslots.

If all 24 timeslots are allocated to traffic, 96 traffic channels are possible.

250

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

MSI-2

Transcoded environment (E1)

The MSI-2 can support 240 x 16 kbit/s traffic timeslots in a transcoded environment, as defined by GSM. To accomplish this, four 16 kbit/s timeslots are multiplexed into one 64 kbit/s timeslot, as shown in the following example: 30 x 4 x 2 = 240 64 kbit/s timeslots of a serial data stream Submultiplexed 16 kbit/s traffic timeslots E1 lines 16 kbit/s traffic timeslots

Transcoded environment (T1/JT1)

The MSI-2 can support 192 x 16 kbit/s traffic timeslots in a transcoded environment, as defined by GSM. To accomplish this, four 16 kbit/s timeslots are multiplexed into one 64 kbit/s timeslot, as shown in the following example: 24 x 4 x 2 = 192 64 kbit/s timeslots of a serial data stream Submultiplexed 16 kbit/s traffic timeslots T1/JT1 lines 16 kbit/s traffic timeslots

Functional description
Refer to the MSI-2 block diagram at the end of this section.

MC68302 processor
A Motorola MC68302 processor, operating at 16.384 MHz, controls: S S The E1/T1/JT1 line to TDM interface function. A multiplexer that selects the extracted clock signal to be routed to the GCLK.

The processor reports the following to the controlling GPROC/GPROC2 on the MCAP bus: S S S S S Extracted clock failures. Frame alignment errors. Multiframe alignment errors. Bit errors. Transmit or receive failures.

EPROM
The EPROM contains 64 kbytes of bootstrap program code memory, 256 kbytes of nonvolatile operational code memory (Flash EPROM) and 128 kbytes of volatile program and data memory (SRAM). At power-up the bootstrap program sends a request message to the GPROC/GPROC2 to download the MSI2s operating program into the SRAM.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

251

GMR-04

MSI-2

GSM-100-333

E1/T1/JT1 line to TDM interface circuits

There are two identical E1/T1/JT1 line to TDM interface circuits on the MSI-2 module. This functional description applies to both. The TDM interface section converts incoming data from E1/T1/JT1 line from serial to TDM parallel. E1 lines are interleaved onto the TDM bus in groups of two and are spaced out by 32 timeslots. The sequence is as follows: S S Group A timeslot 0, group B timeslot 0. Group A timeslot 1, group B timeslot 1. .......... S S Group A timeslot 30, group B timeslot 30. Group A timeslot 31, group B timeslot 31.

T1/JT1 lines are interleaved onto the TDM bus in groups of two and are spaced out by 24 timeslots. The sequence is as follows: S S Group A timeslot 0, group B timeslot 0. Group A timeslot 1, group B timeslot 1. .......... S S Group A timeslot 22, group B timeslot 22. Group A timeslot 23, group B timeslot 23.

Outgoing traffic data is converted from parallel to serial. The serial data is then sent to the E1/T1/JT1 line transmitter which converts it to standard E1/T1/JT1 line levels. E1/T1/JT1 data uses Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) format and line encoding/error checking can be used. Table 2-5 gives details on line encoding and error checking available for use with E1, T1 and JT1 lines. Table 2-5 Line encoding & error checking information Line format E1 T1/JT1 Line Encoding HDB3 B8ZS Error Checking CRC4 CRC6

After encoding, the data is routed to the loopback multiplexer and to a level converter. The level converter converts from split-phase, TTL level unipolar to bipolar.

252

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

MSI-2

Table 2-6 illustrates the E1/T1/JT1 line to TDM Interface circuit actions: Table 2-6 Line to TDM interface circuit actions Stage 1 2 3 4 5 Action The system matches impedance and isolates the signal The E1/T1/JT1 line receive signal is applied to a level converter The level converter converts the signal from bipolar to split-phase TTL level unipolar The signal passes to the HDB3 decoder (E1) or B8ZS decoder (T1) and clock extraction circuit The signal goes through a crosspoint switch for: S Diagnostic purposes. S S Distance measurements. Drop and insert feature utilization.

The drop and insert feature allows a timeslot coming in on group A, which is meant for another BTS, to be routed back out on group B.

Clock extraction
The clock extraction section extracts the E1/T1/JT1 clocks, to which the entire site (either BTS or BSC) can be synchronized. In the case of T1/JT1, the extracted clock is fed through a clock adaptor to convert the 1.544 MHz signal to a 2.048 MHz signal. The two extracted clocks are routed to a multiplexer that selects which clock signal (if any) is routed to the GCLK.

Frame decoding
The HDB3 (E1) and B8ZS (T1) decoding section performs frame decoding according to CCITT recommendation G.704 for digital multiplex equipment.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

253

GMR-04

MSI-2

GSM-100-333

MSI-2 diagram
Figure 2-22 shows a block diagram of the MSI-2 module.

Figure 2-22 MSI-2 block diagram

254

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

XCDR

XCDR
Purpose
The transcoder (XCDR) module: S S Interfaces an E1/T1 serial line to the internal cabinet TDM highway, which is in a parallel format. Transcodes thirty 64 kbit/s channels into 120 compressed voice/data channels, in accordance with the GSM recommendations: Channel zero of each E1/T1 line is reserved for synchronization. Channel sixteen is reserved for link control signalling.

If the BSC performs the transcoding function, XCDRs interface the BSU or RXU to the MSC in place of MSI modules. The XCDR transcodes the remaining 30 channels into 120 x 16 kbit/s compressed channels. The synchronization and signalling channels and the 120 compressed voice/data channels are applied to the active TDM highway in the BSU or RXU. These channels can be placed in any of the 1024 channels on the TDM highway under control of the GPROC/GPROC2.

Terminology
One wire pair (balanced or unbalanced) equals one E1/T1 serial data stream. Two E1/T1 serial data streams (transmit and receive) equal one E1/T1 line.

Requirements
The XCDR module is fitted in: S S Slots L6 to L17 (but maximum 6 modules in total) in the BSU shelf assembly. Slots L6 to L24 (maximum 19 modules) in the RXU shelf assembly.

An MSI, MSI2, XCDR or GDP must be located in at least one of the BSU locations below for BSC initialization purposes. S S S Shelf 0 slot 16 (Software communicates via either group A or group B) Shelf 0 slot 14 (Software communicates via group A) Shelf 1 (if second BSU in BSC) slot 16 (Software communicates via group A)

An RXU initialization uses slot 10 instead of slot 16, and slot 8 instead of slot 14.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

255

GMR-04

XCDR

GSM-100-333

XCDR module
Figure 2-23 shows an XCDR module:

ALARM LED (RED) ACTIVE LED (GREEN)

RESET/DISABLE SWITCH UP (MOMENTARY) = RESET MIDDLE = NORMAL OPERATION DOWN = DISABLE BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

Figure 2-23 XCDR module

Brief description
Refer to the XCDR block diagram at the end of this section. The XCDR module contains a digital signal processor (DSP) unit that performs: S S S GSM-defined speech encoding. GSM-defined speech decoding. Submultiplexing functions.

The speech transcoder bi-directionally interfaces the 64 kbit/s E1/T1 line in the land network to the 13 kbit/s vocoder format used on the air interface. Signalling channels are passed straight through the transcoder.

Architecture
The XCDR module contains the following major systems: S S S S S S
256

Processor system. DSP system. Line interface system. Switching system. MCAP interface system. TDM interface system. Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O
29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

XCDR

Processor
The main component of the processor system is the microcontroller unit (MCU), which: S S S S S S S Controls and interfaces the five major systems (listed below) on the XCDR module. Performs self-diagnostics and error monitoring. A watchdog timer. 16 kbytes of RAM. 64 kbytes of EEPROM. 1 kbyte of dual port RAM. A power monitor circuit.

Other components of the processor system are:

The watchdog timer is periodically strobed by the MCU; an alarm is generated if it is not strobed before a pre-set timeout.

DSP
The DSP system consists of: S S S S 30 mask programmed DSP units. A subrate multiplexer. A serial port timing generator. A parallel host interface.

Each DSP unit has its own internal memory (2 kbytes of RAM and 12 kbytes of ROM) and serial interface. The DSP units are arranged into four banks (three banks of eight and one bank of six). The serial port timing generator keeps all DSPs synchronized. The parallel host interface is used to transfer status and control data between the MCU and DSP units.

Subrate multiplexer modes

The subrate multiplexer can operate in three modes. Table 2-7 lists the modes and details what happens. Table 2-7 Subrate multiplexer modes Mode DSP loop back 16 kbytes multiplexed Functions The DSP output is logically connected to its input, enabling a self test function. Each DSP receives 16 bits of data: The first 8 bits are from a 16 kbytes/s subrate channel from the TDM highway Two bits at a time are expanded into PCM. The last eight bits are from the E1/T1 line data stream. The PCM is processed into 16 kbit/s TRAU frames. Each DSP receives 16 bits of data: The first eight bits are from the TDM bus, and are passed to the E1/T1 line. The second eight bits are from the E1/T1 line, and are passed to the TDM bus.

64 kbytes non-multiplexed

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

257

GMR-04

XCDR

GSM-100-333

Line interface
The line interface system performs: S S Impedance matching. Secondary surge protection from high voltage transients (such as lightning strikes), which may come down the E1/T1 lines.

The impedance matching circuit consists of isolation transformers and Zener diodes. After impedance matching and isolation the E1/T1 line receive signal is applied to a level converter that converts the signal from bipolar to split-phase TTL level unipolar. After level conversion the received E1/T1 line data is sent to the clock extraction circuit and a HDB3 decoder. The clock extraction section extracts the E1/T1 clock to which all BSU/RXU shelves can be synchronized. The HDB3/CRC4 decoding section performs frame decoding law CCITT recommendation G.704 for digital multiplex equipment. Traffic is then routed to the switching system.

Switching
The switching system consist of two separate digital switches, each performing a different function. S S The first switch has the E1/T1 line data stream and TDM data streams passing through it. The second switch is used as an interface between the processor section and the framer of the line interface system.

MCAP interface
The MCAP interface system supports two redundant MCAP buses to the XCDR. The XCDR communicates with the GPROC in the same manner as all other full-size modules.

TDM interface
The TDM interface system takes traffic data from the TDM bus and converts it from parallel data to serial data. The serial data is then sent to the switching system.

258

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

XCDR

XCDR diagram
Figure 2-24 shows a block diagram of the XCDR module:

Figure 2-24 XCDR block diagram

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

259

GMR-04

GDP

GSM-100-333

GDP
Purpose
The Generic DSP Processor (GDP) module can be used as an enhanced XCDR, with additional features, including Enhanced Full Rate (EFR) speech and uplink/downlink audio volume control. The GDP DSP firmware is downloadable whereas the XCDR DSP firmware is mask programmed. The description in the following pages assumes the GDP is being used as an enhanced XCDR. NOTE The GDP module can only be used with systems running GSR3 or later releases, as this contains the necessary software support to allow operation. For a BSC which will operate the EFR speech option, all transcoder boards it connects to must be GDP, not XCDR. The GDP has two configured types, one for E1 serial line use and one for T1 serial line use. Each GDP type has a different framer/transceiver with accompanying crystal oscillator, and two associated resistors. This means that a GDP used for E1 serial line use cannot be used for T1, and a GDP used for T1 serial line use cannot be used for E1. The GDP module: S S S Provides the transcoding interface to the MSC. The GDP module is located at the RXCDR, or at a BSC where transcoding is integrated within the BSC. Interfaces an E1/T1 serial line to the internal cabinet TDM highway, which is in a parallel format. Transcodes thirty E1(twenty-four T1) 64 kbit/s channels, inserting them as part of 120 E1 (96 T1) compressed voice/data channels, in accordance with the GSM recommendations: Channel zero of each E1 line is reserved for synchronization. Channel sixteen of each E1 line is reserved for link control signalling. The 30 remaining E1 channels are transcoded.

Each GDP supports thirty compressed voice and data channels, using 15 DSPs. These channels, and the synchronization and link control signalling channels, can be placed in any of the 1024 channels on the TDM highway under control of the GPROC/GPROC2.

Terminology
One wire pair (balanced or unbalanced) equals one E1/T1 serial data stream. Two E1/T1 serial data streams (transmit and receive) equal one E1/T1 line.

260

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

GDP

Requirements
The GDP module is fitted in: S S Slots L6 to L17 (but maximum 6 modules in total) in the BSU shelf assembly. Slots L6 to L24 (maximum 19 modules) in the RXU shelf assembly.

An MSI, MSI2, XCDR or GDP must be located in at least one of the BSU locations below for BSC initialization purposes. S S S Shelf 0 slot 16 (Software communicates via either group A or group B) Shelf 0 slot 14 (Software communicates via group A) Shelf 1 (if second BSU in BSC) slot 16 (Software communicates via group A)

An RXU initialization uses slot 10 instead of slot 16, and slot 8 instead of slot 14.

GDP module
Figure 2-25 shows a GDP module:

ALARM LED (RED) ACTIVE LED (GREEN)

RESET/DISABLE SWITCH UP (MOMENTARY) = RESET MIDDLE = NORMAL OPERATION DOWN = DISABLE BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

Figure 2-25 GDP module

Brief description
Refer to the GDP block diagram at the end of this section. The GDP module contains a digital signal processor (DSP) unit that performs: S S S GSM-defined speech encoding. GSM-defined speech decoding. Submultiplexing functions.

The speech transcoder bi-directionally interfaces the 64 kbit/s E1/T1 line in the land network to the 13 kbit/s vocoder format used on the air interface. Signalling channels are passed straight through the transcoder.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

261

GMR-04

GDP

GSM-100-333

Architecture
The GDP module contains the following major systems: S S S S S S MCU subsystem. DSP subsystem. E1/T1 Line interface. Digital crosspoint switch. MCAP interface. TDM interface.

MCU subsystem
The main component of the processor system is the microcontroller unit (MCU), which: S S Controls and interfaces the other major systems on the GDP module. Performs self-diagnostics and error monitoring.

Other components of the processor system are: S S S S S S A watchdog timer. 256 kbytes of RAM. 512 kbytes of Flash EPROM. 1 kbyte of dual port RAM for MCAP messaging. 1 kbyte of dual port RAM for TDM interface. A power monitor circuit.

The watchdog timer is periodically strobed by the MCU; an alarm is generated if it is not strobed before a pre-set timeout.

DSP subsystem
The DSP subsystem consists of 15 identical blocks each with: S S S S One 80 MHz DSP processor 128k x 24 dedicated SRAM for program and data storage. Two Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interfaces (ESSIs). On-board phase-locked loops to multiply input from subsystem 16.384 MHz clock.

DSP firmware is downloadable. The MCU uses one of its Serial Communications Controllers (SCC1) to connect to the SCI of all DSPs, for control, monitoring and download purposes. All the ESSI signals to the DSPs are buffered by tristate devices.

Subrate multiplexer modes

There is a subrate multiplexer within the serial data formatter, converting data from the DSP subsystem ESSI format to the digital crosspoint switch ST bus format. The subrate multiplexer can operate in three modes.
262

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

GDP

Table 2-8 lists the subrate multiplexer modes and shows what happens: Table 2-8 Multiplexer modes Mode
DSP loop back

Functions The DSP output is logically connected to its input, enabling a self test function. Each DSP receives 16 bits of data: The first 8 bits are from a 16 kbytes/s subrate channel from the TDM highway Two bits at a time are expanded into PCM. The last eight bits are from the E1/T1 line data stream. The PCM is processed into 16 kbit/s TRAU frames. Each DSP receives 16 bits of data: The first eight bits are from the TDM bus, and are passed to the E1/T1 line. The second eight bits are from the E1/T1 line, and are passed to the TDM bus.

16 kbytes multiplexed

64 kbytes non-multiplexed

E1/T1 Line interface

The line interface system performs: S S Impedance matching. Secondary surge protection from high voltage transients (such as lightning strikes), which may come down the E1/T1 lines.

The impedance matching circuit consists of isolation transformers and Zener diodes. After impedance matching and isolation the E1/T1 line receive signal is applied to a level converter that converts the signal from bipolar to split-phase TTL level unipolar. After level conversion the received E1/T1 line data is sent to the clock extraction circuit and a decoder. The clock extraction section extracts the E1/T1 clock to which all BSU/RXU shelves can be synchronized. The decoding section performs frame decoding law CCITT recommendation G.704 for digital multiplex equipment. Traffic is then routed to the switching system.

CRC-4 Error checking

A GDP module configured for use with an E1 serial line supports CRC-4 error checking. This is set by default to the on state 0. All associated switches (MSCs) must also have CRC-4 error checking set to the on state, so allowing communication across the A-interface To check if the GDP board CRC-4 state is set, use the MMS_config_type CM database command. disp_element MMS_config_type <location> Refer to Technical Description: BSS Command Reference (GSM-100-321) for information on the above CM database command. To ensure the correct setting of CRC-4 error checking at the MSC, consult the vendor supplied equipment manual.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

263

GMR-04

GDP

GSM-100-333

Digital crosspoint switch

The switching system consist of a digital switch, which performs the following functions:. S S Transmission of E1/T1 line data stream and TDM data streams. Connection between the processor section and the E1/T1 line interface system.

MCAP interface
The MCAP interface system supports two redundant MCAP buses to the GDP. The GDP communicates with the GPROC2 in the same manner as all other full-size modules.

TDM interface
The TDM interface system takes traffic data from the TDM bus and converts it from parallel data to serial data. The serial data is then sent to the switching system.

264

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

GDP

GDP diagram
Figure 2-26 shows a block diagram of the GDP module:

Figure 2-26 GDP block diagram

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

265

GMR-04

NVM board description

GSM-100-333

NVM board description

Purpose of the NVM board
The NVM board provides the BSC or RXCDR with an improved recovery facility following a total power loss. In current BSC and RXCDR systems, a total power loss causes configuration data held at the site to be lost. This data is normally recovered by downloading from the OMC-R once power is restored. If an NVM board is installed, data is retrieved from the NVM board rather than from the OMC-R during recovery from a total power loss.

Mechanical design
The NVM board is a full height digital board, designed for installation in the BSU cage 0 of a BSC, or the RXU cage 0 of the RXCDR. Figure 2-27 shows the NVM board in detail.

FRONT PANEL NVM BOARD STATUS LEDs NVM BOARD RESET/DISABLE SWITCH PCMCIA CARD STATUS LEDs EJECT BUTTON PCMCIA CARD SLOTS

PCMCIA CARD SWAP SWITCH BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

Figure 2-27 The NVM board NOTE The PCMCIA cards used with the NVM board are NOT the same type as used in M-Cell equipment.

266

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

NVM board description

Functional description
Software ascertains if the NVM board is present during RAM initialization of a BSC or RXCDR site. If the board is present, software begins loading objects to the NVM board. If the board is not present then the software continues to check for its existence. A low priority software task is responsible for loading the NVM board with a copy of the BSS software objects that currently reside on the master GPROC. The transfer is achieved via the MCAP bus. Two synchronized copies of the database are stored. This ensures that if a power outage occurs during loading to the NVM board, then a usable copy of the database is still available. Only one copy is updated at a time, and is marked as the current version when the update is complete. The object list and the database on the NVM board and the master GPROC are audited at regular intervals. If any differences between these objects on the NVM board and the master GPROC are detected, the NVM board is updated automatically from the master GPROC. During ROM initialization, the NVM board is used as a BSS software source only if all GPROCs at the site have no BSS software (for example, after restoration of power following a power failure). If the NVM board is not present, or fails during BSS software crossload to the master GPROC, ROM initialization continues as normal. NOTE The NVM board can only be used with systems running GSR5 or later releases. These releases contain the necessary software support to allow operation.

Interrogating the NVM board

Object header information of the objects stored on the NVM board can be viewed using the following EMON command from an LMT at the master GPROC: nvm objects Table 2-9 shows the possible output string results of using the above EMON command, depending on the configuration of the BSU or RXU cage.

Table 2-9 EMON command results, depending on configuration Configuration NVM present? No Yes Yes Yes PCMCIA card present? No Yes Yes BSS code objects present? No Yes NVM Board not present or not available PCMCIA Card not present or not available No load information available Object headers of objects present on the PCMCIA card are displayed. Output String

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

267

GMR-04

Half-size modules

GSM-100-333

Half-size modules
Introduction
Half-size digital modules provide interface extension for the full-size modules, enabling unit interconnection (for example BSU to BSU, RXU to RXU) and external alarm connection. The modules fit into slots in the upper card cage of a BSU or RXU shelf. The slots are numbered, right to left, from U0 to U28. The following sections describe the half-size modules that can be mounted in a BSU or RXU. The quantity fitted depends upon the specific configuration of the BSU or RXU.

The modules
The following half-size modules are mounted in a BSU or RXU shelf: CAUTION Do not fit a digital module in any equipment for which it is not suitable. S S S S S S S Battery back up board (BBBX). Clock extender (CLKX). Digital radio interface extender (DRIX). Kiloport switch extender (KSWX). Double kiloport switch extender (DSWX). Local area network extender (LANX). Parallel interface extender (PIX).

268

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

BBBX

BBBX
Purpose
If the main supply fails, the battery back up board (BBBX) provides a back up supply of +5 V at 8 A. The +5 V DRAM battery back up supply maintains power to the: S S Optical circuit on the LANX module. DRAM memory located on the GPROC.

Normally, the PSMs supply +5 V DRAM voltage to the BSU or RXU backplane. If the PSMs fail to deliver this due to cabinet input power failure or PSM failure, the BBBX converts an external back up supply to a fused +5 V DRAM supply.

Requirements
The BBBX module is normally positioned in slots U16, U17 or U18 of the BSU or RXU shelf assembly, but can be fitted in any spare half-size card slot. All connections are made at the front of the module.

BBBX module
Figure 2-28 shows a BBBX module:

CONNECTOR PC1 IS CABLED TO A12 ON THE DIGITAL CAGE BACKPLANE

CONNECTOR PC2 IS CABLED TO TOP OF CABINET FOR CONNECTION TO PC4 ON THE DAB AND BATT BACKUP

Figure 2-28 BBBX module

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

269

GMR-04

BBBX

GSM-100-333

BBBX diagram
Figure 2-29 shows a block diagram of the BBBX:

Figure 2-29 BBBX block diagram

270

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

CLKX

CLKX
Purpose
WARNING Laser radiation could be emitted when fibre optic cables are disconnected. Do not look directly into beams with or without the use of any optical aids. Radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors. The clock extender (CLKX) module optically distributes the clock and reference signals generated by the GCLK in the parent shelf to all other shelves at a site. The extended clock signals are received by a KSWXL in the remote BSU/RXU.

Requirements
The CLKX module is fitted in slots U2 to U7 of the BSU or RXU shelf assembly. A maximum of six remote shelves can be supported. In a multishelf site, the shelf containing the GCLK must also receive its clocks via a CLKX and a KSWXL to maintain synchronization integrity. Fibre optic cables extending clock reference signals, from the parent shelf to all other shelves at a site, must be of the same length to maintain site synchronization integrity.

GCLK module
Figure 2-30 shows a CLKX module:

FIBRE OPTIC CLOCK OUTPUTS TO LOCAL KSWXs

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

Figure 2-30 CLKX module

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

271

GMR-04

CLKX

GSM-100-333

CLKX diagram
Figure 2-31 shows a block diagram of the CLKX module:

Figure 2-31 CLKX block diagram

272

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

DSWX

DSWX
Purpose
NOTE This section provides information relevant to DSWX performance when the module is installed retrospectively in a BSSC2 installation.

WARNING

The DSWX uses an LED as the fibre optic light source, not a laser. The DSWX fibre optics are therefore not hazardous. Since other modules in the cabinet may emit hazardous laser radiation when fibre optic cables are disconnected, to eliminate the possibility of mistakes do not look directly into any beams with or without the use of optical aids. Radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.
The double kiloport switch extender (DSWX) module extends the 1024/2048 ports of a KSW/DSW2 respectively, in one BSU or RXU type cage to the TDM highways in another BSU or RXU type cage. It is used when the number of required peripherals exceeds the capacity of a BSU or RXU shelf. S S S A DSWX in expansion mode (DSWXE) connects the KSW/DSW2 to the KSW/DSW2 in a another BSU or RXU type cage. A DSWX in remote transmit mode (DSWXR) accepts the highway data from a KSW/DSW2 and sends it to a local receiver. A DSWX in local receive mode (DSWXL) accepts the highway data and drives the TDM bus in the local BSU or RXU, and also provides a clock reference in multishelf configurations.

Although a KSW/DSW2 is located in a particular BSU/RXU, it is logically connected to the TDM bus in that BSU/RXU and to the TDM buses in up to 13 other shelves, which it can be driving. For each BSU or RXU that a KSW/DSW2 is driving, two KSWXs/DSWXs are required; one acting as a remote transmitter attached to the KSW/DSW2, the other as a local receiver attached to the TDM highway in the remote shelf.

Requirements
The DSWX is fitted in slots U0 to U9 and slots U21 to U28 of the BSU or RXU type shelf assembly, with the following limitations: S S S DSWXR must be fitted in slots U2 to U6 and U24 to U28. DSWXL must be fitted in slots U0 and U1. DSWXE must be fitted in slots U7 to U9 and U21 to U23.

The fibre optic cables used to extend/expand the TDM highway from one BSU/RXU to another BSU/RXU must be of the same length. This allows correct operation of the TDM highway to be maintained.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

273

GMR-04

DSWX

GSM-100-333

DSWX module
Figure 2-32 DSWX module

Fibre optic input from another DSWX/KSWX Red/Green LEDs show alarm/normal status

Fibre optic input from clock

RESET/DISABLE switch

Fibre optic output to another DSWX/KSWX

Brief description
The DSWX is a multi-function module responsible for optically transmitting and receiving all TDM bus information between shelves, and for distributing the TDM bus information and TDM clock and reference pulses in the BSS shelves. The DSWX is required for all installations if it is used for clock distribution. In a BSSC2 installation using more than one cabinet, it also extends the 1024 ports of a KSW/DSW2 to other shelves and/or interconnects up to four KSW/DSW2 modules via fibre optic cable. In a TDM switch highway extended between two module shelves, a KSWX/DSWX module is required in each shelf. There are three modes in which the DSWX may operate. These modes are dependent on where in the shelf the DSWX module is placed. The three modes are:

Expansion (DSWXE)
In a BSSC2 installation, expands the standard or double rate TDM bus between up to four KSW/DSW2 respectively to expand switching capacity. DSWXE modules are optically connected to other DSWXE modules.

Remote (DSWXR)
In a BSSC2 installation, extends the standard or double rate TDM bus to a shelf with no KSW/TSW/DSW2. This allows a KSW/DSW2 to switch data to and from highway interface modules (MSIs and DRIMs) in a shelf with no KSW/DSW2. DSWXR modules are optically connected to DSWXL modules.
274

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

DSWX

Local (DSWXL)
The DSWXL distributes the TDM bus within a shelf and this is received optically from a DSWXR/KSWX R in another shelf, and distributes clock and reference signals received from a CLKX. DSWXL modules are optically connected to CLKX modules and can also be connected to DSWXR/KSWX R modules.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

275

GMR-04

DSWX

GSM-100-333

DSWX Block diagram

Figure 2-33 shows a block diagram of the DSWX. Figure 2-33 Block diagram of DSWX
CLK16A REF125A CLK16B REF125B

Status0

TDM Clock Select

TDM Clock 16 TDM Ref 125 TDM Clock 32 TDM Clock 64

Clock/Reference Select Clock Multiply Clock Fail

backplane buffer backplane buffer backplane interface

TDM TX data Optical I/F. To another DSWX or KSWX TDM RX Data Optical I/F. From another DSWX or KSWX

9 TDM_I 9

Parallel to Serial

10

Encode 9B/10B Frame Counter/ TDM Control Logic Elastic Buffer

Reset Diag Data Out CLK Status0

Sync Reset

KSW pres RMTENA MODE10 OE

2 9 Diag Data Lpbk

Serial to Parallel

10

Decode 10B/9B
Recovered Clock

Write Addr

Status0

Read Read Addr

TDM Data Path

Reset

backplane interface

9
TDM_O

TDM VLTN

Toggle Switch green red LEDs

LED Control Logic

DIAG Status MODE1 Reset

Diagnostic Test/Control Logic

Diag Data In Diag Control

Status1

Front Panel Interface and Diagnostics

FLT (board) MRQ (board) FLT (mate) MRQ (mate) 16 MHz clock (mate) Encoded reference (mate) System Clock System Reference

JTAG port

from MATE

Clock/Data Status

Clock Recovery and Distribution

Encoded Clock

Status0

Clock Control Logic/ Clock Fail

MODE1 REF125* REF60* REF612*

Clock Optical Interface

Clock/Encoded Reference Recovery

Status0 Status1 Control0 Control1 RevLevel Board ID 7 7 7 7 3 4

Reference Decode
16 MHz clock (board) Encoded reference (board)

Clock/ Reference Distribution backplane buffer

CLK16Ux REFxxxU CLK16Lx REFxxxL xclk pres to MATE

Serial Bus Interface

Serial Bus Controller

Reset

SERA SERB 7 SLOTID SELECT A/B

276

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

KSWX

KSWX
Purpose
WARNING Possible laser radiation when fibre optic cables are disconnected. Do not look directly into beams with or without the use of any optical aids. Radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors. The kiloport switch extender (KSWX) module extends the 1024 ports of a KSW in one BSU or RXU to the TDM highways in another BSU or RXU. It is used when the number of required peripherals exceeds the capacity of a BSU or RXU shelf. S S S A KSWX in expansion mode (KSWXE) connects the KSW to the KSW in a remote BSU or RXU. A KSWX in remote transmit mode (KSWXR) accepts the highway data from a KSW and sends it to a local receiver. A KSWX in local receive mode (KSWXL) accepts the highway data and drives the TDM bus in the local BSU or RXU, and also provides a clock reference in multishelf configurations.

Although a KSW is located in a particular BSU/RXU, it is logically connected to the TDM bus in that BSU/RXU and to the TDM buses in up to 13 other shelves, which it can be driving. For each BSU or RXU that a KSW is driving, two KSWXs are required; one acting as a remote transmitter attached to the KSW, the other as a local receiver attached to the TDM highway in the remote shelf.

Requirements
The KSWX is fitted in slots U0 to U9 and slots U21 to U28 of the BSU or RXU shelf assembly, with the following limitations: S S S KSWX R must be fitted in slots U2 to U6 and U24 to U28. KSWX L must be fitted in slots U0 and U1. KSWX E must be fitted in slots U7 to U9 and U21 to U23.

The fibre optic cables used to extend/expand the TDM highway from one BSU/RXU to another BSU/RXU must be of the same length. This allows correct operation of the TDM highway to be maintained.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

277

GMR-04

KSWX

GSM-100-333

KSWX module
Figure 2-34 shows a typical KSWX module:

FIBRE OPTIC INPUT FROM ANOTHER KSWX FIBRE OPTIC INPUT FROM CLKX FIBRE OPTIC OUTPUT TO ANOTHER KSWX BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

ACTIVE/ALARM LED RESET/DISABLE SWITCH

Figure 2-34 KSWX module

Brief description
The KSWX is a multi-function module responsible for optically transmitting all TDM bus information between shelves, and for distributing the TDM bus information and TDM clock and reference pulses in the BSS shelves. The KSWX is required when a site has more than one cabinet. It extends the 1024 ports of a KSW to other shelves and/or interconnects up to four KSW modules via fibre optic cable. In a TDM switch highway extended between two module shelves, a KSWX module is required in each shelf. There are three modes in which the KSWX may operate. These modes are dependent on where in the shelf the KSWX module is placed. The three modes are:

Expansion (KSWXE)
Expands the TDM bus between up to four KSW to expand switching capacity. KSWXE modules are optically connected to other KSWXE modules.

Remote (KSWXR)
Extends the TDM bus to a shelf with no KSW/TSW. This allows a KSW to switch data to and from highway interface modules (MSIs and DRIMs) in a shelf with no KSW. KSWXR modules are optically connected to KSWXL modules.

Local (KSWXL)
The KSWXL distributes the TDM bus within a shelf and this is received optically from a KSWX R in another shelf, and distributes clock and reference signals received from a CLKX. KSWXL modules are optically connected to CLKX modules and can also be connected to KSWXR modules.
278

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

KSWX

KSWX diagram
Figure 2-35 shows a block diagram of the KSWX module:

Figure 2-35 KSWX block diagram

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

279

GMR-04

LANX

GSM-100-333

LANX
Purpose
WARNING Possible laser radiation when fibre optic cables are disconnected. Do not look directly into beams with or without the use of any optical aids. Radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated cables connected to data in/out connectors. The local area network extender (LANX) module is required for each BSU or RXU shelf. The LANX: S S S S S S Connects one of the LAN interfaces of each GPROC/GPROC2 in a BSU or RXU shelf to the local shelf token ring LAN via the shelf backplane. Allows optical LAN extension from one BSU or RXU to another. Switches empty module slots or faulty GPROC/GPROC2s out of the LAN. Sets the cage (BSU or RXU shelf) ID. Performs on-board MCAP bus arbitration. Provides shelf active/standby redundant LAN control.

Shelf to shelf extension is via a LANX module in each shelf, interconnected with fibre optic cabling. The LANX supports up to eight GPROC/GPROC2s on the local LAN in one BSU or RXU shelf.

Requirements
LANX modules must be fitted in slots U19 and U20 of the BSU or RXU shelf assembly at all times. A sixteen position (0 to F hex) rotary switch on the LANX module sets the BSU or RXU LAN address (shelf ID number).

280

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

LANX

LANX module
Figure 2-36 shows a LANX module:

FIBRE OPTIC INPUT FROM ANOTHER LANX IN ANOTHER SHELF AT THE SITE FIBRE OPTIC OUTPUT TO ANOTHER LANX IN ANOTHER SHELF AT THE SITE

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

ROTARY SWITCH FOR SETTING SHELF ID NUMBER

Figure 2-36 LANX module

Brief description
Refer to the block diagram at the end of this section. Each LANX receives LAN data from another shelf via optical fibre cables and: 1. 2. 3. 4. Routes the LAN data to the first GPROC/GPROC2. Receives the LAN data back from the first GPROC/GPROC2. Routes the LAN data to the second GPROC/GPROC2. Receives the LAN data back from the second GPROC/GPROC2.

And so on until all GPROC/GPROC2s in the shelf have received the LAN data. The LAN data received back from the last GPROC/GPROC2 in the shelf is sent via fibre optics to the next shelf (if LAN extension is used). If a GPROC/GPROC2 is not present in the shelf or has failed, the LANX bypasses it and passes the LAN data to the next GPROC/GPROC2.

Local LAN data switching

Each GPROC/GPROC2 using the LANX uses the following signals to route LAN data: S S S LAN DATA IN. LAN DATA OUT. INSERT.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

281

GMR-04

LANX

GSM-100-333

GPROC/GPROC2 present
When the GPROC/GPROC2 is present and operating with no faults, the INSERT line is logic 1, causing LANX multiplexers to switch the GPROC/GPROC2 signals as follows: S LAN DATA OUT signal of this GPROC/GPROC2 is switched to the LAN DATA IN signal of the next GPROC/GPROC2 slot. In the case of shelf extension, the LAN DATA OUT signal of GPROC/GPROC2 7 is switched to the fibre optic transmitter stage. LAN DATA OUT signal from the previous GPROC/GPROC2 slot is switched to the LAN DATA IN signal of this GPROC/GPROC2. In the case of shelf extension, the signal from the fibre optic receiver stage is switched to the LAN DATA IN signal of GPROC/GPROC2 0.

GPROC/GPROC2 not present

If the GPROC/GPROC2 is not present or operating with faults, the INSERT line is logic 0 causing LANX multiplexers to switch the GPROC/GPROC2 signals as follows: S S LAN DATA OUT signal of this GPROC/GPROC2 is switched (looped back) to the LAN DATA IN signal of the same GPROC/GPROC2. LAN DATA OUT signal of the previous GPROC/GPROC2 is switched to the LAN DATA IN signal of the next GPROC/GPROC2.

This removes the GPROC/GPROC2 from the LAN ring, and subsequent LAN data bypasses the GPROC/GPROC2.

Extended LAN data switching

In configurations of more than one shelf, the LANX allows the local LAN data to be extended to another shelf via optical fibre connected to a LANX in the other shelf. Any of the GPROC/GPROC2s in the shelf controls local LAN data switching between shelves. Control is via the serial bus connected to the LANX signal, LAN LOCAL/EXTERNAL.

Logic 1
A logic 1 on the LAN LOCAL/EXTERNAL line causes multiplexers on the LANX to switch signals as follows: S LAN DATA IN signal of GPROC/GPROC2 7 is switched to the fibre optic transmitter stage. The optical transmitter provides a Tx data signal, consisting of the local LAN data of this shelf, which is transmitted via fibre optic to a LANX in another shelf. Rx data signal from the fibre optic receiver stage is switched to the LAN DATA OUT signal of GPROC/GPROC2 0.

Logic 0
A logic 0 on the LAN LOCAL/EXTERNAL line causes multiplexers on the LANX to switch signals from LAN DATA IN signal of GPROC/GPROC2 7 is switched to the LAN DATA OUT signal of GPROC/GPROC2 0. This bypasses the LANX fibre optic transmitter and receiver stages consequently disabling local LAN extension to another shelf.

Power loss
If the local LANX loses dc power, the Rx data signal from the fibre optic receiver stage is switched (looped back) to the optical transmitter, providing a Tx data signal via fibre optic to the LANX in another shelf.
282

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

LANX

Bus arbiter
The LANX bus arbiter decides which GPROC/GPROC2 is allowed to write data to the MCAP bus via the LAN DATA IN line. Each GPROC/GPROC2, 0 to 7, can assert its respective BUS REQUEST line. The bus arbiter starts by monitoring GPROC/GPROC2 0 slot. If GPROC/GPROC2 0 has an active BUS REQUEST line, the bus arbiter asserts the GPROC/GPROC2 0 BUS GRANT line. GPROC/GPROC2 0 seizes the MCAP bus and writes data to the bus. When GPROC/GPROC2 0 has finished writing data to the MCAP bus, it deactivates the BUS REQUEST line. This frees the bus and the bus arbiter activates the BUS GRANT line of the next higher numbered GPROC/GPROC2 with an active BUS REQUEST line.

Redundant LAN
If the redundant GPROC/GPROC2 LAN interface is used, a redundant LANX is required. Each LANX has two serial bus interfaces for communications with the GPROC/GPROC2. The selection of which LAN interface is to be used is determined by the GPROC/GPROC2.

Shelf ID
The shelf ID is a unique hexadecimal number assigned to each BSU or RXU shelf. The LANX is fitted with a 16-position (hexadecimal encoded) rotary switch, which defines the shelf ID number of the shelf containing the LANX. The shelf ID is read by the GPROC/GPROC2 via the serial bus interface. The ID number is used by the BSS software when configuring the BSU or RXU. No two shelves at a site can have the same shelf ID. When a redundant LANX is present in a shelf, it must have the same ID number as the primary LANX. The following rules apply: S S A BSU shelf in a BSC is numbered 0 to D (hexadecimal). An RXU shelf in a BSC is numbered 0 or 1 (hexadecimal).

Front panel
The front panel of the LANX incorporates: S S S Rx fibre optic input connector. This connects to the Tx fibre optic output of a LANX in another shelf. Tx fibre optic output connector. This connects to the Rx fibre optic input of a LANX in another shelf. Rotary switch for setting the BSU/RXU shelf ID number.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

283

GMR-04

LANX

GSM-100-333

LANX diagram
Figure 2-37 shows a block diagram of the LANX module:

Figure 2-37 LANX block diagram

284

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

PIX

PIX
Overview
Refer to the block diagram in Figure 2-39. The parallel interface extender (PIX) module provides: S S S An input/output (I/O) interface for customer site equipment. The interface logic between the GPROC and external customer alarm devices such as relays and switches. Eight optically isolated inputs and four relay outputs.

Requirements
PIX modules can be fitted in the following slots of a BSU or RXU shelf assembly: S S BSSC2: BSSC: slots U16, 17 and U18. slots U15 and U16.

PIX module
Figure 2-38 shows a PIX module:

ALARM LED (GREEN) ON = NO ALARMS OFF = CUSTOMER ALARM DETECTED CONNECTOR IS CABLED TO TOP OF CABINET FOR CONNECTION TO CUSTOMER SITE EQUIPMENT

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

ig.240.rh

Figure 2-38 PIX module

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

285

GMR-04

PIX

GSM-100-333

PIX diagram
Figure 2-39 shows a block diagram of the PIX module:

Figure 2-39 PIX block diagram

286

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

Chapter 3

Power, fans and interconnections

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

ii

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

Chapter 3 Power, fans and interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DPSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DPSM view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DPSM diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EPSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EPSM view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EPSM diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPSM view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPSM diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DAB diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses and LEDs (BSSC2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch settings (BSSC2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses and LEDs (BSSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC status inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signal routeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signal timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
31 31 31 32 32 32 33 33 33 34 35 36 36 36 37 38 39 39 39 310 311 312 312 312 313 313 313 313 314 315 316 316 316 317 317 317 317 318 319 319 319 320 320 321 321 321 321 321

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

iii

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

PDB and AIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIB description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIB view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDB description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDB diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC with PAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC with PDB/AIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interconnect panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type 43 interconnect board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T43 diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T43 connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balanced line interconnect board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIB diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIB connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

322 322 322 322 323 323 324 324 324 324 324 325 325 325 326 326 326 327 328 329 329 329 329 330 331 331 331 331 332

iv

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

Overview

Overview
Introduction
This chapter describes the following cabinet equipment: S Power supplies. S Digital power supply module (DPSM). Enhanced power supply module (EPSM). Integrated power supply module (IPSM). Power converter unit (PCU).

Power distribution units (PDUs). Distribution alarm board (DAB). Power alarm board (PAB). Power distribution board (PDB) and alarm interface board (AIB). Circuit breaker panel.

Fan cooling systems. Fan power converter unit (FPCU).

Interconnect panels.

In this chapter
CAUTION Do not fit equipment in any cabinet for which it is not suitable. All information given is valid for GSM, extended GSM (EGSM), DCS1800 and PCS1900 systems unless otherwise indicated.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

31

GMR-04

Power supply modules

GSM-100-333

Power supply modules

Introduction
CAUTION Ensure that the correct power supply module is fitted for the input used. There are three compartments at the base of the BSU/RXU shelf assembly with slide-in mountings for plug-in power supply modules (PSMs): These cabinets ... BSSC Positive earth BSSC2 Negative earth BSSC2 Use this type of power supply ... Digital power supply modules (DPSMs) Integrated power supply modules (IPSMs) Enhanced power supply modules (EPSMs)

The left compartment is for an optional redundant PSM. If the configuration of a particular cabinet does not require a redundant PSM, a blanking plate is fitted over the compartment. The redundant PSM must be compatible with the other cabinet power units.

Cabinet power requirements

Table 3-1 shows the power requirements of the cabinet: Table 3-1 Cabinet power requirements Supply Earth Negative Positive Voltage +27 V 48 V 60 V Cabinet type BSSC2 90 A 50 A 40 A

32

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

DPSM

DPSM
Overview
The digital power supply (DPS) system for each BSU consists of up to three plug-in enhanced power supply modules (DPSMs). The DPSM is a switching type dc - dc power converter that converts the cabinet dc input power to the following dc outputs: S S +5 V ( 2% at 85.5 A). $12 V ( 5% at 2.5 A).

The BSU or RXU backplane connects the outputs of each DPSM in parallel. The DPSMs in the DPS system load-share: S S Two of the DPSMs provide sufficient power for a fully equipped BSU or RXU. The third DPSM (if fitted) provides n+1 redundancy.

A DPSM in an alarm condition sends an alarm message to the GPROC/GPROC2 via the serial bus.

DPSM view
Figure 3-1 shows the DPSM:

RTN (EARTH FOR +5 V OUTPUT) RTN (EARTH FOR +5 V OUTPUT) +5 V +5 V

REAR VIEW

25-PIN D-TYPE CONNECTOR (FEMALE)

ACTIVE LED (GREEN): ON WHEN ALL OUTPUT VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT AND WITHIN TOLERANCE

C GND (CHASSIS EARTH) V RTN (0 V INPUT) V IN (+27 V INPUT)

ALARM LED (RED): ON WHEN ONE OR MORE ALARM CONDITIONS EXIST. OFF WHEN NO ALARM CONDITION EXISTS.

ig.242.rh

Figure 3-1 DPSM module

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

33

GMR-04

DPSM

GSM-100-333

25-pin D-type connections

The 25-pin D-type connector provides connections for: S S S S S S +12 V power output. 12 V power output. Backplane slot ID input. Loss of dc input voltage alarm. Serial data bus. +5 V sense input.

Functional description
Normal operation
During normal operation, the DPSMs share the load current demand of the BSU or RXU shelf modules: S S Half of the load current supplied by each DPSM in a two-DPSM system. One third of the load current supplied by each DPSM in a three-DPSM system.

Regulated dc power is applied to the backplane to power the BSU or RXU shelf modules.

Redundancy
Two DPSMs can provide adequate operating power for all modules in a BSU or RXU shelf. A third DPSM can be added for redundancy. When plugged into the backplane, all DPSM power outputs are connected in parallel, so that the DPS system current capacity is twice that of the individual DPSM; any third DPSM is redundant (n+1).

Power supply shutdown

During a shutdown condition caused by a faulty DPSM, the output circuits of the malfunctioning DPSM are isolated from the backplane output line, and the DPSM alarm LED is switched on. The malfunctioning DPSM informs the GPROC/GPROC2 of the shutdown condition.

Monitoring circuits
Parallel output connections allow each DPSM to sense its own output lines for: S S S Output voltage regulation. Over-voltage protection to shut the DPSM down if the output voltage exceeds 1.2 to 1.3 times the rated output. Over-current protection to latch the power supply off (after a short delay for large overloads) if the output current exceeds: 1.15 to 1.5 times the full-load rating of the +5 V output. 1.15 to 2 times the full-load rating of the +12 V and 12 V outputs.

The BSU or RXU shelfs GPROC/GPROC2 also monitors the status of each DPSM, via a serial alarm link on the backplane, for: S S S S
34

Loss of dc input voltage. Loss of output voltage. Overtemperature. Loss of serial link. Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O
29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

DPSM

Circuit protection
Additional internal DPSM circuit protection includes: S S Input dc reverse polarity protection to prevent DPSM damage using an input series diode to block reverse voltages. Thermal protection to send an alarm message to the GPROC/GPROC2 via the serial port, and shut the DPSM down, if the DPSM ambient temperature exceeds a safe level.

After an alarm condition has ceased, normal DPSM operation is automatically restored.

Serial link
The serial link carries the following information and flags an alarm if an unexpected state or failure occurs:

Address

Device location Slot 0 2

Revision DPSM

Alarms
I/P Fail O/P Fail Overtemp

LED display
Two LEDs are mounted on the front of the DPSM to indicate the following: S S Active (Green): on when all output voltages are present and within specified limits. Alarm (Red): on when one or more alarm conditions exist.

DPSM diagram
Figure 3-2 shows a functional block diagram of the DPSM:

Figure 3-2 DPSM block diagram

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

35

GMR-04

EPSM

GSM-100-333

EPSM
Overview
The enhanced power supply (EPS) system for each BSU in a negative earth (+27 V) system consists of up to three plug-in enhanced power supply modules (EPSMs). The EPSM can only be used in a negative earth cabinet. The EPSM is a switching type dc - dc power converter that converts the cabinet dc input power to the following dc outputs: S S +5 V ( 2% at 85.5 A). $12 V ( 5% at 2.5 A).

The BSU or RXU backplane connects the outputs of each EPSM in parallel. When three EPSMs are fitted in the EPS system, they load-share as follows: S S Two EPSMs provide sufficient power for a fully equipped BSU or RXU. The third EPSM (if fitted) provides n+1 redundancy.

An EPSM in an alarm condition sends an alarm message to the GPROC/GPROC2 via the serial bus.

EPSM view
Figure 3-3 shows the EPSM:

25-PIN D-TYPE CONNECTOR (FEMALE) +5 V +5 V RTN (EARTH FOR +5 V OUTPUT) RTN (EARTH FOR +5 V OUTPUT)

ACTIVE LED (GREEN): ON WHEN OUTPUT VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT AND WITHIN TOLERANCE. ALARM LED (RED): ON WHEN ONE OR MORE ALARM CONDITIONS EXISTS. OFF WHEN NO ALARM CONDITION EXISTS.

C GND (CHASSIS EARTH) V RTN (0 V INPUT) V IN (+27 V INPUT)

Figure 3-3 EPSM module

36

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

EPSM

25-pin D-type connections

The 25-pin D-type connector provides connections for: S S S S S S +12 V power output. 12 V power output. Backplane slot ID input. Loss of dc input voltage alarm. Serial data bus. +5 V sense input.

Functional description
Normal operation
During normal operation, the EPSMs share the load current demand of the BSU or RXU shelf modules: S S Half of the load current supplied by each EPSM in a two-EPSM system. One third of the load current supplied by each EPSM in a three-EPSM system.

Regulated dc power is applied to the backplane to power the BSU or RXU shelf modules.

Redundancy
Two enhanced power supply modules (EPSMs) can provide adequate operating power for all modules in a BSU or RXU shelf. A third EPSM can be added for redundancy. When plugged into the backplane, all EPSM power outputs are connected in parallel, so that the EPS system current capacity is twice that of the individual EPSM; any third EPSM is redundant (n+1).

Power supply shutdown

During a shutdown condition caused by a faulty EPSM, the output circuits of the malfunctioning EPSM are isolated from the backplane output line, and the EPSM alarm LED is switched on. The malfunctioning EPSM informs the GPROC/GPROC2 of the shutdown condition.

Monitoring circuits
Parallel output connections allow each EPSM to sense its own output lines for: S S S Output voltage regulation. Over-voltage protection to shut the EPSM down if the output voltage exceeds 1.2 to 1.3 times the rated output. Over-current protection to latch the power supply off (after a short delay for large overloads) if the output current exceeds: 1.15 to 1.5 times the full-load rating of the +5 V output. 1.15 to 2 times the full-load rating of the +12 V and 12 V outputs.

The BSU or RXU shelfs GPROC/GPROC2 also monitors the status of each EPSM, via a serial alarm link on the backplane, for: S S S S Loss of dc input voltage. Loss of output voltage. Overtemperature. Loss of serial link.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

37

GMR-04

EPSM

GSM-100-333

Circuit protection
Additional internal EPSM circuit protection includes: S S Input dc reverse polarity protection to prevent EPSM damage using an input series diode to block reverse voltages. Thermal protection to send an alarm message to the GPROC/GPROC2 via the serial port, and shut the EPSM down, if the EPSM ambient temperature exceeds a safe level.

After an alarm condition has ceased, normal EPSM operation is automatically restored.

Serial link
The serial link carries the following information and flags an alarm if an unexpected state or failure occurs:

Address

Device location Slot 0 2

Revision EPSM

Alarms
I/P Fail O/P Fail Overtemp

LED display
Two LEDs are mounted on the front of the EPSM to indicate the following: S S Active (Green): on when all output voltages are present and within specified limits. Alarm (Red): on when one or more alarm conditions exist.

EPSM diagram
Figure 3-4 shows a functional block diagram of the EPSM:

Figure 3-4 EPSM block diagram

38

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

IPSM

IPSM
Overview
The integrated power supply (IPS) system for each BSU or RXU in a positive earth (48 V/60 V) system consists of up to three plug-in integrated power supply modules (IPSMs). The IPSM can only be used in positive earth cabinets. The IPSM is a switching type dc dc power converter that converts the cabinet dc input power to the following dc outputs: S S S S +27.5 V 5 % at 45 A (full-load current). +5.1 V 2 % at 87.5 A (full-load current). +12 V 5 % at 2.5 A (full-load current). 12 V 5 % at 2.5 A (full-load current).

The BSU or RXU backplane connects the outputs of each IPSM in parallel. When three IPSMs are fitted in the IPS system, they load-share as follows: S S Two IPSMs provide sufficient power for a fully equipped BSU or RXU. The third IPSM provides n + 1 redundancy.

An IPSM in an alarm condition sends an alarm message to the GPROC/GPROC2 via the serial bus.

IPSM view
Figure 3-5 shows the IPSM:

25-PIN D-TYPE CONNECTOR (FEMALE) +5 V +5 V RTN (EARTH FOR +5 V OUTPUT) RTN (EARTH FOR +5 V OUTPUT) +27.5 V (RTN) +27.5 V (OUTPUT)

ACTIVE LED (GREEN): ON WHEN ALL OUTPUT VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT AND WITHIN TOLERANCE

C GND (CHASSIS EARTH) V RTN (0 V INPUT) V IN (48 V/60 V INPUT)

ALARM LED (RED): ON WHEN ONE OR MORE ALARM CONDITIONS EXIST. OFF WHEN NO ALARM CONDITION EXISTS.

Figure 3-5 IPSM module

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

39

GMR-04

IPSM

GSM-100-333

25-pin D-type connections

The 25-pin D-type connector provides connections for: S S S S S S +12 V power output. 12 V power output. Backplane slot ID input. Loss of dc input voltage alarm. Serial data bus. +5 V sense input.

Functional description
Normal operation
During normal operation, the IPSMs equally share load current demand of the BSU or RXU shelf modules: S S Half of the load current supplied by each IPSM in a two-IPSM system. One third of the load current supplied by each IPSM in a three-IPSM system.

Redundancy
Two IPSMs can provide adequate operating power for all modules in a BSU or RXU shelf. A third IPSM can be added for redundancy. When plugged into the backplane, all IPSM power outputs are connected in parallel, so that the IPS system current capacity is twice that of the individual IPSM; any third IPSM is redundant (n+1).

Power supply shutdown

During a shutdown condition caused by a faulty PSM, the output circuits of the malfunctioning PSM are isolated from the backplane output line and the PSM alarm LED is on. The malfunctioning PSM informs the GPROC/GPROC2 of the shutdown condition.

Monitoring circuits
Parallel output connections allow each IPSM to sense its own output lines for: S S S Output voltage regulation. Over-voltage protection to shut the IPSM down if the output voltage exceeds 1.2 to 1.3 times the rated output. Over-current protection to latch the power supply off (after a short delay for large overloads) if the output current exceeds: 1.05 to 1.3 times the full-load rating of the +5.1 V output. 1.05 to 2 times the full-load rating of the +12 V and 12 V outputs.

The BSU or RXU shelfs GPROC/GPROC2 monitors the status of each IPSM via a serial alarm link on the backplane for: S S S S
310

Loss of dc input voltage. Loss of output voltage. Overtemperature. Loss of serial link. Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O
29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

IPSM

Circuit protection
Additional internal IPSM circuit protection includes: S S Input dc reverse polarity protection to prevent IPSM damage using an input series diode that blocks reverse voltages. Thermal protection to send an alarm message to the GPROC/GPROC2 via the serial port, then shut the IPSM down, if the IPSM ambient temperature exceeds a safe level.

After an alarm condition has ceased, normal IPSM operation is automatically restored.

Serial link
The serial link carries the following information and flags an alarm if an unexpected state or failure occurs:

Address

Device location Slot 0 2

Revision IPSM

Alarms
I/P Fail O/P Fail Overtemp

LED display
Two LEDs are mounted on the front of the IPSM to indicate the following: S S Active (Green): on when all output voltages are present and within specified limits. Alarm (Red): on when one or more alarm conditions exist.

IPSM diagram
Figure 3-6 shows a functional diagram of the IPSM:

Figure 3-6 IPSM block diagram

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

311

GMR-04

PDU

GSM-100-333

PDU
Overview
The power distribution unit (PDU) is located on the top shelf of the cabinet and: S S Distributes dc power throughout the cabinet. Provides an alarm interface.

It consists of a circuit breaker panel and one of the following: S S S A distribution alarm board (DAB). A power alarm board (PAB). A power distribution board (PDB) with an alarm interface board (AIB).

Input power
DC input power is applied at the interconnection panel on top of the cabinet and is routed to: S S The VIN bus bar. The earth (GND) bus bar in the PDU.

A second bus bar obtains +27 V power from: S S The power supply modules (PSMs) in the lower BSU or RXU in positive earth (48/60 V) cabinets. The VIN and GND busbars via busbar links in negative earth (+27 V) cabinets.

312

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

DAB

DAB
Purpose
The distribution alarm board (DAB): S S S Distributes +27 V dc to units within the cabinet via 25 fuses. Monitors alarm lines. Passes individual alarms to the GPROC/GPROC2.

The DAB processes operational failure signals from: S S Ruptured fuses. The fan stall sense line from each cooling fan.

Two bi-coloured LEDs (D43 and D8) are mounted on the DAB to indicate DAB and cabinet-based faults. The other LEDs indicate fuse failures according to the tables in this section. The DAB can be used in a BSSC2 cabinet.

Requirements
The DAB is fitted in the PDU shelf.

DAB diagram
Figure 3-7 shows a DAB:

Figure 3-7 DAB module

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

313

GMR-04

DAB

GSM-100-333

Fuses and LEDs (BSSC2)

Table 3-2 details the functions of the DAB fuses and LEDs used in the BSSC2: Table 3-2 DAB fuses and LEDs (BSSC2) Fuse F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14, F15 F18 F19 F20 F21 F22 F23 F24 F25 F26 F27 F28 F29, F30 Rating 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 4A 4A 4A 2A 0.5 A 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A 4A Power to Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used DAB supply Not used Upper fan 5 Upper fan 4 Upper fan 3 Lower fan 2 Lower fan 1 Lower fan 0 Not used Not used Not used LED D27 D29 D31 D24 D21 D23 D22 D25 D28 D26 D30 D42 N/A D40 D33 D37 D41 D38 D35 D32 D36 D39 D34

314

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

DAB

Switch settings (BSSC2)

Table 3-3 shows the settings of DAB switches S1 and S2, which can be configured as required in the BSSC2: Table 3-3 S1 and S2 switch settings (DAB BSSC2) Function VSWR1 (Sector 1) VSWR2 (Sector 2) VSWR3 (Sector 3) Spare Battery backup O/P 2 Switch S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 Position 1 2 3 4 5 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF (if battery backup installed) ON (if battery backup not installed or installed but not selected) ON (if battery backup installed in a cabinet fitted with a lower cage only, or if battery backup not installed or installed but not used) OFF (if battery backup installed in a cabinet fitted with both upper and lower cages) ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Setting

Battery backup O/P 1

S1

Battery backup I/P 2 Battery backup I/P 1 DRCU5 DRCU2 DRCU4 DRCU1 DRCU3 DRCU0 Spare BBB ID

S1 S1 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2

7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Note A site reset is required for changes to the DAB switch settings to take full effect. Failure to do this may result in incorrect/inaccurate alarm conditions being generated.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

315

GMR-04

DAB

GSM-100-333

Alarm functions
The DAB produces alarms for several different devices and modules: S S S S S 25 fuses. Battery backup input and output alarms. Multicoupler. Six circuit breakers. Six fan alarms.

Each signal from the fuse alarms is at a nominal +27 V level and is brought to a TTL high level. Under no-fault conditions, the TTL output is held at a high level. If one or more fuses fail on the multicoupler fuse panel the TTL level is low. The addressable asynchronous receiver/transmitter (AART) has eight status inputs, which are multiplexed to obtain the required alarm functionality.

Visual warnings
Each +27 V (nominal) fuse protected branch circuit that powers cabinet equipment has a corresponding LED indicator on the DAB. The LED lights if the fuse is ruptured by a fault condition, and the associated alarm line goes low. The DAB also provides visual warnings for alarms via two bi-coloured LEDs: S S D43 indicates any internal cabinet or multicoupler and combiner failure. D8 indicates a fuse failure on the DAB only.

Both LEDs are driven by the master GPROC/GPROC2 in response to alarms generated by the DAB; red indicates an alarm, otherwise the LEDs remain green. If the master GPROC/GPROC2 is not running then both LEDs default to red.

Communications
The DAB communicates with the master GPROC/GPROC2 via the serial bus link. The master GPROC/GPROC2 always initiates connections, in which all modules respond with status reports on the serial bus. The DAB processes operational failure reports from the following: S S S S Ruptured fuses. Protected side of circuit breakers (except DPS circuit breakers, which are monitored by the master GPROC/GPROC2 directly). Fan stall sense line from each cooling fan. Hardware failures reported directly to the DAB are individually sent to the master GPROC/GPROC2 via the serial bus.

The serial bus circuitry is powered by the same +5 V that powers each digital card shelf. The power supplies that provide this +5 V (as well as 12 V) deliver isolated outputs. Thus all devices in the serial bus circuit have a return that is floating (digital) earth relative to the cabinet (main) earth. However, many of the signals being alarmed are referenced to cabinet earth.
316

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

PAB

PAB
Purpose
The power alarm board (PAB) located in the PDU processes operational failure reports from the following: S S S S Ruptured fuses. Protected side of circuit breakers (except DPS circuit breakers). Fan stall sense line from each cooling fan. Hardware failures that are reported directly to the PAB, are individually sent to the GPROC via the serial bus.

The PAB provides +27 V (nominal) fuse-protected branch circuits for cabinet equipment and fuse-protected +5 V DRAM back up power for the digital modules in the BSU and RXU shelves. Each fused branch has a corresponding LED indicator on the PAB, which lights when the fuse is ruptured. The PAB also has a bi-coloured LED which turns red to indicate a PAB-based fault. The PAB maintains the bicoloured LED on the cabinet front door at green to indicate that the system has power applied. The PAB can be used in BSSC cabinets.

Diagram
Figure 3-8 shows a PAB:

Figure 3-8 PAB module

BSSC cabinet
The BSSC cabinet has fuse-protected branch circuits for the following internal and external cabinet equipment: S S S +5 V DRAM back up to lower and upper BSU/RXU. Each cabinet cooling fan. +27 V DRAM back up battery (external).

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

317

GMR-04

PAB

GSM-100-333

Fuses and LEDs (BSSC)

Table 3-4 details the functions of the PAB fuses and LEDs used in the BSSC: Table 3-4 PAB fuse and LED functions Fuse F1, F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14, F15 F16, F17 F18 F19 F20 F21 F22 F23 F24 F25 F26 F27 F28 F29, F30 Rating 4A 4A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 4A 4A 4A 4A 2A 0.5 A 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A 4A Power to +5 V DRAM battery back up (lower shelf) 27 V battery back up input (internal/external) Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used +5 V DRAM battery back up (upper shelf) Not used PAB Supply Not used Upper Fan 5 Upper Fan 4 Upper Fan 3 Lower Fan 2 Lower Fan 1 Lower Fan 0 Not used Not used Not used LED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

318

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

PAB

Jumpers
Jumper JU1 must be fitted on POS, as shown in the diagram, for +27V cabinets, or to NEG for 48/60V cabinets. Normally, the +5 V DRAM voltage is supplied to the BSU backplane by the DPSMs. If the DPSMs fail to deliver the +5 V DRAM supply, due to cabinet input power failure or DPSM failure, the PAB converts either an external +27 V back up supply (input power protection) or the +27 V cabinet supply (DPSM failure protection) to a fused +5 V DRAM supply. The desired option is selected using jumpers JU2 and JU3, as shown below.
Set to POS (JU1 pins 2 3) Connect pins 23 on both jumpers for EXTERNAL backup power
INT NEG 1 POS JU1

1 EXT 1

JU2 JU3

Connect pins 12 on both jumpers for INTERNAL power conversion

Alarm functions
The PAB alarms several different devices and modules: S S S S S S 26 fuses. Four +5 V DRAM back up fuses. 48/60 V converter alarms. The multicoupler alarm. Eight circuit breakers. Six fan alarms.

The addressable asynchronous receiver/transmitter (AART) has seven status inputs available. To obtain the required alarm functionality, the inputs to the status pins are multiplexed. The serial bus circuitry is powered by the same +5 V that powers each digital card shelf. The power supplies that provide this +5 V (as well as 12 V) deliver isolated outputs. Thus all devices in the serial bus circuit have a return that is floating (digital) earth relative to the cabinet (main) earth. However, many of the signals being alarmed are referenced to cabinet earth. In order to preserve the isolation between the two earths present in the PAB, opto-isolators between the multiplexer/data selector outputs and status inputs are used where needed.

Visual warnings
Each +27V (nominal) fuse-protected branch circuit that powers cabinet equipment has a corresponding LED indicator on the PAB. The LED lights if the fuse is ruptured by a fault condition, and the associated alarm line goes low. The PAB also provides visual warnings for alarms through two bicoloured LEDs. S The first LED is mounted on the cabinet door. This LED indicates failures in: S An internal cabinet function. External multicoupler and combiner.

The second LED (LED27) is on the lower left corner of the PAB and signals a fuse failure on the PAB only.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

319

GMR-04

PAB

GSM-100-333

Input signals
Fuse alarm levels
Each of the signals from the fuse alarms is at a nominal +27 V level and is brought to a TTL high level.

Circuit breaker alarms

Depending on the cabinet fit, the following signals from circuit breakers are fed to the PAB: S BSSC: Two signals to sense the 48/60 V dc to dc fan power converter input voltages. The output from each converter circuit breaker, at a nominal 48 V or 60 V level, is brought to a TTL high level.

Multicoupler alarm
Under no-fault conditions the TTL level output is held at a high level. If one or more fuses fail on the multicoupler fuse panel the TTL level is low.

Converter alarms
Two 48 V or 60 V dc to dc converter alarm signals are detected. One signal is an over temperature indication, the other a low voltage failure. Under no-fault conditions the TTL level output is held high. If one or both failures occur the TTL level is low.

+5 V back up supply
The PAB also supplies current to the digital shelves for the purpose of a back up supply. The device used to perform this function is a 150 W dc to dc converter which delivers an output of 16 A at a nominal +5 V. The converter is configured to give a +4.85 V output. This back up power, which is for the GPROC and LANX modules, is switched in only in the event of a loss of the primary base station cabinet input power.

Serial bus
The serial bus allows the GPROC bus master to connect to, and communicate with, the PAB.

Status word
The function of the status word is to report any alarms that occur to the master GPROC. Under normal (no alarm) operating conditions, bits S0S2 and S4S6 are high while bits S3 and S7 are low.

Transmit enable
As the serial bus communication link is bidirectional, allowing the PAB to receive and transmit information along the same signal path, a one-shot serial bus access circuit is used to provide an 10 ms access/transmit window. The command strobe (CS) pulse is generated by the addressable asynchronous receiver/transmitter ( AART) after it receives a valid command word. The CS pulse signals the one-shot to send the 10 ms pulse to the receive and transmit circuitry, allowing data transmission.

Transmit and receive

When the transmit enable 10 ms pulse is active, the PAB can send data (input data and status words) on the serial bus. The A/B select line decides on which serial data line the information is to be received from the GPROC.
320

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

PAB

Reset
The ART could enter an unknown state at switchon, therefore its reset is tied to an undervoltage sensing circuit. This allows the AART to receive power before it is reset.

Timing
A MC406 crystal oscillator provides the 307.2 kHz clock frequency. This frequency is then internally divided by 64 to derive the receive data strobe and the data clock rate (4800 Hz).

BSSC status inputs

The status inputs S0S7 respond to the following alarms on the BSSC cabinet: Status input ... Responds to alarms from ... S0 S1 S2 Not used. Not used. Fan 0 (F26), fan 1 (F25), fan 2 (F24), fan 3 (F23), fan 4 (F22) and fan 5 (F21) power supplies; 48/60 V fan power converter temperature fail and +27 V DRAM back up input supply. +27 V PAB supply (F19); 48/60 V fan power converter 1 (CB4), fan power converter 2 (CB5) and 48/60 V fan power converter fail. +5 V DRAM supply (lower shelf) (F1 and 2) and (upper shelf) (F16 and 17). Fans 05 stall alarms. +27 V PAB supply (F19). Not used.

S3

S4 S5 S6 S7

Signal routeing
Each of the above signals, with the exception of the +5 V DRAM supply, are first brought to a TTL level before being fed to a data selector, which selects the appropriate input. The input is passed through an opto-isolator to ensure the signal is isolated between the main and digital earths. The output of the opto-isolator is routed to the appropriate status input of the AART.

Signal timing
Since the data selectors that drive the status inputs S0S3 and S5 are referenced to main earth, the clocking signals, and output from the AART, are opto-isolated before clocking the data selectors. The status input S4 is driven from a data selector that is referenced to digital earth and is clocked directly from the AART.

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

321

GMR-04

PDB and AIB

GSM-100-333

PDB and AIB

Overview
The PDU in BSSC cabinet comprises an Alarm Interface Board (AIB) and a Power Distribution Board (PDB).

AIB description
The AIB circuits operate from: S S +27 V and optional +27 V DRAM back up from the PDB. +5 V from digital power supplies via the BSU backplane.

Normally the +5 V DRAM voltage for a GPROC/GPROC2 dynamic RAM is supplied to the BSU backplane by the DPSM. If the primary +27 V is removed from the cabinet, the AIB converts the +27 V DRAM back up to a fused +5 V DRAM voltage, which is supplied to the BSU backplane. +5 V DRAM voltage fuses and usage are as follows: S S F1 (60 V, 10 A) supplies +27 V to the upper BSU shelf backplane. F2 (60 V, 10 A) supplies +27 V to the lower BSU shelf backplane.

The AIB monitors alarm lines, passes individual alarms to the GPROC/GPROC2 and provides a composite alarm signal for the cabinet alarm LED. The AIB combines all alarms into one common alarm output which is routed to the cabinet alarm LED mounted on the cabinet front door. When the LED is on, a hardware and/or software failure condition exists within the cabinet. There is also a bi-coloured LED mounted on the AIB which indicates an AIB based fault. The AIB processes operational failure signals from: S S S Ruptured fuses. The protected side of circuit breakers (except DPSM circuit breakers). The fan stall sense line from each cooling fan.

AIB view
Figure 3-9 shows an AIB:
PC3 Serial chip F2 F1 PC1 PC6 PC3 PC7
JU5

DS1 PC2 PC8

JU 1

JU 4

JU 3

JU 2

PC9

ig.249.rh

Figure 3-9 AIB module

322

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

PDB and AIB

PDB description
The PDB distributes +27 V and +5 V to units within the cabinet through 25 fuses. The PDB reports fuse failures to the AIB and also provides a fused circuit for the optional 27 V DRAM back up battery which connects to the DRAM port on top of cabinet. Table 3-5 shows the functions of the PDB fuses: Table 3-5 PDB Fuse functions Fuse 1 to 5 6 to 10 11 & 12 13 & 14 15 & 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Voltage 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 Rating 25 A 0.5 A 5A 10 A 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A 2A Power to Not used (May or may not be installed) Not used (May or may not be installed) Not used (May or may not be installed) Not used (May or may not be installed) Not used (May or may not be installed) Lower Fan 0 Lower Fan 1 Lower Fan 2 Upper Fan 0 (If installed) Upper Fan 1 (If installed) Upper Fan 2 (If installed) Spare DRAM Back-up Alarm Interface Board

PDB diagram
Figure 3-10 shows a PDB:

Figure 3-10 PDB module

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

323

GMR-04

Circuit breakers

GSM-100-333

Circuit breakers
Purpose
Power is distributed within the cabinet via the circuit breakers. This section details the function of each circuit breaker in each cabinet.

BSSC with PAB

Eight circuit breakers distribute power to units in a BSSC cabinet with a PAB-type PDU. S S CB4 and CB5 provide -48/60 V power to the fan power converters in positive earth cabinets only. CB6, CB7 and CB8 provide power to the DPSMs in the upper BSU or RXU shelf: S In a positive earth cabinet, the circuit breakers supply 48/60 V. In a negative earth cabinet, the circuit breakers supply +27 V.

CB9, CB10 and CB11 provide power to the DPSMs in the lower BSU or RXU shelf: In a positive earth cabinet, the circuit breakers supply 48/60 V. In a negative earth cabinet, the circuit breakers supply +27 V.

BSSC with PDB/AIB

Six circuit breakers distribute power to units in a BSSC cabinet with a PDB/AIB-type PDU. S CB0, CB1, CB2, CB3, CB4 and CB5 provide +27 V power to the DPSMs in both BSU or RXU shelves.

BSSC2
Seven circuit breakers distribute power to units within the BSSC2 cabinet. S S CB1, at 30 A, provides +27 V power to the DAB. CB5 to CB10, at 60 A, provide power to the PSMs: In a positive earth cabinet, the circuit breakers supply 48/60 V power to the IPSMs. In a negative earth cabinet, the circuit breakers supply +27 V power to the EPSMs.

324

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

Fan cooling system

Fan cooling system

Overview
The fan cooling system comprises two fan tray assemblies mounted directly below each BSU or RXU shelf. Each fan tray assembly contains three exhaust fans. Cabinet baffling divides the cabinet cooling system into upper and lower cabinet cooling subsystems. The cooling system, in conjunction with the correct use of shelf airflow deflectors, provides adequate cooling for all cabinet equipment. Each fan has a fan stall sensor, which is connected to alarm circuits in the PDU.

Power
In negative earth cabinets, power for the fans is derived from the +27 V bus bar via the PDU. In positive earth BSSC cabinets, a Fan Power Converter Unit (FPCU) is required to derive +27 V from the -48/60 V supply. The FPCU is mounted above the lower BSU or RXU shelf in positive earth BSSC cabinets. Figure 3-11 shows the FPCU module.

FAN POWER CONVERTER UNIT INTERFACE FAN POWER CONVERTER MODULE 1 FAN POWER CONVERTER MODULE 2

ig.251.rh

Figure 3-11 FPCU module

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

325

GMR-04

Interconnect panel

GSM-100-333

Interconnect panel
Location
The interconnect panel is on top of the cabinet.

Purpose
This panel provides connections for: S S S S S DC input power. 2.048 Mbit/s E1 line interconnect modules. Customer defined alarm equipment input and output. +27 V battery back up input for DRAM. +27 V power/alarm for external receiver multicoupler and external remotely tuneable combiner (BTS only).

The interconnect panel has feed-through tubes for routing fibre optic intercabinet cables into and out of the cabinet. Feed-through tubes do not compromise the cabinets EMC screening, as the tubes operate below their waveguide cut off frequency. The 2.048 Mbit/s E1 line interconnection modules are: S S Type 43 interconnect boards (T43), used for unbalanced lines. Balanced-line interconnect boards (BIB), used for balanced lines.

326

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

Interconnect panel

BSSC
Diagram
Figure 3-12 shows the interconnect panel for the 48/60 V BSSC:
FIBRE OPTIC CABLES FEED THROUGH TUBE

GKO X21-0 PIX 1 EARTH STUD V IN PIX 0 48/60 V dc 0V X21-1 BATTERY BACK UP

Figure 3-12 Interconnect panel

Connectors
Table 3-6 details the interconnect panel connectors for the BSSC. Table 3-6 BSSC interconnect panel connectors Connector +27 V Batt Back up MS0 to MS3 Function DRAM back-up battery Multiple serial interface ports (up to six E1/T1 circuits at each connector; six Tx and six Rx circuits) Customer alarm input/output ports Not used in this configuration Not used in this configuration Internal destination PAB connector PC6 MS0 to MS3 connectors on lower BSU/RXU backplane MS4 to MS7 connectors on upper BSU/RXU backplane Front edge connector of PIX modules GKO connector on lower BSU backplane External destination +27 V back-up battery E1/T1 circuits source or termination equipment (via BIB or T43)

MS4 to MS7

PIX0 and PIX1 GKO X21-0 and X21-1

Customer alarm equipment

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

327

GMR-04

Interconnect panel

GSM-100-333

BSSC2
Diagram
Figure 3-13 shows the interconnect panel for the BSSC2:
FIBRE OPTIC CABLES FEED THROUGH TUBE

GKO BATTERY BACK UP PIX 1 EARTH STUD V IN PIX 0 48/60 V dc or +27 V dc 0V

Figure 3-13 Interconnect panel

Connectors
Table 3-7 details the interconnect panel connectors for the BSSC2. Table 3-7 BSSC2 Interconnect panel connectors Connector +27 V battery backup MS0 to MS3 Function DRAM backup battery Multiple serial interface ports (up to six E1/T1 circ its at each circuits connector; six Tx and six Rx circuits) Customer alarm input and output ports Not used in this configuration Internal destination DAB connector PC4 and BBBX connector PC2 MS0 to MS3 connectors on lower BSU/RXU backplane MS4 to MS7 connectors on upper BSU/RXU backplane Front edge connector of PIX modules GKO connector on lower BSU backplane External destination +27 V backup battery E1/T1 circuits source or termination eq ipment (via equipment ( ia a T43 or BIB)

MS4 to MS7

PIX0 and PIX1

Customer alarm equipment

GKO

328

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

Type 43 interconnect board

Type 43 interconnect board

Location
The T43 interconnect board plugs into the interconnect panel via a 37-pin D-type connector.

Purpose
The T43 interconnect board matches the impedance between the pulse code modulation (PCM) circuit lines and the BSU/RXU backplanes. The board interfaces up to six input and six output unbalanced coaxial 75 ohm 2.048 Mbit/s E1 lines to the BSU/RXU backplane through twelve type 43 coaxial connectors. The T43 uses 12 transformers to provide impedance matching between the PCM circuit lines and the multiple serial interface (MSI) modules. Each transformer has a 1:1.25 turns ratio to match the external 75 ohm and backplane 120 ohm connections. Each input and output is isolated by up to 1500 V from the backplane. NOTE Use the T43 for unbalanced lines.

T43 diagram
Figure 3-14 shows the T43 interconnect board:
J0 J8 J14 J16 J13 J7 J17 J5 J11 J1 J10 J2 J4

Figure 3-14 T43 module

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

329

GMR-04

Type 43 interconnect board

GSM-100-333

T43 connectors
Table 3-8 details the T43 connectors. Table 3-8 T43 Connectors D-Type Pin no. J0-1 J0-2 J0-4 J0-5 J0-7 J0-8 J0-10 J0-11 J0-13 J0-14 J0-16 J0-17 Function MSI_MEGA_Tx1 + MSI_MEGA_Rx1 + MSI_MEGA_Tx4 + MSI_MEGA_Rx4 + MSI_MEGA_Tx2 + MSI_MEGA_Rx2 + Coaxial Pin no. J1 Centre J2 Centre J4 Centre J5 Centre J7 Centre J8 Centre
DType

Function MSI_MEGA_Tx1 (AC coupled to earth) MSI_MEGA_Rx1 (Earth) MSI_MEGA_Tx4 (AC coupled to earth) MSI_MEGA_Rx4 (Earth) MSI_MEGA_Tx2 (AC coupled to earth) MSI_MEGA_Rx2 (Earth) MSI_MEGA_Tx5 (AC coupled to earth) MSI_MEGA_Rx5 (Earth) MSI_MEGA_Tx3 (AC coupled to earth) MSI_MEGA_Rx3 (Earth) MSI_MEGA_Tx6 (AC coupled to earth) MSI_MEGA_Rx6 (Earth)

Pin no. J0-20 J0-21 J0-23 J0-24 J0-26 J0-27 J0-29 J0-30 J0-32 J0-33 J0-35 J0-36

Coaxial Pin no. J1 Shield J2 Shield J4 Shield J5 Shield J7 Shield J8 Shield J10 Shield J11 Shield J13 Shield J14 Shield J16 Shield J17 Shield

MSI_MEGA_Tx5 J10 Centre + MSI_MEGA_Rx5 J11 Centre + MSI_MEGA_Tx3 J13 Centre + MSI_MEGA_Rx3 J14 Centre + MSI_MEGA_Tx6 J16 Centre + MSI_MEGA_Rx6 J17 Centre +

Connector J0 pins 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 19, 22, 25, 28, 31, 34, and 37 are not used

330

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-333

Balanced line interconnect board

Balanced line interconnect board

Location
The BIB plugs into the interconnect board via two 37-pin D-type connectors.

Purpose
The balanced-line interconnect board (BIB) matches the impedance between the pulse code modulation (PCM) circuit lines and the BSU backplanes. The board provides interfaces for six input and six output balanced 120 ohm E1/T1 lines. The board uses 12 transformers to match the impedance between the PCM circuit lines and the multiple serial interface (MSI) modules. Each transformer has a 1:1 turns ratio to match the external and backplane 120 ohm connections. NOTE Use the BIB for balanced lines.

BIB diagram
Figure 3-15 shows the BIB module.
J0

J1

Figure 3-15 BIB module

29 Aug 1997

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

331

GMR-04

Balanced line interconnect board

GSM-100-333

BIB connectors
Table 3-9 details the BIB connectors: Table 3-9 BIB Connectors Pin no. J01 J02 J03 J04 J05 J06 J07 J08 J09 J010 J011 J012 J013 J014 J015 J016 J017 J018 J019 Function MSI_MEGA/EXT_ME GA_Tx1+ MSI_MEGA/EXT_ME GA_Rx1+ Earth MSI_MEGA/EXT_ME GA_Tx4+ MSI_MEGA/EXT_ME GA_Rx4+ Earth MSI_MEGA/EXT_ME GA_Tx2+ MSI_MEGA/EXT_ME GA_Rx2+ Earth MSI_MEGA/EXT_ME GA_Tx5+ MSI_MEGA/EXT_ME GA_Rx5+ Earth MSI_MEGA/EXT_ME GA_Tx3+ MSI_MEGA/EXT_ME GA_Rx3+ Earth MSI_MEGA/EXT_ME GA_Tx6+ MSI_MEGA/EXT_ME GA_Rx6+ Earth Earth Pin no. J11 J12 J13 J14 J15 J16 J17 J18 J19 J110 J111 J112 J113 J114 J115 J116 J117 J118 J119 Pin no. J020 J021 J022 J023 J024 J025 J026 J027 J028 J029 J030 J031 J032 J033 J034 J035 J036 J037 Function MSI_MEGA/EXT_ME GA_Tx1 MSI_MEGA/EXT_ME GA_Rx1 Earth MSI_MEGA/EXT_ME GA_Tx4 MSI_MEGA/EXT_ME GA_Rx4 Earth MSI_MEGA/EXT_ME GA_Tx2 MSI_MEGA/EXT_ME GA_Rx2 Earth MSI_MEGA/EXT_ME GA_Tx5 MSI_MEGA/EXT_ME GA_Rx5 Earth MSI_MEGA/EXT_ME GA_Tx3 MSI_MEGA/EXT_ME GA_Rx3 Earth MSI_MEGA/EXT_ME GA_Tx6 MSI_MEGA/EXT_ME GA_Rx6 Earth Pin no. J120 J121 J122 J123 J124 J125 J126 J127 J128 J129 J130 J131 J132 J133 J134 J135 J136 J137

332

Technical Description: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W07-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

CHAPTER 1 SITE PREPARATION

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION

CHAPTER 3 DECOMISSIONING

Category 433

Installation and Configuration

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

ii

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

Category 433 Installation and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1 Site preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool kits for installing GSM cellular equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool kit one . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool kit two . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site requirements and considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structural requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive earth BSSC cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Negative earth BSSC cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back up power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overcurrent protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handling optical fibres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protection of fibres and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning of fibres and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fibre connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum bend radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visiting the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before the visit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arriving at the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leaving the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rubbish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rural sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety on site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
i
11 11 11 11 12 12 12 14 15 15 15 15 15 15 16 17 17 17 17 17 17 18 18 18 18 18 19 110 110 110 110 111 111 111 112

Chapter 2 Installing the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lifting cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transient/ lightning protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optical fibres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
21 21 21 21 21 21 22 22 22 23 23 23

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

iii

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

Unpacking the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shipping crate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anchoring the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the cabinet air deflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing to connect dc power and earth cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC2 interconnect panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Negative earth BSSC interconnect panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive earth BSSC interconnect panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting dc power cables between cabinets and external equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power and earth cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power cables for ve earth cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power cables for +ve earth cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the main power source . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Factory installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing BBBX modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RXU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the NVM board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the NVM board in a BSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the NVM board in an RXCDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NVM board installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the control signal cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inter-cabinet fibre optic connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1/T1 line connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . End user I/O device cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX connector details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv

24 24 24 24 25 25 25 26 26 26 26 27 28 28 29 29 210 211 212 213 213 213 214 214 214 215 215 216 216 216 217 217 217 218 218 218 219 219 220 221 222 222 222 222 223 224 225 225 225 225 226 226 227
29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

T43 to backplane connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS0 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS1 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS2 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS3 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS0 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS1 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS2 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS3 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIB to backplane connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS0 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS1 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS2 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS3 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS0 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS1 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS2 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS3 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

228 228 228 229 229 230 230 231 231 232 233 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241

Chapter 3 Decommissioning the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lifting cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Decommissioning a BSSC cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
31 31 31 31 32 32 32 32 34

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

vi

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

Chapter 1

Site preparation

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

ii

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

Chapter 1 Site preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool kits for installing GSM cellular equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool kit one . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool kit two . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site requirements and considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structural requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive earth BSSC cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Negative earth BSSC cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back up power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overcurrent protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handling optical fibres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protection of fibres and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning of fibres and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fibre connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum bend radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visiting the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before the visit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arriving at the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leaving the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rubbish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rural sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety on site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
11 11 11 11 12 12 12 14 15 15 15 15 15 15 16 17 17 17 17 17 17 18 18 18 18 18 19 110 110 110 110 111 111 111 112

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

iii

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

iv

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

Overview

Overview
Introduction
This manual contains installation and configuration procedures for Motorola BSSC and BSSC2 equipment cabinets, used as a BSC or RXCDR.

WARNING
Hazardous voltages in excess of 50 V dc exist inside 48 V and 60 V cabinets. Use extreme caution when working on a cabinet with power applied. Remove all rings, watches and other jewellery.

Torque values
Table 1-1 lists the torque values to be used when tightening corresponding bolts. Table 1-1 Bolt torque values Size Nm M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 5.4 8.2 14.8 34 66 126 Torque lbf 4 6 11 22 49 93

In this chapter
Read this chapter before beginning the installation. It covers installation tool kits, site requirements, power requirements, optical fibre handling precautions, site visits and cabinet labelling.

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

11

GMR-04

Tool kits for installing GSM cellular equipment

GSM-100-433

Tool kits for installing GSM cellular equipment

Introduction
Two tool kits are recommended for use when installing GSM cellular sites. Cellular tool kit number one is for installation, and number two is for commissioning. Equipment required for optimization is listed in Chapter 3.

Tool kit one

Table 1-2 lists the contents of cellular tool kit number one. Table 1-2 Tool kit number one contents Quantity
1 pair 1 1 1 pair 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 each 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 1 10

Description Safety goggles Hard hat Dust mask Ear defenders Antistatic wrist strap with coiled lead Antistatic mat Torch 5-Tray cantilever tool box (22 in) Padlock to fit cantilever tool box Zipped tool case Socket set (A/F/Metric 1/2 in drive) 10 in adjustable spanner 8 in adjustable spanner Combination spanners A/F: 1/4 in, 5/16 in, 3/8 in, 7/16 in, 1/2 in, 9/16 in, 5/8 in, 11/16 in, 7/8 in and 1 in 3/4 in Ratchet spanner (9/16 in x 1/2 in) Torque wrench (10-150 ft/lb) Torx driver set (T10 to T30) Allen key set A/F Claw hammer Pipe cutter Cone cutter (up to 1 in) Cone cutter (up to 2 in) Junior hacksaw Replacement blades for junior hacksaw 300 mm hacksaw Replacement blades for 300 mm hacksaw
29 Aug 1997

12

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

Tool kits for installing GSM cellular equipment

Quantity
1 pair 1 pair 1 pair 1 pair 1 1 pair 1 pair 1 pair 1 each 1 each 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Description 6 in side cutters 6 in heavy-duty side cutters Wire cutters Cable shears Knife with retractable blade 8 in combination pliers General purpose pliers Snipe nose pliers Screwdrivers 0pt, 1pt and 2pt Screwdrivers 4 in, 6 in and 8 in Set of jewellers screwdrivers Screwdriver set (including flat and cross-head blades) Transpower 110 V (twin outlet) Kango 501 110 V M20 drill bit to fit Kango 501 Pistol drill P221 115V 24-piece drill bit set 1/16 in to 1/2 in 110 V plugs 6 m 240 V extension cable (twin outlet) Soldering iron Soldering iron stand Hand crimp tool Crimp tool for type 43 connectors BNC crimp tool with inserts Telephone plug crimp tool 50 mm crimp tool Cable tie gun 4 ft wooden step ladder Table vice 10 in vice grips 7.5 m tape measure 12 in steel rule Spirit level (3 ft) Centre punch Pocket scriber 10 in half round file

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

13

GMR-04

Tool kits for installing GSM cellular equipment

GSM-100-433

Tool kit two

Table 1-3 lists the contents of cellular tool kit number two. Table 1-3 Tool kit number two contents Quantity
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 pair 1 pair 1 pair 1 pair 1 pair 1 pair 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Description Antistatic wrist strap with coiled lead Antistatic mat Marker pen Zipped tool pack case Large sectioned storage box Torx driver set including sizes T10 to T30 Flush cut wire cutters Light duty cable cutters Industrial scissors GP serrated jaw pliers Snipe nose pliers Straight point tweezers Screw/nut driver set Screw gripping driver Null modem RS232 mini tester Soldering iron (dual temperature) with holder Cable tie gun M to M gender changer Co-ax cable stripper for 2002 (75 ohm coaxial cable)

14

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

Site requirements and considerations

Site requirements and considerations

Introduction
The base site must meet the following criteria.

Structural requirements
There must be: Clearance of at least 775 mm (30.5 in) in front of the equipment for operation and maintenance purposes. An overhead cable trough, mounted at least 150 mm (6 in) above the top of the tallest cabinet.

Cabinet dimensions
BSSC and BSSC2 cabinets both have the following dimensions: Height Width Depth (with door) Depth (without door) 2096 mm 711 mm 416 mm 400 mm

Operating environment
Temperature Humidity Airborne particulate matter 5 _C to +45 _C. 20 % to 80 % non-condensing relative humidity (maximum 0.024 gram of water/m# of dry air). < 5 milligrams/1000 cubic feet of air.

The BSSC cabinet dissipates a maximum of 3100 watts when fully equipped.

Storage environment
Temperature Humidity 45 _C to +70 _C . 10 % to 90 % non-condensing relative humidity

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

15

GMR-04

Site requirements and considerations

GSM-100-433

Diagram
Figure 1-1 shows the cabinet dimensions and mounting foot details:

Figure 1-1 Cabinet dimensions and mounting foot details

16

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

Power requirements

Power requirements
Introduction
BSSC cabinets can operate from either positive or negative earth supplies (requested by the customer and configured at initial installation) at various voltages.

Positive earth BSSC cabinets

Positive earth BSSC cabinets operate from a 48 V or 60 V dc supply. The maximum power requirements are: S S (48 V) = 50 A. (60 V) = 40 A.

Negative earth BSSC cabinets

Negative earth BSSC cabinets operate from a nominal +27 V dc (+3 V, 5 V dc) supply. The maximum power requirement is: S (+27 V) = 90 A.

Back up power
BSSC cabinets can be connected to an external battery to provide a dc input power back up for dynamic random access memory (DRAM) devices. The DRAM back up maximum power requirement for each cabinet is: S 4 A (maximum) at +27 V dc.

NOTE
An adequate means of routeing cables from the power source to the equipment, for example a cable trough, must be provided (BS 7671 Reference Method 11).

Overcurrent protection
The cabinet overcurrent protection device can be: S S A fuse conforming to BS88 (IEC 513). A main circuit breaker conforming to BS EN 60898 (IEC 898).

The device must be of the following rating: S S S +27 V cabinets: 100 A. 48 V cabinets: 63 A. 60 V cabinets: 63 A.

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

17

GMR-04

Handling optical fibres

GSM-100-433

Handling optical fibres

Introduction
The section details the precautions necessary for the handling of both glass and polymer optical fibres. Optical fibre cables contain an inner core, which is a strand of polymer or glass, coated by a cladding (sometimes in two layers), and an outer sheath providing mechanical protection. The optical fibre acts as a light waveguide. In order for the link to work correctly light must be propagated with minimal loss from end-to-end of the fibre. A number of causes can prevent this from happening, resulting in the potential for the link to become faulty.

Protection of fibres and connectors

To maintain good light transmission through the optical fibre link it is essential the connector end surfaces and/or bare fibre ends are kept clean at all times. Dust or dirt must not be allowed to contaminate either the ends of the fibres, or enter the emitters or detectors on the circuit board. When an optical fibre is not connected, the protective caps must be fitted at all times to the ends of the fibre and to all unused connectors on the modules.

Cleaning of fibres and connectors

When cleaning of contaminated optical connectors is deemed necessary, all areas must be wiped gently with a lint-free cloth soaked in a suitable cleaning solution. CAUTION Care must be taken to ensure the ends of optical fibres are not damaged in any way.

NOTE Lint free cloth is the preferred medium for cleaning, since the risk of contamination or damage due to the cleaning process is minimal. In extreme circumstances the use of soft clean cotton may be acceptable. The use of cotton buds soaked in cleaning solution is not recommended, since lint is frequently left on the fibre and the connectors may be wet when the cables are inserted into the connectors.

Fibre connection
FibreSMA connectors are used at both ends of the glass fibre optic cables. These should be tightened to handtight only when connecting under no circumstances should any tools, such as pliers or spanners be used to tighten the connectors.
18

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

Handling optical fibres

Minimum bend radius

All optical fibres have a minimum bend radius. This represents the smallest circle that can be formed, without damage, from a loop of fibre, that is how tight it can be coiled, looped or bent. CAUTION Under NO circumstances should fibres be bent tighter than the minimum bend radius The minimum bend radius for the optical fibres used in Motorola BSS equipment cabinets is 30 mm. Refer to Figure 1-2. NOTE Double the bend radius value stated above if the fibre is under tension. As a rule of thumb, the natural bend radius of the fibre can be determined by allowing the fibre to bend under its own weight. This radius will normally be greater than that specified above, and it is recommended that this is not exceeded. If in doubt, check by measuring accurately. If a fibre is bent tighter than the minimum bend radius, two effects are possible: S S Excessive light loss from the outside of the bend. Fibre fracture due to microscopic imperfections caused by bending. Light is scattered and reflected by the fracture. The damage is permanent and is not repaired by straightening the fibre.

Minimum bend radius Fibre optic cable

ig.270.rh

Figure 1-2 Minimum bend radius of 30 mm (at size)

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

19

GMR-04

Visiting the site

GSM-100-433

Visiting the site

Introduction
Follow these instructions when preparing to work at a site and upon arrival.

Before the visit

Before going to the site: Step a. Action Ensure that all team members have adequate test equipment, tools and hardware to carry out their tasks. Check the site folder for any special requirements. Contact the person in charge of the building to advise of the teams estimated time of arrival and the expected duration of their stay on the site. This will usually have been dealt with previously, but it is always advisable to make sure that the information has been passed on. Check with the engineer in charge of the project to see if anything needs to be taken to the site and collect any outstanding work for the site to be visited. Ensure that the team read the site access details on each visit to a site as local regulations may change.

b.

c.

d.

Arriving at the site

When entering any site: Step a. Action Contact the local OMC and MSC to announce the teams arrival, indicate your expected time of departure, and arrange for the 2 Mbit/s links to be checked, before entering the site. Do not enter the site until you have made contact with its OMC or MSC. Enter the site and check for any building alarms, for example intruder alarms, that may have been activated by entry. Disable the Halon gas systems (if fitted) and any entry alarms. Read any local instructions.

b.

c. d.

Occupied sites
In any exchange or occupied building, contact the caretaker or person in charge, who will explain local regulations and may advise on parking, rubbish disposal and catering facilities. Be as polite and helpful as possible; colleagues may well have to go back to the site at a later date.
110

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

Visiting the site

Leaving the site

When leaving a site during the installation or optimization period: Step a. b. c. Action At the end of the working day enable the Halon gas system (if fitted) and any alarm systems disabled on entry. Contact the local OMC or MSC to announce the teams departure. Out of hours, if an alarm is fitted and the local MSC is not staffed, contact the network control centre or OMC and inform them of the teams departure. Sign out of the building as necessary.

d.

NOTE Never leave vehicles parked on site overnight.

Rubbish
At the end of the job, clear all rubbish from the site unless otherwise indicated by the customer. WARNING DO NOT burn rubbish. Packaging can give off toxic gasses.

Rural sites
The senior engineer must: S Ensure that all personnel on site are aware of the country code and the health regulations relating to water authority sites.

All personnel must: S S S S S Guard against all risk of fire. Fasten all gates. Drive carefully on country roads and observe all speed restrictions. Keep to the paths and tracks across farm land. Not leave litter.

Remember that site visits can be traced back if a complaint is made.

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

111

GMR-04

Visiting the site

GSM-100-433

Safety on site
The senior engineer must: S S Advise all staff on site of safety requirements before any work takes place. Ensure that cabinets are safely positioned at all times. WARNING Do not move a cabinet without assistance. Cabinets must be safely positioned at all times. All personnel must: S S S S S Wear the safety helmets supplied when antenna or overhead work is in progress, and when local regulations require them. Wear the safety goggles, ear protectors and dust masks supplied when drilling. This is particularly important when drilling overhead ironwork. Wear approved safety footwear when moving heavy equipment. Stop work if any person in the team is not properly protected. Cut cable tie tails to remove sharp edges.

112

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

Chapter 2

Installing the equipment

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

ii

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

Chapter 2 Installing the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lifting cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transient/ lightning protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optical fibres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shipping crate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anchoring the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the cabinet air deflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing to connect dc power and earth cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC2 interconnect panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Negative earth BSSC interconnect panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive earth BSSC interconnect panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting dc power cables between cabinets and external equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power and earth cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power cables for ve earth cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power cables for +ve earth cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the main power source . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Factory installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing BBBX modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RXU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
21 21 21 21 21 21 22 22 22 23 23 23 24 24 24 24 25 25 25 26 26 26 26 27 28 28 29 29 210 211 212 213 213 213 214 214 214 215 215 216 216 216 217 217 217 218 218 218 219 219 220 221

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

iii

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

Installing the NVM board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the NVM board in a BSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the NVM board in an RXCDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NVM board installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the control signal cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inter-cabinet fibre optic connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1/T1 line connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . End user I/O device cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX connector details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T43 to backplane connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS0 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS1 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS2 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS3 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS0 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS1 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS2 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS3 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIB to backplane connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS0 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS1 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS2 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS3 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS0 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS1 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS2 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS3 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

222 222 222 222 223 224 225 225 225 225 226 226 227 228 228 228 229 229 230 230 231 231 232 233 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241

iv

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

Overview

Overview
Introduction
Follow the procedures and guidelines in this chapter to install BSS equipment cabinets and their internal and external interfaces. To install equipment not supplied by Motorola, for example battery chargers and power supplies, refer to the site specific documentation and the vendor instructions. WARNING Hazardous voltages in excess of 50 V dc exist inside 48 V and 60 V cabinets. Extreme caution must be used when working on a cabinet with power applied. Remove all rings, watches and other jewellery.

In this chapter
Installation consists of the following steps, all of which are described in this chapter: S S S S S S S Unpacking the equipment and inspecting for visible damage. Positioning and securing the cabinets as shown on the floor plan. Earthing the cabinets. Connecting dc power to the cabinets. Inserting modules into the cabinets. Connecting external equipment cabling such as transmit and receive antenna cables and E1/T1 lines. Connecting the inter-cabinet fibre optic cables.

Before starting
Before starting an installation, prepare the site as described in chapter 1 of this category and in the site specific documentation.

Cabinet types
This chapter describes the installation procedure for BSSC cabinets. The procedure is the same for all cabinets except where otherwise indicated.

Delivery
Before the the BSSC equipment is delivered, designate an area of the site where the heavy freight and/or moving company can unload the equipment. The equipment must be carefully delivered to the site with the dollies and padding required to move it from the unloading area to the installation point.

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

21

GMR-04

Overview

GSM-100-433

Packaging
The cabinets are shipped in wooden crates. Cabinets are shipped with the following items already installed: S S S S S S S Cabinet interconnect panel. DC power distribution and alarm interface equipment. Module mounting shelves. Cooling fan assemblies. All intra-cabinet cabling. Digital modules. Power supply modules (PSMs).

The following items are shipped in separate cartons:

Lifting cabinets
WARNING An unequipped BSSC cabinet can weigh up to 136 kg (300 lb). Handle cabinets with extreme caution to avoid tipping. BSSC cabinets are fitted with four lifting points, designed to accommodate M12 eyebolts, built in to the top panels. These lifting points are fitted with plastic inserts to protect the threads. Motorola kit number SWLN4648A contains four M12 eyebolts manufactured to C.E. conformity, each with a safe weight load of 400 kg and individually numbered. Only eyebolts supplied in this kit must be used. Before attempting to insert the eyebolts, visually check each one for any damage that may have occurred in transit. If any damage is apparent, DO NOT USE; contact Motorola for replacement. 1. 2. Carefully remove the plastic insert from the M12 threaded lifting point. Insert the eyebolt into the thread, ensuring that no cross-threading occurs. WARNING The eyebolts must not be overtightened; hand tight is sufficient. Screw the eyebolt fully into the lifting point so that no thread is left exposed. 3. 4. Repeat the procedure until all four eyebolts have been correctly fitted. When the lifting operation is complete, remove the eyebolts and refit the plastic inserts.

For continued use of eyebolts, there may be local regulations that govern the use of lifting equipment and stipulate a test and/or examination regime. If the eyebolts are to be used, ensure that all such regulations are met.

Site earthing
This manual summarizes general procedures. For detailed earthing information, refer to Grounding Guidelines For Cellular Radio Installations (68P81150E62). The cell site equipment must be earthed at the same common earth point as its power source. Provision must be made for routeing earthing lines into the site and to the cabinet before installing the system cabinets. An earthing terminal (stud) is located on the interconnect panel on top of each cabinet. Each cabinet must be earthed separately (not daisy chained). For detailed site earthing information, refer to the site specific documentation.
22

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

Overview

Transient/ lightning protection

E1/T1 lines connected to Motorola equipment have secondary transient protection as part of the balanced-line interconnect board (BIB) or T43 board. The receive and transmit antenna connections to the building must be fed through coaxial electromagnetic protection (EMP) devices.

Torque values
Table 2-1 lists the torque values to be used when tightening corresponding bolts. Table 2-1 Bolt torque values Size Nm M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 5.4 8.2 14.8 34 66 126 Torque lbf 4 6 11 22 49 93

Optical fibres
Refer to Handling optical fibres in chapter 1 before installing fibre optic cables.

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

23

GMR-04

Unpacking the equipment

GSM-100-433

Unpacking the equipment

Introduction
Carry out the following procedure with reference to the diagram on the next page.

Procedure
To unpack a cabinet from its shipping crate: 1. 2. Cut the plastic banding used to secure the wooden crate. Put the banding in a place where it will not be lost. Remove the eight metal clips that secure the lid of the crate using a claw hammer or a similar levering device. Put the clips in a place where they will not be lost or damaged. Lift the lid free of the crate. Place the lid where it will not be damaged. Remove the 12 metal clips that secure the sides of the crate using a claw hammer. Put the clips in a place where they will not be lost or damaged. Lift the sides free of the crate. Place the sides where they will not be damaged. CAUTION Take care not to scratch or otherwise damage the cabinet. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Carefully cut open the sealed barrier bag containing the cabinet. Lift or slide the cabinet off the base of the crate. Remove the desiccant bag from the cabinet. Put all the clips in a bag and tie them together with the banding, desiccant bag, barrier bag and the lid, sides and base of the cabinet. Return the dismantled crate as advised by the in-country project manager. Immediately after unpacking the equipment, inspect it for damage and report the extent of any damage to the transport company.

3. 4. 5.

Shipping crate
Figure 2-1 shows a cabinet shipping crate.

METAL CLIP

LID

SIDE

SIDE

SIDE

BASE

SIDE

ig.271.rh

Figure 2-1 Cabinet shipping crate

24

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

Anchoring the cabinet

Anchoring the cabinet

Introduction
Mounting procedures must conform to local building codes and regulations. Consult the site authorities before beginning an installation.

Procedure
To secure a cabinet to the floor: 1. 2. Open the cabinet door. For access to the bottom of the cabinet, remove the lower fan housing/air baffle assembly (below the BSU shelf) by removing the four screws that secure it to the cabinet frame; retain the screws for reassembly. Carefully place the cabinet at its anchoring point as shown in the site plan. CAUTION Ensure that cabinets are electrically insulated from each other. Cabinets can be secured to adjacent cabinets or support structure using insulating bolts. 4. Use the mounting foot of the cabinet as a template to mark the location of the four mounting holes. All four anchoring positions must be used. WARNING Wear safety glasses while drilling holes.

3.

CAUTION Cement dust from drilling concrete flooring is harmful to equipment and wiring. Make sure that the cabinet and any nearby equipment are protected. Use a tarpaulin, cloth, or plastic sheeting to cover exposed equipment. Carefully clean up any accumulated debris from the anchor installation before exposing the equipment. 5. 6. Move the cabinet away from the installation point. Drill holes for concrete mounting anchors and fit them (Motorola suggests the RAWLNUT 1275). Move the cabinet back to the installation point. Place an insulating shoulder washer and then a flat washer onto each bolt. Loosely secure each cabinet to the anchors using the bolts with washers (Motorola suggests M12 x 100 bolts for use with the RAWLNUT 1275 anchors). Tighten the bolts, ensuring that the cabinet remains vertical and level. Replace the lower fan housing/air baffle assembly removed in step 2.

7. 8.

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

25

GMR-04

Installing the cabinet air deflector

GSM-100-433

Installing the cabinet air deflector

Introduction
The SHN4757 air deflector unit is supplied with each cabinet. Installation is recommended, but is left to the customers discretion. The air deflector mounts on the cabinet door in front of the upper exhaust vent, which is approximately at the height of a persons eye when standing in front of the cabinet. It directs the airflow upwards without adversely affecting cabinet equipment cooling.

BSSC2
The unit comprises a deflector and four mounting screws.

Temporary installation
1. Clip the air deflector on to the cabinet door upper exhaust vent.

Permanent installation
1. 2. 3. Remove the protective caps from the four pre-drilled holes in the door around the upper exhaust vent. Clip the air deflector on to the cabinet door upper exhaust vent. Secure the air deflector to the door using four M5 screws.

BSSC
The unit comprises a deflector and three mounting screws.

Temporary installation
1. Clip the air deflector on to the cabinet door upper exhaust vent.

Permanent installation
1. 2. 3. 4. Clip the air deflector on to the cabinet door upper exhaust vent. Using the pre-drilled holes in the bottom flange of the deflector, mark the locations for screw mounting holes on the door. Remove the air deflector. Open the door and cover the internal units. WARNING Wear safety glasses while drilling holes. CAUTION Ensure that the interior of the cabinet is protected from possible swarf ingestion. 5.
26

Drill three 3.5 mm diameter holes through the door. Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O
29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

Installing the cabinet air deflector

6. 7.

Repeat step 1. Secure the air deflector to the door using three M4 x 8 self tapping screws.

Diagram
Figure 2-2 shows the air deflector mounted on a BSSC cabinet:

EXHAUST VENT

DRILL THREE 3.5 mm HOLES (OPTIONAL)

AIR DEFLECTOR

M4 X 3 TAPPING CLIPS (2 EACH END)

ig.272.rh

Figure 2-2 BSSC cabinet air deflector mounting points

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

27

GMR-04

Preparing to connect dc power and earth cables

GSM-100-433

Preparing to connect dc power and earth cables

Introduction
WARNING The external converter used to supply the cabinet must have double or reinforced insulation between its primary and secondary circuits and must also conform to safety standard EN60 950. Do not make dc input power connections at the main dc power source at this point in the procedure.

CAUTION To protect unused connectors on the cabinet interconnect panel from damage by static electricity or foreign matter, ensure that the covers supplied are fitted.

CAUTION Before connecting input dc power cables to the main dc power source, perform any adjustment procedures on the main power supply equipment recommended by the manufacturer. Input to the cabinet, under all load conditions, must remain between 22 V and 30 V dc for nominal +27 V dc operation and between 40 V and 75 V dc for 48/60 V dc operation. The dc power distribution system within each cabinet, including all internal power cabling and fuses, is factory assembled and tested. The power requirements for the cabinets are listed in Chapter 1. The power input and earth connectors are secured with M10 nuts. Adequate means, for example a cable trough, must be provided for routeing cables from the main power source to the cabinet.

28

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

Preparing to connect dc power and earth cables

PAB
Configure the power alarm board (PAB) jumpers JU1 to JU3 for the power supply polarity and the external +27 V backup supply as shown below:

JU1, set for negative earth (+27 Vdc) supply (JU1 pins 2, 3) NEG 1 JU1, set for positive earth (48/60 Vdc) supply (JU1 pins 1, 2) NEG 1 JU2 and JU3 set to external supply (JU2 pins 2, 3)
INT 1

POS JU1 POS JU1

JU2 EXT 1 JU3

(JU3 pins 2,3)

DAB
Configure the distribution alarm board (DAB) switches S1 and S2 for the cabinet equipment configuration. Each switch comprises eight switches in a line. Table 2-2 lists the alarms that the switches S1 and S2 enable. Table 2-2 S1 and S2 enabled alarms Label VSWR1 (Sector 1) VSWR2 (Sector 2) VSWR3 (Sector 3) Spare BB O/P2 BB O/P1 BB I/P2 BB I/P1 DRCU5 DRCU2 DRCU4 DRCU1 DRCU3 DRCU0 Spare BBB ID Switch S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Backup battery fitted BBBX lower shelf output BBBX upper shelf output BBBX lower shelf input BBBX upper shelf input Power to DRCU5 Power to DRCU2 Power to DRCU4 Power to DRCU1 Power to DRCU3 Power to DRCU0 Circuit monitored Power to VSWR1 monitor Power to VSWR2 monitor Power to VSWR3 monitor On/Off As required As required As required OFF ON ON ON ON ON if fitted ON if fitted ON if fitted ON if fitted ON if fitted ON if fitted OFF ON if fitted

NOTE The battery backup input and output alarms (switch S1 positions 5 to 8) are enabled when the switch is set to OFF.

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29

GMR-04

Preparing to connect dc power and earth cables

GSM-100-433

BSSC2 interconnect panel

Figure 2-3 shows the BSSC2 interconnect panel.
FIBRE OPTIC CABLES FEED THROUGH TUBE

GKO BATTERY BACKUP EARTH STUD PIX 1 V IN 48/60 V dc or +27 V dc 0V

PIX 0

Figure 2-3 BSSC2 interconnect panel

Table 2-3 lists the BSSC2 interconnect panel connectors. Table 2-3 BSSC2 interconnect panel connectors Connector 20 to 75 V dc battery backup MS0 to MS3 Function DRAM backup battery Internal destination PAB connector PC6 External destination 20 to 75 V dc backup battery E1/T1 line source or termination equipment (via a T43 or BIB) E1/T1 line source or termination equipment (via a T43 or BIB) End user alarm equipment

MSI ports (maximum six E1/T1 per connector six Tx and six Rx) MSI ports (maximum six E1/T1 per connector six Tx and six Rx) End user alarm input/output ports Not used in this configuration

Corresponding MS connector on lower BSU/RXU backplane Corresponding MS connector on upper BSU/RXU backplane Edge connector of PIX modules GKO connector on lower BSU backplane

MS4 to MS7

PIX0 and PIX1 GKO

210

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

Preparing to connect dc power and earth cables

Negative earth BSSC interconnect panel

Figure 2-4 shows the negative earth BSSC interconnect panel.
FIBRE OPTIC CABLES FEEDTHROUGH TUBE EARTH STUD

GK0 PIX 1 PIX 0 +27 V BATTERY BACKUP +27 V

Figure 2-4 BSSC interconnect panel (negative earth) Table 2-4 lists the negative earth BSSC interconnect panel connectors. Table 2-4 BSSC interconnect panel connectors (negative earth) Connector +27 V dc battery backup MS0 to MS3 Function DRAM backup battery Internal destination PAB connector PC6 External destination +27 V dc backup battery E1/T1 line source or termination equipment (via a T43 or BIB) E1/T1 line source or termination equipment (via a T43 or BIB)

MSI ports (maximum six E1/T1 per connector six Tx and six Rx) MSI ports (maximum six E1/T1 per connector six Tx and six Rx) Not used End user alarm input/output ports

Corresponding MS connector on lower BSU/RXU backplane Corresponding MS connector on upper BSU/RXU backplane

MS4 to MS7

GK0 PIX0 and PIX1

Edge connector of PIX modules

End user alarm equipment

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

211

GMR-04

Preparing to connect dc power and earth cables

GSM-100-433

Positive earth BSSC interconnect panel

Figure 2-5 shows the positive earth BSSC interconnect panel.
FIBRE OPTIC CABLES FEED THROUGH TUBE

GKO X21-0 X21-1 BATTERY BACKUP EARTH STUD PIX 1 V IN PIX 0 48/60 V dc 0V

Figure 2-5 BSSC intreconnect panel (positive earth) Table 2-5 lists the positive earth BSSC interconnect panel connectors. Table 2-5 BSSC interconnect panel connectors (positive earth) Connector +27 V dc battery backup MS0 to MS3 Function DRAM backup battery Internal destination PAB connector PC6 External destination +27 V dc backup battery E1/T1 line source or termination equipment (via a T43 or BIB) E1/T1 line source or termination equipment (via a T43 or BIB) End user alarm equipment

MSI ports (maximum six E1/T1 per connector six Tx and six Rx) MSI ports (maximum six E1/T1 per connector six Tx and six Rx) End user alarm input/output ports Not used in this configuration Not used in this configuration

Corresponding MS connector on lower BSU/RXU backplane Corresponding MS connector on upper BSU/RXU backplane Edge connector of PIX modules GKO connector on lower BSU backplane

MS4 to MS7

PIX0 and PIX1 GKO X21-0 and X21-1

212

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

Connecting dc power cables between cabinets and external equipment

Connecting dc power cables between cabinets and external equipment

Introduction
CAUTION Protect unused connectors on the cabinet interconnect panel from damage by static electricity or foreign matter by ensuring that the covers supplied are fitted. The procedure below describes how to install dc power cabling from the cabinet to the DRAM battery back up equipment. NOTE All cables and connectors must be supplied by the end user.

Procedure
1. For BSSC2 cabinets, construct the required cables with reference to Table 2-6. Table 2-6 DRAM battery back up cable requirements Cable Cable type Connector: cabinet end Type DRAM back up battery Shielded twisted pair (red/black) 1mm2 9 way female shielded D type Pin function 1 (upper cage) and 2 (lower cage): Battery ve (black) 7 (lower cage) and 6 (upper cage) : Battery +ve (red) Connector: external end Type Pin function

End users End users choice choice

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Connect the cable shield to the connector shell at the cabinet end. Make sure that no cable has short or open circuit conductors. Locate the connector(s) on the top of the cabinet interconnect panel. Connect the cabinet end of the cable to the cabinet mating connector. Connect the other end of the cable to the external equipment mating connector.

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

213

GMR-04

Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the cabinet

GSM-100-433

Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the cabinet

Introduction
The location and details of the BSSC cabinet input power terminals and the earth stud are shown in the diagrams and tables in Preparing to connect dc power and earth cables. earlier in this chapter.

Power and earth cables

CAUTION Earth each cabinet using the earth stud on the interconnect panel on the top of the cabinet. Each cabinet must be individually connected to the master earth bar (MEB). Do not daisy chain cabinet earths. The maximum cable lengths for BSSC(2) cabinets must observe the following rules: S S S S S S If the required length falls between two values of cross sectional area (CSA), round up to the next biggest cable. The earth cable must be the same size as the power cable. The cabinet overcurrent protection device must be a BS88 (IEC 513) fuse or a BS EN 60898 (IEC 898) main circuit breaker. Maximum ambient temperature +50 _C. Cables must be routed parallel and touching each other on a perforated tray (BS7671 method 11). The maximum length given is based on a 4% voltage drop at nominal voltage (BS7671 section 5250102).

Table 2-7 lists the maximum BSSC(2) cabinet cable lengths. Table 2-7 BSSC(2) cabinet cable lengths CSA (mm2) Maximum cable length (m) +27 V cabinet 16 25 35 50 70 95 120 16.1 21.7 32.0 43.8 56.0 48 V cabinet 21.6 30.3 40.7 60.1 82.3 105.2 60 V cabinet 27.0 37.8 50.9 75.1 102.9 131.5
29 Aug 1997

214

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the cabinet

Power cables for ve earth cabinets

Use the correct cable specified in the previous tables for the dc input power cable from the main dc power source. WARNING Do not make dc input power connections at the main dc power source at this point in the procedure. The positive cable must be red and the negative cable must be black. The black cable is at earth potential. To connect dc power cables to a negative earth cabinet: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Ensure that the main power source output is switched off. Connect the earth from the MEB to the earth stud on top of the cabinet. Connect the red positive dc power cable from the main dc power source to the cabinet dc power connector assembly terminal marked VIN. Connect the black negative dc power cable from the main dc power source to the cabinet dc power connector assembly terminal marked 0 V. Tighten the dc power and earth terminal set screws (M10).

Power cables for +ve earth cabinets

Use the correct cable specified in the tables for the dc input power cable from the main dc power source. WARNING Do not make dc input power connections at the main dc power source at this point in the procedure. The negative power cable must be blue and the positive cable must be black. The black cable is at earth potential. To connect dc power cables to a positive earth cabinet: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Ensure that the main power source output is switched off. Connect the earth from the master earth bar to the earth stud on top of the cabinet. Connect the blue negative () dc power cable from the main dc power source to the cabinet dc power connector assembly terminal marked VIN. Connect the black positive (+) dc power cable from the main dc power source to the cabinet dc power connector assembly terminal marked 0V. Tighten the dc power and earth terminal set screws (M10).

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

215

GMR-04

Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the main power source

GSM-100-433

Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the main power source
Safety
WARNING Do not wear an antistatic wrist strap when servicing the power supplies or power distribution cabling. Serious personal injury can result. The external converter used to supply the cabinet must have double or reinforced insulation between its primary and secondary circuits and must also conform to safety standard EN60 950.

Procedure
To connect the dc power cables to the main power source: CAUTION Before connecting input dc power cables to the main dc power source, perform any adjustment procedures on the main power supply equipment recommended by the manufacturer. Input to the cabinet, under all load conditions, must remain between 22 V and 30 V dc for nominal +27 V dc operation and between 40 V and 75 V dc for 48/60 V dc operation. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Ensure that all main dc power source output switches are switched off. Ensure that all circuit breakers in the cabinet are switched off. Use a digital voltmeter to ensure that power is not present. Connect the positive lead of the input dc power cable to the positive terminal of the main dc power supply. Connect the negative lead of the input dc power cable to the negative terminal of the main dc power supply. WARNING Ensure that all power connections are secure. 6. Do not apply power to the cabinet at this point in the procedure.

216

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

Installing power supply modules

Installing power supply modules

Introduction
The following types of power supply modules (PSMs) are fitted: S S S BSSC: Digital power supply module (DPSM). ve earth BSSC2: Enhanced power supply module (EPSM). +ve earth BSSC2: Integrated power supply module (IPSM).

Before installing power supply modules, refer to the site specific documentation to determine the following: S S The number of power supply modules to be installed. The positions in which the power supply modules are to be installed.

Procedure
To install the power supply modules: 1. Locate and unpack the power supply modules. CAUTION Switch the appropriate circuit breakers OFF to ensure that the supply to the PSMs is isolated.

CAUTION Refer to the label on the power supply module to ensure that the correct module is fitted for the input power (48V, 60V or +27V) used. 2. If the cabinet is delivered with the digital modules already installed, two transportation panel fillers are fitted to the digital shelf to prevent the modules from falling out of the shelf in transit. Remove these by releasing the clips at the top and bottom, and replace them with blanking plates, before proceeding. Mount each power supply module (and power converter if fitted) in the BSU/RXU shelf assembly according to the configuration information in the site specific documentation. Pull each PSM forward by about 25 mm (1 in) to unseat it.

3.

4.

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

217

GMR-04

Installing digital modules

GSM-100-433

Installing digital modules

Introduction
WARNING Do not look directly into a fibre optic cable or data in/out connector with or without the use of optical aids. Laser radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.

CAUTION BSSC cabinets use circuitry that is sensitive to static discharge. Avoid handling the modules in a high-static environment. Do not touch connector contacts. Wear an earthed high-impedance wrist strap when handling modules.

NOTE Bus terminator cards (BTCs) are fitted in all BSU/RXU shelves at the factory. The BTC ejectors have a protective plastic cover over the ejector tabs, which is held in place by a crosshead screw. The plastic cover must be removed before installing or replacing a BTC module. Before installing digital modules, refer to the site specific documentation to determine the following: S S The number of digital modules to be installed. The positions in which the digital modules are to be installed.

Factory installation
Some cabinets are delivered with all digital modules already installed. If this is the case, perform only those steps in the procedure that relate to cabling. If a digital module is found to be unserviceable, return it to Motorola in the container provided in the PCB transportation boxes kit (SWBN4831A).

218

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

Installing digital modules

Installing BBBX modules

The battery back up board (BBBX) module has no backplane connections, and can therefore be installed in any available slot, provided that the associated cables can reach it. The cables are factory installed in the cabinet, but must be connected to the BBBX module on site. Table 2-8 details the BBBX cabinet cabling. Table 2-8 BBBX cable connectors BBBX connector Input Type 9-way male D-type Pin 1 4 5 6 7 9 Output 4-way 1 4 NOTE Pins not listed are not used. Function Input return Input good signal Output good signal Input voltage Earth Signal return (0 V digital) 0V +5 V Connector AI2 on backplane Connects to DAB

Procedure
CAUTION Refer to Handling optical fibres in chapter 1 before connecting fibre optic cables. To install the digital modules: 1. Locate and unpack the full-size and half-size digital modules. Place the modules on an antistatic bench mat. If an antistatic bench mat is not available place each module on the antistatic bag from which it was removed. Locate a PIX module. If no PIX module is present go to step 6. Locate the PIX interconnect cables that are tie-wrapped to the BSU/RXU shelf. If one PIX module is present, cut the tie-wrap for the cable labelled PIX0. If two PIX modules are present, cut the tie-wraps for both cables (labelled PIX0 and PIX1). Insert the first PIX module into slot 16, ensuring that the module is firmly seated in the backplane connector. Insert the second PIX module (if present) into slot 15, making sure that the module is firmly seated in the backplane connector. Connect the cable PIX0 to the PIX module in slot number 16 and tighten the two captive screws to secure the cable to the PIX module. Connect the cable PIX1 to the PIX module in slot 15 (if present) and tighten the two captive screws to secure the cable to the PIX module.

2. 3.

4.

5.

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

219

GMR-04

Installing digital modules

GSM-100-433

6.

Insert the remaining modules in the BSU/RXU shelf assembly according to the configuration information in the site specific documentation and the diagrams on the next two pages. Make sure that the switch on the front of each digital module is set to the down (disabled) position. Using a non-permanent marker, note the module arrangement used for this BSU shelf on the label affixed to the inside of the cabinet door.

7. 8.

BSU shelf
Figure 2-6 shows the BSU shelf module arrangement. NOTE DRI and DRX modules are not used in a BSSC cabinet. XCDR modules may be replaced by an enhanced transcoder, GDP/GDP2. The GDP is compatible only with GSR3 or later software releases. The GDP2 is compatible only with GSR7 or later software releases.

Figure 2-6 BSU shelf

220

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

Installing digital modules

RXU shelf
Figure 2-7 shows the RXU shelf module arrangement. NOTE XCDR modules may be replaced by an enhanced transcoder, GDP/GDP2. The GDP is compatible only with GSR3 or later software releases. The GDP2 is compatible only with GSR7 or later software releases.

Figure 2-7 RXU shelf

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

221

GMR-04

Installing the NVM board

GSM-100-433

Installing the NVM board

Introduction
This section provides the information required to install the NVM board in either a BSC or an RXCDR site.

Installation options
The installation options for the NVM board are as follows: S S Installation in the BSU cage 0 in a BSC. Installation in the RXU cage 0 in an RXCDR.

Installation procedures for both of these options are described in the following pages.

Installing the NVM board in a BSC

The NVM board must be installed in slot 26 (SPARE) in the BSU cage 0 (master) of the BSC. Figure 2-8 shows the location of slot 26 in the BSU cage.

LOCATION OF SLOT 26

Figure 2-8 Location of slot 26 in the BSU cage

222

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

Installing the NVM board

Installing the NVM board in an RXCDR

The NVM board must be installed in slot 24 (XCDR 0) in the RXU cage 0 (master) of the RXCDR. Figure 2-9 shows the location of slot 24 in the RXU cage. NOTE An XCDR will be lost if all the XCDR slots are used. However, if slot 24 (XCDR 0) is currently being used and there is another spare XCDR slot, the XCDR board and associated interface cabling can be moved from slot 24 to the spare slot.

LOCATION OF SLOT 24

Figure 2-9 Location of slot 24 in the RXU cage

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

223

GMR-04

Installing the NVM board

GSM-100-433

NVM board installation procedure

This procedure assumes that the BSC/RXCDR is already initialized. Proceed as follows to install the NVM board in either the BSU or the RXU cage: CAUTION The NVM board contains devices that are sensitive to static. A suitable earth strap must be worn when handling the module. 1. Unclip the protective cover from the appropriate slot. If an XCDR board is already installed in slot 24 in the RXU cage, refer to the note in the previous section Installing the NVM board in an RXCDR. Set the RESET/DISABLE switch on the front panel of the NVM board to the DISABLE position. Insert the NVM board into the slot, ensuring that it locks firmly into the backplane. Move the RESET/DISABLE switch up to the RESET position and release. The red ALARM LED above the RESET/DISABLE switch illuminates to indicate a board reset has occurred. Once the software detects the NVM board, the red LED extinguishes and the green ACTIVE LED illuminates to show that the board is operational. When the software detects the PCMCIA card in slot 1, the green CARD 1 STATUS LED illuminates to show that the PCMCIA card is operational. NOTE The red and green CARD 2 STATUS LEDs are currently not used. The procedure for installing the NVM board is now complete.

2. 3. 4.

224

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

Installing the control signal cabling

Installing the control signal cabling

Introduction
The internal control signal cabling within each BSSC cabinet is factory fitted and tested. This section deals with external connections.

Inter-cabinet fibre optic connections

WARNING Do not look directly into a fibre optic cable or data in/out connector with or without the use of optical aids. Laser radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors. Refer to the site specific documentation for information on the following inter-cabinet fibre optic interconnections: S S BSSC cabinet to BTS cabinet. BSSC cabinet to other BSSC cabinet.

E1/T1 line connections

CAUTION Transient protection of the E1/T1 lines connected to Motorola equipment is the responsibility of the end user. All E1/T1 lines brought in from outside the building must be spark-gap (three-anode gas tube) protected at the building entry point. Where this is not practical, an optional transient-protection board can be purchased from Motorola. Consult Motorola about transient protection for the BSSC sites. E1/T1 line connections are made by one of the following methods: S S 120 ohm twisted pair through a BIB mounted on top of the BSSC cabinet. 75 ohm coaxial cable through a T43 board mounted on top of the BSSC cabinet.

See T43 to backplane connections and BIB to backplane connections at the end of this chapter for the connections between the T43 or BIB and the cabinet backplane.

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

225

GMR-04

Installing the control signal cabling

GSM-100-433

End user I/O device cabling

A maximum of two PIX modules per cabinet allows for a total of eight sets of output control contacts and 16 input sense contacts at the BSSC site.

Relay-closure outputs
CAUTION If connectors PIX0 and/or PIX1 on the cabinet interconnect panel are unused, they should be protected from damage by static electricity or foreign matter by ensuring that the covers supplied are fitted. The PIX module includes four relays controlled by a GPROC. There are both normally open and normally closed contacts for each of the four relays. The contacts are rated for 1A at 30 V and can be used to control external equipment at the site such as fans or audible alarms. The external equipment is connected to the BSSC at the 62-pin D-type connector marked PIX0 or PIX1 on the interconnect panel.

Dry-contact inputs
The PIX module includes eight inputs which can be used to connect external sensors. These inputs cause alarms to be reported at the BSC, which forwards the alarm to the OMC. The external sensors are supplied by the end user. Each sensor is connected across a pair of PIX inputs (SEN Dn and SEN Sn, where n corresponds to a PIX opto-coupler 1 to 8). For correct operation, all sensors must be of the dry-contact type with the following specification: S S 10 kohms or greater across sense inputs is required for a logic 1 (PIX opto-coupler off). 1 kohm or less across sense inputs is required for a logic 0 (PIX opto-coupler on).

These inputs are available at the 62-pin D-type connectors marked PIX0 and PIX1 on the interconnect panel. Ensure that the connector being used is terminated at a PIX module in the cabinet.

PIX connector
Figure 2-10 shows the PIX connector:
(MATING SIDE OF FEMALE CONNECTOR VIEWED FROM TOP OF CABINET)
43 22 1 62 42 21

ig.279.rh

Figure 2-10 PIX connector

226

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

Installing the control signal cabling

PIX connector details

Table 2-9 lists the PIX connector details: Table 2-9 PIX connector details

PIN no.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Function
Sense S7 Sense D7 Not used Sense S5 Sense D5 Not used Sense S3 Sense D3 Not used Sense S1 Sense D1 Not used Not used Common 4 Not used Common 3 Not used Common 2 Not used Common 1 Not used

PIN no.
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42

Function
Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used NO4 Not used NO3 Not used NO2 Not used NO1

PIN no.
43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62

Function
Not used Sense S8 Sense D8 Not used Sense S6 Sense D6 Not used Sense S4 Sense D4 Not used Sense S2 Sense D2 Not used NC4 Not used NC3 Not used NC2 Not used NC1

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

227

GMR-04

T43 to backplane connections

GSM-100-433

T43 to backplane connections

Introduction
The following tables show the mapping between a single backplane and the four associated T43 positions (MS0 to MS3). Equipment containing two card cages will have four T43 positions associated with each cage. Some equipment, for example the BTS, may not equip all four T43 positions. The following mappings are listed: S S S S S S S S MS0 to BSU. MS1 to BSU. MS2 to BSU. MS3 to BSU. MS0 to RXU. MS1 to RXU. MS2 to RXU. MS3 to RXU.

MS0 to BSU
Table 2-10 lists T43 MS0 to BSU backplane card slot mapping: Table 2-10 MS0 to BSU card slot mapping MSI no. 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 Card slot L13 L13 L13 L13 L15 L15 L15 L15 L17 L17 L17 L17 T43 conn. PIN no. J1, Tx J2, Rx J4, Tx J5, Rx J7, Tx J8, Rx J10, Tx J11, Rx J13, Tx J14, Rx J16, Tx J17, Rx

228

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

T43 to backplane connections

MS1 to BSU
Table 2-11 lists T43 MS1 to BSU backplane card slot mapping: Table 2-11 MS1 to BSU card slot mapping MSI no. 5 5 5 5 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 Card slot L12 L12 L12 L12 L14 L14 L14 L14 L16 L16 L16 L16 T43 conn. PIN no. J1, Tx J2, Rx J4, Tx J5, Rx J7, Tx J8, Rx J10, Tx J11, Rx J13, Tx J14, Rx J16, Tx J17, Rx

MS2 to BSU
Table 2-12 lists T43 MS2 to BSU backplane card slot mapping: Table 2-12 MS2 to BSU card slot mapping MSI no. 10 10 10 10 8 8 8 8 6 6 6 6 Card slot L7 L7 L7 L7 L9 L9 L9 L9 L11 L11 L11 L11 T43 conn. PIN no. J1, Tx J2, Rx J4, Tx J5, Rx J7, Tx J8, Rx J10, Tx J11, Rx J13, Tx J14, Rx J16, Tx J17, Rx

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

229

GMR-04

T43 to backplane connections

GSM-100-433

MS3 to BSU
Table 2-13 lists T43 MS3 to BSU backplane card slot mapping: Table 2-13 MS3 to BSU card slot mapping MSI no. 11 11 11 11 9 9 9 9 7 7 7 7 Card slot L6 L6 L6 L6 L8 L8 L8 L8 L10 L10 L10 L10 T43 conn. PIN no. J1, Tx J2, Rx J4, Tx J5, Rx J7, Tx J8, Rx J10, Tx J11, Rx J13, Tx J14, Rx J16, Tx J17, Rx

MS0 to RXU
Table 2-14 lists T43 MS0 to RXU backplane card slot mapping: Table 2-14 MS0 to RXU card slot mapping MSI/XCDR /GDP XCDR 5 XCDR 5 XCDR 4 XCDR 4 XCDR 3 XCDR 3 XCDR 2 XCDR 2 XCDR 1 XCDR 1 XCDR 0 XCDR 0 Card slot L19 L19 L20 L20 L21 L21 L22 L22 L23 L23 L24 L24 T43 conn. PIN no. J1, Tx J2, Rx J4, Tx J5, Rx J7, Tx J8, Rx J10, Tx J11, Rx J13, Tx J14, Rx J16, Tx J17, Rx

230

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

T43 to backplane connections

MS1 to RXU
Table 2-15 lists T43 MS1 to RXU backplane card slot mapping: Table 2-15 MS1 to RXU card slot mapping MSI/XCDR /GDP XCDR 11 XCDR 11 XCDR 10 XCDR 10 XCDR 9 XCDR 9 XCDR 8 XCDR 8 XCDR 7 XCDR 7 XCDR 6 XCDR 6 Card slot L13 L13 L14 L14 L15 L15 L16 L16 L17 L17 L18 L18 T43 conn. PIN no. J1, Tx J2, Rx J4, Tx J5, Rx J7, Tx J8, Rx J10, Tx J11, Rx J13, Tx J14, Rx J16, Tx J17, Rx

MS2 to RXU
Table 2-16 lists T43 MS2 to RXU backplane card slot mapping: Table 2-16 MS2 to RXU card slot mapping MSI/XCDR /GDP XCDR 1 XCDR 1 XCDR 1 XCDR 1 XCDR 0 XCDR 0 XCDR 0 XCDR 0 XCDR 13 XCDR 13 XCDR 12 XCDR 12 Card slot L9 L9 L9 L9 L10 L10 L10 L10 L11 L11 L12 L12 T43 conn. PIN no. J1, Tx J2, Rx J4, Tx J5, Rx J7, Tx J8, Rx J10, Tx J11, Rx J13, Tx J14, Rx J16, Tx J17, Rx

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

231

GMR-04

T43 to backplane connections

GSM-100-433

MS3 to RXU
Table 2-17 lists T43 MS3 to RXU backplane card slot mapping: Table 2-17 MS3 to RXU cardslot mapping MSI/XCDR /GDP XCDR 4 XCDR 4 XCDR 4 XCDR 4 XCDR 3 XCDR 3 XCDR 3 XCDR 3 XCDR 2 XCDR 2 XCDR 2 XCDR 2 Card slot L6 L6 L6 L6 L7 L7 L7 L7 L8 L8 L8 L8 T43 conn. PIN no. J1, Tx J2, Rx J4, Tx J5, Rx J7, Tx J8, Rx J10, Tx J11, Rx J13, Tx J14, Rx J16, Tx J17, Rx

232

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

BIB to backplane connections

BIB to backplane connections

Introduction
The following tables show the mapping between a single backplane and the four associated BIB positions (MS0 to MS3). Equipment containing two card cages will have four BIB positions associated with each cage. The mappings listed are: S S S S S S S S MS0 to BSU. MS1 to BSU. MS2 to BSU. MS3 to BSU. MS0 to RXU. MS1 to RXU. MS2 to RXU. MS3 to RXU.

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

233

GMR-04

BIB to backplane connections

GSM-100-433

MS0 to BSU
Table 2-18 lists the BIB MS0 to BSU backplane card slot mapping: Table 2-18 MS0 to BSU card slot mapping MSI no. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Card slot L13 L13 L13 L13 L13 L13 L13 L13 L15 L15 L15 L15 L15 L15 L15 L15 L17 L17 L17 L17 L17 L17 L17 L17 PCM signal (MSI board) MEGATX+ MEGATX MEGARX+ MEGARX MEGBTX+ MEGBTX MEGBRX+ MEGBRX MEGATX+ MEGATX MEGARX+ MEGARX MEGBTX+ MEGBTX MEGBRX+ MEGBRX MEGATX+ MEGATX MEGARX+ MEGARX MEGBTX+ MEGBTX MEGBRX+ MEGBRX BIB conn. PIN no. J11 J120 J12 J121 J14 J123 J15 J124 J17 J126 J18 J127 J110 J129 J111 J130 J113 J132 J114 J133 J116 J135 J117 J136 Signal (BIB board) EXT_MEGA_RX1+ EXT_MEGA_RX1 EXT_MEGA_TX1+ EXT_MEGA_TX1 EXT_MEGA_RX4+ EXT_MEGA_RX4 EXT_MEGA_TX4+ EXT_MEGA_TX4 EXT_MEGA_RX2+ EXT_MEGA_RX2 EXT_MEGA_TX2+ EXT_MEGA_TX2 EXT_MEGA_RX5+ EXT_MEGA_RX5 EXT_MEGA_TX5+ EXT_MEGA_TX5 EXT_MEGA_RX3+ EXT_MEGA_RX3 EXT_MEGA_TX3+ EXT_MEGA_TX3 EXT_MEGA_RX6+ EXT_MEGA_RX6 EXT_MEGA_TX6+ EXT_MEGA_TX6 BIB no. & MS no. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

234

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

BIB to backplane connections

MS1 to BSU
Table 2-19 lists the BIB MS1 to BSU backplane card slot mapping: Table 2-19 MS1 to BSU card slot mapping MSI no. 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Card slot L12 L12 L12 L12 L12 L12 L12 L12 L14 L14 L14 L14 L14 L14 L14 L14 L16 L16 L16 L16 L16 L16 L16 L16 PCM signal (MSI board) MEGATX+ MEGATX MEGARX+ MEGARX MEGBTX+ MEGBTX MEGBRX+ MEGBRX MEGATX+ MEGATX MEGARX+ MEGARX MEGBTX+ MEGBTX MEGBRX+ MEGBRX MEGATX+ MEGATX MEGARX+ MEGARX MEGBTX+ MEGBTX MEGBRX+ MEGBRX BIB conn. PIN no. J11 J120 J12 J121 J14 J123 J15 J124 J17 J126 J18 J127 J110 J129 J111 J130 J113 J132 J114 J133 J116 J135 J117 J136 Signal (BIB board) EXT_MEGA_RX1+ EXT_MEGA_RX1 EXT_MEGA_TX1+ EXT_MEGA_TX1 EXT_MEGA_RX4+ EXT_MEGA_RX4 EXT_MEGA_TX4+ EXT_MEGA_TX4 EXT_MEGA_RX2+ EXT_MEGA_RX2 EXT_MEGA_TX2+ EXT_MEGA_TX2 EXT_MEGA_RX5+ EXT_MEGA_RX5 EXT_MEGA_TX5+ EXT_MEGA_TX5 EXT_MEGA_RX3+ EXT_MEGA_RX3 EXT_MEGA_TX3+ EXT_MEGA_TX3 EXT_MEGA_RX6+ EXT_MEGA_RX6 EXT_MEGA_TX6+ EXT_MEGA_TX6 BIB no. & MS no. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

235

GMR-04

BIB to backplane connections

GSM-100-433

MS2 to BSU
Table 2-20 lists the BIB MS2 to BSU backplane card slot mapping: Table 2-20 MS2 to BSU card slot mapping MSI no. 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Card slot L7 L7 L7 L7 L7 L7 L7 L7 L9 L9 L9 L9 L9 L9 L9 L9 L11 L11 L11 L11 L11 L11 L11 L11 PCM signal (MSI board) MEGATX+ MEGATX MEGARX+ MEGARX MEGBTX+ MEGBTX MEGBRX+ MEGBRX MEGATX+ MEGATX MEGARX+ MEGARX MEGBTX+ MEGBTX MEGBRX+ MEGBRX MEGATX+ MEGATX MEGARX+ MEGARX MEGBTX+ MEGBTX MEGBRX+ MEGBRX BIB conn. PIN no. J11 J120 J12 J121 J14 J123 J15 J124 J17 J126 J18 J127 J110 J129 J111 J130 J113 J132 J114 J133 J116 J135 J117 J136 Signal (BIB board) EXT_MEGA_RX1+ EXT_MEGA_RX1 EXT_MEGA_TX1+ EXT_MEGA_TX1 EXT_MEGA_RX4+ EXT_MEGA_RX4 EXT_MEGA_TX4+ EXT_MEGA_TX4 EXT_MEGA_RX2+ EXT_MEGA_RX2 EXT_MEGA_TX2+ EXT_MEGA_TX2 EXT_MEGA_RX5+ EXT_MEGA_RX5 EXT_MEGA_TX5+ EXT_MEGA_TX5 EXT_MEGA_RX3+ EXT_MEGA_RX3 EXT_MEGA_TX3+ EXT_MEGA_TX3 EXT_MEGA_RX6+ EXT_MEGA_RX6 EXT_MEGA_TX6+ EXT_MEGA_TX6 BIB no. & MS no. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

236

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

BIB to backplane connections

MS3 to BSU
Table 2-21 lists the BIB MS3 to BSU backplane card slot mapping: Table 2-21 MS3 to BSU card slot mapping MSI no. 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Card slot L6 L6 L6 L6 L6 L6 L6 L6 L8 L8 L8 L8 L8 L8 L8 L8 L10 L10 L10 L10 L10 L10 L10 L10 PCM signal (MSI board) MEGATX+ MEGATX MEGARX+ MEGARX MEGBTX+ MEGBTX MEGBRX+ MEGBRX MEGATX+ MEGATX MEGARX+ MEGARX MEGBTX+ MEGBTX MEGBRX+ MEGBRX MEGATX+ MEGATX MEGARX+ MEGARX MEGBTX+ MEGBTX MEGBRX+ MEGBRX BIB conn. PIN no. J11 J120 J12 J121 J14 J123 J15 J124 J17 J126 J18 J127 J110 J129 J111 J130 J113 J132 J114 J133 J116 J135 J117 J136 Signal (BIB board) EXT_MEGA_RX1+ EXT_MEGA_RX1 EXT_MEGA_TX1+ EXT_MEGA_TX1 EXT_MEGA_RX4+ EXT_MEGA_RX4 EXT_MEGA_TX4+ EXT_MEGA_TX4 EXT_MEGA_RX2+ EXT_MEGA_RX2 EXT_MEGA_TX2+ EXT_MEGA_TX2 EXT_MEGA_RX5+ EXT_MEGA_RX5 EXT_MEGA_TX5+ EXT_MEGA_TX5 EXT_MEGA_RX3+ EXT_MEGA_RX3 EXT_MEGA_TX3+ EXT_MEGA_TX3 EXT_MEGA_RX6+ EXT_MEGA_RX6 EXT_MEGA_TX6+ EXT_MEGA_TX6 BIB no. & MS no. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

237

GMR-04

BIB to backplane connections

GSM-100-433

MS0 to RXU
Table 2-22 lists the BIB MS0 to RXU backplane card slot mapping: Table 2-22 MS0 to RXU card slot mapping MSI/XCDR /GDP XCDR 5 XCDR 5 XCDR 5 XCDR 5 XCDR 4 XCDR 4 XCDR 4 XCDR 4 XCDR 3 XCDR 3 XCDR 3 XCDR 3 XCDR 2 XCDR 2 XCDR 2 XCDR 2 XCDR 1 XCDR 1 XCDR 1 XCDR 1 XCDR 0 XCDR 0 XCDR 0 XCDR 0 Card slot L19 L19 L19 L19 L20 L20 L20 L20 L21 L21 L21 L21 L22 L22 L22 L22 L23 L23 L23 L23 L24 L24 L24 L24 PCM signal (MSI/XCDR board) MEGATX+ MEGATX MEGARX+ MEGARX MEGBTX+ MEGBTX MEGBRX+ MEGBRX MEGATX+ MEGATX MEGARX+ MEGARX MEGBTX+ MEGBTX MEGBRX+ MEGBRX MEGATX+ MEGATX MEGARX+ MEGARX MEGBTX+ MEGBTX MEGBRX+ MEGBRX BIB conn. PIN no. J11 J120 J12 J121 J14 J123 J15 J124 J17 J126 J18 J127 J110 J129 J111 J130 J113 J132 J114 J133 J116 J135 J117 J136 Signal (BIB board) EXT_MEGA_RX1+ EXT_MEGA_RX1 EXT_MEGA_TX1+ EXT_MEGA_TX1 EXT_MEGA_RX4+ EXT_MEGA_RX4 EXT_MEGA_TX4+ EXT_MEGA_TX4 EXT_MEGA_RX2+ EXT_MEGA_RX2 EXT_MEGA_TX2+ EXT_MEGA_TX2 EXT_MEGA_RX5+ EXT_MEGA_RX5 EXT_MEGA_TX5+ EXT_MEGA_TX5 EXT_MEGA_RX3+ EXT_MEGA_RX3 EXT_MEGA_TX3+ EXT_MEGA_TX3 EXT_MEGA_RX6+ EXT_MEGA_RX6 EXT_MEGA_TX6+ EXT_MEGA_TX6 BIB no. & MS no. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

238

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

BIB to backplane connections

MS1 to RXU
Table 2-23 lists the BIB MS1 to RXU backplane card slot mapping: Table 2-23 MS1 to RXU card slot mapping MSI/XCDR /GDP XCDR 11 XCDR 11 XCDR 11 XCDR 11 XCDR 10 XCDR 10 XCDR 10 XCDR 10 XCDR 9 XCDR 9 XCDR 9 XCDR 9 XCDR 8 XCDR 8 XCDR 8 XCDR 8 XCDR 7 XCDR 7 XCDR 7 XCDR 7 XCDR 6 XCDR 6 XCDR 6 XCDR 6 Card slot L13 L13 L13 L13 L14 L14 L14 L14 L15 L15 L15 L15 L16 L16 L16 L16 L17 L17 L17 L17 L18 L18 L18 L18 PCM signal (MSI/XCDR board) MEGATX+ MEGATX MEGARX+ MEGARX MEGBTX+ MEGBTX MEGBRX+ MEGBRX MEGATX+ MEGATX MEGARX+ MEGARX MEGBTX+ MEGBTX MEGBRX+ MEGBRX MEGATX+ MEGATX MEGARX+ MEGARX MEGBTX+ MEGBTX MEGBRX+ MEGBRX BIB conn. PIN no. J11 J120 J12 J121 J14 J123 J15 J124 J17 J126 J18 J127 J110 J129 J111 J130 J113 J132 J114 J133 J116 J135 J117 J136 Signal (BIB board) EXT_MEGA_RX1+ EXT_MEGA_RX1 EXT_MEGA_TX1+ EXT_MEGA_TX1 EXT_MEGA_RX4+ EXT_MEGA_RX4 EXT_MEGA_TX4+ EXT_MEGA_TX4 EXT_MEGA_RX2+ EXT_MEGA_RX2 EXT_MEGA_TX2+ EXT_MEGA_TX2 EXT_MEGA_RX5+ EXT_MEGA_RX5 EXT_MEGA_TX5+ EXT_MEGA_TX5 EXT_MEGA_RX3+ EXT_MEGA_RX3 EXT_MEGA_TX3+ EXT_MEGA_TX3 EXT_MEGA_RX6+ EXT_MEGA_RX6 EXT_MEGA_TX6+ EXT_MEGA_TX6 BIB no. & MS no. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

239

GMR-04

BIB to backplane connections

GSM-100-433

MS2 to RXU
Table 2-24 lists the BIB MS2 to RXU backplane card slot mapping: Table 2-24 MS2 to RXU card slot mapping MSI/XCDR /GDP XCDR 1 XCDR 1 XCDR 1 XCDR 1 XCDR 1 XCDR 1 XCDR 1 XCDR 1 XCDR 0 XCDR 0 XCDR 0 XCDR 0 XCDR 0 XCDR 0 XCDR 0 XCDR 0 XCDR 13 XCDR 13 XCDR 13 XCDR 13 XCDR 12 XCDR 12 XCDR 12 XCDR 12 Card slot L9 L9 L9 L9 L9 L9 L9 L9 L10 L10 L10 L10 L10 L10 L10 L10 L11 L11 L11 L11 L12 L12 L12 L12 PCM signal (MSI/XCDR board) MEGATX+ MEGATX MEGARX+ MEGARX MEGBTX+ MEGBTX MEGBRX+ MEGBRX MEGATX+ MEGATX MEGARX+ MEGARX MEGBTX+ MEGBTX MEGBRX+ MEGBRX MEGATX+ MEGATX MEGARX+ MEGARX MEGBTX+ MEGBTX MEGBRX+ MEGBRX BIB conn. PIN no. J11 J120 J12 J121 J14 J123 J15 J124 J17 J126 J18 J127 J110 J129 J111 J130 J113 J132 J114 J133 J116 J135 J117 J136 Signal (BIB board) EXT_MEGA_RX1+ EXT_MEGA_RX1 EXT_MEGA_TX1+ EXT_MEGA_TX1 EXT_MEGA_RX4+ EXT_MEGA_RX4 EXT_MEGA_TX4+ EXT_MEGA_TX4 EXT_MEGA_RX2+ EXT_MEGA_RX2 EXT_MEGA_TX2+ EXT_MEGA_TX2 EXT_MEGA_RX5+ EXT_MEGA_RX5 EXT_MEGA_TX5+ EXT_MEGA_TX5 EXT_MEGA_RX3+ EXT_MEGA_RX3 EXT_MEGA_TX3+ EXT_MEGA_TX3 EXT_MEGA_RX6+ EXT_MEGA_RX6 EXT_MEGA_TX6+ EXT_MEGA_TX6 BIB no. & MS no. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

240

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

BIB to backplane connections

MS3 to RXU
Table 2-25 lists the BIB MS3 to RXU backplane card slot mapping: Table 2-25 MS3 to RXU card slot mapping MSI/XCDR /GDP XCDR 4 XCDR 4 XCDR 4 XCDR 4 XCDR 4 XCDR 4 XCDR 4 XCDR 4 XCDR 3 XCDR 3 XCDR 3 XCDR 3 XCDR 3 XCDR 3 XCDR 3 XCDR 3 XCDR 2 XCDR 2 XCDR 2 XCDR 2 XCDR 2 XCDR 2 XCDR 2 XCDR 2 Card slot L6 L6 L6 L6 L6 L6 L6 L6 L7 L7 L7 L7 L7 L7 L7 L7 L8 L8 L8 L8 L8 L8 L8 L8 PCM signal (MSI/XCDR board) MEGATX+ MEGATX MEGARX+ MEGARX MEGBTX+ MEGBTX MEGBRX+ MEGBRX MEGATX+ MEGATX MEGARX+ MEGARX MEGBTX+ MEGBTX MEGBRX+ MEGBRX MEGATX+ MEGATX MEGARX+ MEGARX MEGBTX+ MEGBTX MEGBRX+ MEGBRX BIB conn. PIN no. J11 J120 J12 J121 J14 J123 J15 J124 J17 J126 J18 J127 J110 J129 J111 J130 J113 J132 J114 J133 J116 J135 J117 J136 Signal (BIB board) EXT_MEGA_RX1+ EXT_MEGA_RX1 EXT_MEGA_TX1+ EXT_MEGA_TX1 EXT_MEGA_RX4+ EXT_MEGA_RX4 EXT_MEGA_TX4+ EXT_MEGA_TX4 EXT_MEGA_RX2+ EXT_MEGA_RX2 EXT_MEGA_TX2+ EXT_MEGA_TX2 EXT_MEGA_RX5+ EXT_MEGA_RX5 EXT_MEGA_TX5+ EXT_MEGA_TX5 EXT_MEGA_RX3+ EXT_MEGA_RX3 EXT_MEGA_TX3+ EXT_MEGA_TX3 EXT_MEGA_RX6+ EXT_MEGA_RX6 EXT_MEGA_TX6+ EXT_MEGA_TX6 BIB no. & MS no. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

241

GMR-04

BIB to backplane connections

GSM-100-433

242

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

Chapter 3

Decommissioning the equipment

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

ii

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

Chapter 3 Decommissioning the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lifting cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Decommissioning a BSSC cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSSC checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
31 31 31 31 32 32 32 32 34

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

iii

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

iv

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

Overview

Overview
Introduction
This chapter describes how to decommission BSSC cabinets. To decommission equipment not supplied by Motorola, for example battery chargers, power supplies and antennas, refer to the vendors instructions. WARNING Hazardous voltages in excess of 50 V dc exist inside 48 V and 60 V cabinets.

WARNING Use extreme caution when working on a cabinet with power applied. Remove all rings, watches and other jewellery.

Prerequisite
Read Chapter 1 of this manual before attempting to decommission a base site.

Lifting cabinets
BSSC cabinets are fitted with four lifting points, designed to accommodate M12 eyebolts, built in to the top panels. These lifting points are fitted with plastic inserts to protect the threads. Motorola kit number SWLN4648A contains four M12 eyebolts manufactured to C.E. conformity, each with a safe weight load of 400 kg and individually numbered. Only eyebolts supplied in this kit must be used. Before attempting to insert the eyebolts, visually check each one for any damage that may have occurred in transit. If any damage is apparent, DO NOT USE; contact Motorola for replacement. To use the eyebolts correctly: 1. 2. Carefully remove the plastic insert from the M12 threaded lifting point. Insert the eyebolt into the thread, ensuring that no cross-threading occurs. WARNING The eyebolts must not be overtightened; hand tight is sufficient. Screw the eyebolt fully into the lifting point so that no thread is left exposed. 3. 4. Repeat the procedure until all four eyebolts have been correctly fitted. When the lifting operation is complete, remove the eyebolts and refit the plastic inserts.

For continued use of eyebolts, there may be local regulations that govern the use of lifting equipment and stipulate a test and/or examination regime. If the eyebolts are to be used, ensure that all such regulations are met.

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

31

GMR-04

Decommissioning a BSSC cabinet

GSM-100-433

Decommissioning a BSSC cabinet

Introduction
Use the following procedure to decommission a BSSC, and use the checklist to check off each action as it is completed. Photocopy the checklist as often as required; do not write on the original.

Before starting
Before starting to decommission a BSSC ensure that: S S The main power source is switched off and that no power is connected to the BSSC cabinet. Sufficient packing crates and cartons are available to pack the decommissioned equipment.

Procedure
To decommission a BSSC cabinet: 1. 2. Check the cabinet and its contents for signs of damage. Use a digital voltmeter to ensure that power is not present in the cabinet. WARNING Stow disconnected cables so that they do not constitute a hazard to personnel using the site. 3. Disconnect the positive and negative leads, of the cabinet input dc power cable, from the main power source. Do not remove the earth lead. Put the cables in suitable packaging. Disconnect the E1/T1 link cables from the cabinet and secure them to the overhead racking. CAUTION BSSC cabinets use circuitry which is sensitive to static discharge. Avoid handling the modules in a high-static environment. When handling the modules, do not touch connector contacts. An earthed high-impedance wrist strap must be worn when handling modules. 5. Remove the fibre optic cables from the LANX modules and put them into suitable packaging.

4.

32

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-433

Decommissioning a BSSC cabinet

6.

Using a suitable screwdriver remove: The T43 or BIB boards including covers. The PIX modules from shelf 0. The BTC modules (from both shelves), take care not to damage the threads on the extractor lever covers. The remaining half size modules (from both shelves).

7.

Ensure that the optical ports on the LANX modules are protected by dust caps. Put the boards and modules into antistatic bags then carefully pack them in the boxes provided. Remove the following full-size modules from both shelves: The KSW modules. The GPROC/GPROC2 modules. The MSI modules. The GCLK modules.

8.

9. 10. 11. 12. 13.

Put the modules into antistatic bags then carefully pack them in the boxes provided. Remove the PSMs. Put the modules into antistatic bags then carefully pack them in the boxes provided. Disconnect the power leads from the cabinet and the earth lead from the cabinet and the main power source. If the BSSC is mounted on a plinth, remove the bottom fittings (bolts and washers) then carefully pack them in suitable bags. Remove the overhead cable trough and supports and put them into suitable packaging. WARNING An unequipped BSSC cabinet can weigh up to 136 kg (300 lb). Handle cabinets with extreme caution to avoid tipping.

14.

Move the cabinet to a location where it can be safely packed into its wooden transit case.

29 Aug 1997

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

33

GMR-04

Decommissioning a BSSC cabinet

GSM-100-433

BSSC checklist
ENGINEERS NAME SIGNATURE SITE NAME EQUIPMENT TYPE NAT ID
ACTION PSU decommissioned Packing material (including antistatic bags) on site Are cabinets damaged? If yes detail in comments box. Cables disconnected from top of cabinet and stowed All fibre optic cables disconnected PIX/ T43/ BIB/ BTC and modules removed and packed Remaining half size modules removed and packed GPROC/GPROC2 modules removed and packed MSI/ KSW modules removed and packed GCLK modules removed and packed PSMs removed and packed All loose cables in the cabinet stowed and secured Earth cable disconnected from cabinet Air deflector removed and packed Cabinet bottom fittings removed and packed Cable trough and supports removed and packed Cabinet packed in transit case YES NO N/A

DATE

COMMENTS

34

Installation and Configuration: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W08-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION

CHAPTER 2 GENERAL PROCEDURES

CHAPTER 3 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

CHAPTER 4 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES

CHAPTER 5 MISCELLANEOUS REPAIR

Category 533

Maintenance Information

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

ii

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Category 533 Maintenance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Related documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
i
11 11 11 11 11 11 12

Chapter 2 General procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test and Repair equipment lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repair equipment list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test equipment list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General repair procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Man machine interface (MMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMI uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locating faulty cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required tools and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the LMT to a GPROC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up the MMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identifying the faulty devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the alarm status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resetting and reinitializing a site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
21 21 22 22 23 24 24 24 25 25 25 26 26 26 26 210 210 210 210 210 211 211 213 213 213 213 215 215 215

Chapter 3 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Maintenance procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
31 31 31

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

iii

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Air filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air filter cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning cabinet air filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning cabinet air filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performing a physical inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annual physical inspection checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of the annual physical inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

32 32 32 32 33 33 33 33 34 34 34 34 35 36 37 38 38 38

Chapter 4 Replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface board replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing an interface board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant clock extender (CLKX) module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing CLKXA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing CLKXB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-redundant CLKX replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the CLKX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a fan unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant GCLK module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a redundant GCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv

i
41 41 41 41 42 42 42 42 43 43 43 44 45 45 45 45 46 47 47 47 47 48 48 48 49 49 49 49
29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Non-redundant GCLK replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a single shelf configuration GCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a multi-shelf configuration GCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating the GCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GCLK calibration record form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPROC/GPROC2 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant GPROC considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nonredundant GPROC considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before going to the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locating the faulty GPROC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the GPROC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the GPROC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant KSW/DSW2 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-redundant KSW module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant KSWX module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing KSWX A and B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-redundant KSWX module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration and indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant LANX replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the LANX associated with the active LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the LANX associated with the standby LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-redundant LANX replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

411 411 411 411 411 412 412 413 413 413 413 414 415 416 416 416 416 416 417 417 418 418 419 419 419 419 420 421 421 421 421 421 423 423 423 424 425 426 426 426 426 427 427 427 427 428 429 429 429

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

MSI and MSI-2 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-redundant systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XCDR replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-redundant Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GDP/GDP2 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-redundant Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NVM replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosing faults on the NVM board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the NVM board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel controls and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the PIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power supply module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a non-redundant power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a redundant power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

430 430 430 430 430 431 432 432 432 432 432 433 434 434 434 434 435 435 437 437 437 437 438 439 439 439 439 440 440 440 440 441 441

Chapter 5 Miscellaneous repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Miscellaneous repair procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Obtaining replacement authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing and replacing a circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a bus terminator card (BTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Obtaining replacement authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-redundant KSWs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant KSWs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vi

i
51 51 51 52 52 52 52 53 54 54 54 54 54 55 56 56 58 58 58
29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Replacing the alarm board (DAB/PAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a new board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement of PDB and AIB boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDB removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDB installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIB removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIB installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the BSU digital cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Obtaining replacement authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

510 510 510 510 511 512 513 513 513 513 514 515 515 516 517 517 517 517 518 519 521 523 523 523 523 524

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

vii

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

viii

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

Chapter 1

Introduction

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

ii

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Related documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
11 11 11 11 11 11 12

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

iii

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

iv

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Introduction

Introduction
Overview
This chapter: S S S Gives the purpose of the maintenance category. Lists prerequisites for using the maintenance category. Lists documents related to this category.

Audience
This category is for technical staff who work at Base Station System (BSS) sites. The category assumes a degree of familiarity with Motorola BSS hardware and software. Technical staff may use this manual to diagnose and repair the BSSC/2 cabinets.

Purpose of the manual

Use the procedures contained within this category to remove and replace various components in the cabinet.

Prerequisites
This category assumes the reader knows: S S How to operate a local maintenance terminal (LMT). How the BSS system works.

Structure
The manual contains the following: S General procedures This chapter contains general information, including information on: S Resetting and reinitializing a site. Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT) to a cabinet. Locating and identifying faulty cabinets and devices.

Maintenance procedures This chapter contains information on the maintenance procedures to be carried out on the BSC/RXCDR cabinets.

Replacement procedures This chapter contains detailed replacement procedures for components within the BSC/RXCDR cabinet.

Miscellaneous repair This chapter contains replacement/repair procedures for cabinet components not included in the Replacement procedures chapter.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

11

GMR-04

Introduction

GSM-100-533

Related documentation
There are two types of reference documentation, required reference and general reference. S Required reference documentation consists of books which supplement the information contained within this manual. The required reference documentation for this manual is the Technical Description: BSS Command Reference (GSM-100-321). General reference documentation contains background information to this manual. General reference documents to this manual are Maintenance Information: GSM Alarm Handling at the OMC-R and Operating Information: GSM System Operation (GSM-100-201).

12

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

Chapter 2

General procedures

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

ii

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Chapter 2 General procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test and Repair equipment lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repair equipment list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test equipment list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General repair procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Man machine interface (MMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MMI uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locating faulty cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required tools and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the LMT to a GPROC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up the MMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identifying the faulty devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the alarm status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resetting and reinitializing a site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
21 21 22 22 23 24 24 24 25 25 25 26 26 26 26 210 210 210 210 210 211 211 213 213 213 213 215 215 215

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

iii

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

iv

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

General procedures

General procedures
Introduction
This chapter contains general repair information. This information applies to all maintenance and repair procedures. Motorola recommends reading this chapter before: S S Leaving for a site. Beginning a repair procedure.

Table 2-1 lists the different sections in this chapter. Table 2-1 General procedures sections Section entitled Test and Repair equipment lists General repair procedures Man Machine Interface Locating faulty cabinets Connecting the Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) S S Information contained A list of required testing equipment. A list of required repair equipment.

Site configuration overview information. Information on the uses of MMI. Instructions for isolating a fault to a cabinet Instructions for: Connecting the LMT. Setting up the MMI interface. Changing the security level.

Identifying the faulty devices Resetting and re-initializing a site

The procedure for displaying alarms at the LMT. The procedure for resetting and re-initializing a site for power distribution unit module replacement.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

21

GMR-04

Test and Repair equipment lists

GSM-100-533

Test and Repair equipment lists

Repair equipment list
Table 2-2 lists the tools Motorola recommends for repairing cabinets. Table 2-2 Repair equipment Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 May vary, depending on the number of boards being removed. 1 1 Description Torque wrench, calibrated in newton meters or footpounds Torx driver, size T30 Torx driver, size T27 Torx driver, size T20 Torx driver, size T15 Torx driver, size T10 Nut driver, size 3/8ths inch Nut driver, size 5/16ths inch Flat blade screwdriver Phillips screwdriver Tamper-proof Allen key for loosening and tightening the covers on external cabinet locks Motorola approved wrist strap Anti-static pad Anti-static containers or bags

Set, jewellers screwdrivers, both Phillips and flat blade Bucket Mild dishwashing soap or detergent

22

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Test and Repair equipment lists

Test equipment list

Table 2-3 lists the test equipment Motorola recommends for diagnosing and testing BSSC cabinets. Table 2-3 GSM test equipment Quantity 1 Description IBM compatible personal computer (PC) with the following minimum specifications: Intel 486 processor. 170 MB hard drive. 8 MB RAM. ODS Local Area Network (LAN) card.

NOTE Some software tools require a PC with these specifications. If the only purpose of the PC is to monitor alarms and enter MMI commands , a PC with the following specifications should suffice: Intel 386 processor. 1 1 60MB hard drive. 4 MB RAM. ODS Local Area Network (LAN) card.

RS232 cable. 9-way female to 25-way male ESD protection kit

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

23

GMR-04

General repair procedures

GSM-100-533

General repair procedures

Overview
The Operations and Maintenance Centre (OMC) uses Base Station System (BSS) Fault Management software to determine whether or not a site is in a fault condition. If it is, the OMC sends a technician to the site to fix the problem. The rest of this section contains general steps to follow to isolate the fault.

Site configuration
A site may include either or both of the following: S S Base station controller (BSC). Remote transcoder (RXCDR).

This manual assumes familiarity with these components. Refer to the appropriate service manuals for detailed descriptions.

24

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Man machine interface (MMI)

Man machine interface (MMI)

Definition
The MMI is the interface between the user and the software. The MMI may run on: S S A terminal at the Operations and Maintenance Centre (OMC). A Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT).

MMI uses
Use the MMI to : S Obtain information from the system: S Display alarm reports. Retrieve device status.

Control the system: Take modules out of service (OOS). Put modules into service (INS).

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

25

GMR-04

Locating faulty cabinets

GSM-100-533

Locating faulty cabinets

Purpose
This section contains instructions for isolating a particular fault to a particular cabinet.

Prerequisites
These steps assume that: S S The OMC requested a visit to the site. The OMC knew the site locations, and which cabinet was generating the alarm.

Procedure
Follow these steps to isolate the fault to a cabinet. 1. 2. Enter the site if it is safe to do so. Determine whether the BSC or RXCDR cabinets have alarm LEDs in the door. Some older cabinets have an LED in the upper left corner. Later generations of cabinets do not have this LED. The cabinet LED indicates that the cabinet is receiving power. If the cabinet... has an LED in the door... does not have an LED in the door... Then... continue with step 3. skip ahead to step 4.

26

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Locating faulty cabinets

3.

Check the LED on each BSC and RXCDR cabinet. If the door LED is... lit... off... The cabinet... does not have power... Therefore...

has power... continue with step 4. investigate the power failure to this cabinet. i. Check the rectifiers for correct operation. Refer to the documentation supplied by the rectifier manufacturer. If the rectifiers are working correctly, continue with step ii, below. If the rectifiers are working incorrectly, repair or replace them according to the manufacturers instructions. Check back with the OMC to see if the alarm is cleared. If the alarm is cleared, the condition is fixed. No further action is necessary. If the alarm has not cleared, continue with step ii, below. ii. Check the top of the cabinet to see if there is voltage present. If there is no voltage present, check for an auto disconnect. If voltage is present, check for an internal failure.

4.

Open the door of the faulty cabinet. The OMC should be able to identify the faulty cabinet, getting the information from various alarm messages sent by the system. If the OMC has not identified the faulty cabinet, open each cabinet at the site until one with a fault indication is found. Such an indication would be a lit Alarm (red) LED.

5. 6.

Note the status of the LED indicators on the front panel of each module equipped with them. Continue with Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT)

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

27

GMR-04

Locating faulty cabinets

GSM-100-533

Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2 show BSU and RXU module location within a shelf. NOTE If AMR hardware modules are fitted retrospectively in BSSC installations, for the purpose of these figures: For KSWX, read DSWX as relevant. For KSW, read DSW2 as relevant.

Figure 2-1 BSU shelf modules slot assignment layout and backplane connectors

28

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Locating faulty cabinets

Figure 2-2 RXU shelf modules slot assignment layout and backplane connectors

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29

GMR-04

Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT)

GSM-100-533

Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT)

Overview
Most of the diagnostic and repair procedures suggest connecting a Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) in order to enter MMI commands, lock and unlock devices, and view alarms. This section gives detailed instructions for connecting the LMT.

Required tools and equipment

This procedure requires the following equipment: S S IBM - compatible Personal Computer (PC). RS-232 cable.

Refer to Table 2-2 for a list of repair equipment specifications and Table 2-3 for a list of test equipment specifications.

Prerequisites
Before performing the steps in this procedure, determine which cabinet contains the master processor.

Connecting the LMT to a GPROC

The following procedure details the steps required to connect a PC to a GPROC, or GPROC2, creating an LMT. 1. 2. Open the cabinet containing the master GPROC. Locate the master GPROC. Motorola recommends connecting a PC to the master GPROC. However, a PC can be connected to any GPROC that is not in an alarm state. 3. Connect one end of the RS-232 cable to the asynchronous communications controller port of the PC, and the other end to the TTY port connector on the front panel of the master GPROC. Power up the PC. The PC is now a Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT). 5. Continue with Setting up the MMI.

4.

210

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT)

Setting up the MMI

Follow these steps to set up the Local Maintenance Terminal. 1. Set the LMT TTY port parameters as: 2. 9600 baud. 8 data bits. 1 stop bit. 1 start bit. no parity.

Press the RETURN (or ENTER) key. The LMT displays one of the following prompts:
MMI-ROM 0115 > MMI-RAM 0115 >

(for GPROC running in ROM). (for GPROC running in RAM).

Work from either prompt. NOTE Connection to the master GPROC will result in the number 0115 being displayed as above. Connection to a GPROC other than the master, will result in a different number being displayed.

Changing the security level

Follow these steps to change the security level. 1. Enter the disp_level command at the prompt. The system displays the current user security level, like this:
Current security level is 1

2.

Enter the chg_level command at the prompt. The system asks for the password to gain access to the next level. There are two passwords available: One password changes the security level to Level 2. The second password changes the security level to Level 3. NOTE Passwords must be entered in sequence. The system does not permit a jump from security Level 1 to security Level 3. Security Level 2 must be accessed first, followed by security Level 3. The passwords to gain access to security Level 3 will be held by the OMC.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

211

GMR-04

Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT)

GSM-100-533

3.

Enter the password to access the next level of security. Enter the password... correctly in ROM... And the system displays... the new security level and the system prompt:
Current security level is x MMI-ROM 0115 >

Then continue with... Identifying the faulty devices

Where x is the new security level. Possible values are: 2. correctly in RAM... 3. Identifying the faulty devices the new security level and the system prompt:
Current security level is x MMI-RAM 0115 >

Where x is the new security level. Possible values are: 2. incorrectly 3. step 3 and step 4, until the system displays the new security level. the old security level and system prompt.

212

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Identifying the faulty devices

Identifying the faulty devices

Prerequisites
Before performing the steps in this procedure,: S S Locate the faulty cabinet. Connect the LMT.

Equipment safety
During replacement procedures, it may be possible to identify signs of damage caused by overheating, short circuits or sudden component failure. This may indicate a problem that could repeat itself, cause additional damage, or be a symptom of a failure elsewhere. Analysis of the problem may identify common faults and make corrective action possible. It is recommended that: S S The OMC is informed that an equipment safety problem has been identified. The steps for Reporting safety issues are followed. These are detailed in the introductory section of this manual.

Checking the alarm status

Use the following steps to check the status of the device that is reporting the alarm. NOTE Devices that are Out Of Service (OOS) report an operational state of disabled. 1. To enable alarm reporting, enter the following command at the LMT: enable_alarm <site> Where:
site

is: 0 or BSC if the site is a BSC site. 0 if the site is an XCDR site

site

2.

To display a list of the currently active Fault Management Initiated Cleared and Operator Initiated Cleared alarms, enter the following command at the LMT: disp_act_alarm <site> Where:
site

is: 0 or BSC if the site is a BSC site. 0 if the site is an XCDR site

site

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

213

GMR-04

Identifying the faulty devices

GSM-100-533

3.

Observe the displayed alarm report and active alarm list. The system now displays alarm reports as they occur. The module in the alarm report is detecting the alarm.

4.

Check to see if the module reporting the alarm, or that has an active alarm, is the same as the module with a status LED indicating a fault. This module may be the source of the fault. However, some other device, cable or shelf could be causing the fault.

5.

Look up the Device Alarm in the Device Alarms tables, detailed in Maintenance Information: BSS Field Troubleshooting (GSM100523). There is an Alarm table for each device or digital board.

6. 7.

Diagnose the problem by following the Fault Diagnosis procedure indicated in the Device Alarm table. If necessary, use the module replacement procedures detailed in this manual to replace the suspect module.

Additional fault isolation may be necessary if the module reporting the failure is replaced, placed in service and new alarms are reported again. To perform this additional fault isolation, evaluate the actual alarm message that the module is reporting. Refer to the GSM event/alarm messages in Maintenance Information: Alarm Handling at the OMC (GSM-100-501) for a list of valid alarm reports and alarm information details.

214

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Resetting and reinitializing a site

Resetting and reinitializing a site

Overview
BSS software commands cannot take BSSC cabinet power distribution unit modules Out of Service (OOS).

Procedure
Follow these steps to reset a site for power distribution unit module replacement. CAUTION Resetting the site takes the site out of service (OOS) and drops all calls. It is advisable to perform this procedure during periods of low traffic. 1. 2. 3. Enter reset_bss at the local Maintenance Terminal (LMT). Replace the faulty module using the appropriate procedure. Activate the front panel RESET switch on each of the following modules to reinitialize the site and put it back In Service (INS). 4. MSI KSW/TSW GPROC

Verify the site automatically re-boots and is INS.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

215

GMR-04

Resetting and reinitializing a site

GSM-100-533

216

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

Chapter 3

Maintenance Procedures

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

ii

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Chapter 3 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Maintenance procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air filter cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning cabinet air filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning cabinet air filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performing a physical inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annual physical inspection checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of the annual physical inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
31 31 31 32 32 32 32 33 33 33 33 34 34 34 34 35 36 37 38 38 38

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

iii

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

iv

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Maintenance procedures

Maintenance procedures
Introduction
This chapter contains the maintenance procedures for the BSSC/BSSC2 cabinet.

Prerequisites
These procedures assume that field personnel are competent to work on Motorola BSSC/BSSC2 equipment.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

31

GMR-04

Air filter replacement

GSM-100-533

Air filter replacement

Introduction
As part of BSSC/BSSC2 cabinet maintenance, foam air filters should be replaced every six months with new or previously washed filters.

Replacement procedure
Follow the procedure detailed under Air filter replacement in chapter 4, to correctly replace cabinet foam air filters.

Air filter cleaning

Air filters removed from BSSC/BSSC2 cabinets during air filter replacement must be washed prior to storing for reuse. Follow the procedure detailed under Cleaning cabinet air filters later in this chapter, to correctly clean used foam air filters.

32

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Cleaning cabinet air filters

Cleaning cabinet air filters

Introduction
Follow these instructions to wash the foam air filters fitted to the cabinet after they have been removed and taken to a location were they are to be cleaned.

Tools and equipment

This procedure requires the following tools and equipment. S S S A bucket, or similar container. A source of warm water. Mild soap, dishwashing soap or detergent.

Cleaning cabinet air filters

To clean the cabinet air filters proceed as follows: 1. 2. Wash the filter in warm soapy water. Squeeze the water out of the filter gently, and allow the filter to dry. CAUTION Do not wring the filter. Wringing may tear the material. 3. Inspect the filter for splits and holes. If the filter is undamaged it should be stored for reuse. Damaged filters are to be discarded in accordance with local guidelines.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

33

GMR-04

Performing a physical inspection

GSM-100-533

Performing a physical inspection

General information
A physical inspection of all Motorola equipment should take place annually. Motorola supplied computer equipment has a minimum environmental requirement. All indoor equipment is to be installed in dry, cool, dust free conditions with adequate access and lighting. Temperature control will be maintained with reference to the equipment heat dissipation figures found in the relevant equipment documentation and the surrounding environment. Overall handling specifications: S Storage: S S Humidity 10 to 90% non-condensing relative Temperature 40 to +70 degrees C Humidity 20 to 80% non-condensing relative Temperature 0 to +50 degrees C

Operate:

Dust: < 5 milligrams / 1000 cubic feet of air

Equipment cabinets and most modules supplied by Motorola are protected by a painted finish. The surfaces of the cabinets are to be adequately protected from accidental damage at all times. An Annual physical inspection checklist is supplied later in this chapter.

Safety
Exhaust and ventilation vents are not to be obscured by installation of cabinets, particular care should be taken not to divert or restrict air conditioning airflow to operating equipment and any equipment present where the installation in progress may interfere or hamper the airflow or generate adverse particulate matter. Installation of any equipment must minimise the risk of personal injury, i.e. burrs removed, cable tie excess tails cut flush, no loose cables, stable and secure cabinets and racks, no exposed conductors etc. Protective blanks, bungs and shields are to be complete and in position at all times other than necessary for maintenance/installation.

Cable tray
Cable tray is to be of suitable size and specification for its intended purpose. There should be sufficient free space on the tray to allow cables to flow around corners without kinks or excessive bunching of the runs. Correct fixtures and fittings are to be used as per manufacturers recommendations and as supplied by Motorola. Under floor or wall tray is to be secured at a maximum of 1.5 metre intervals. Cable tray is to be grounded to the MGB (Main Ground Bar) using a single ground cable and each section of tray is to be bonded to its neighbour using the correct bonding leads. End plates and blanks are to be used when cable tray ends are not to a terminated by a wall fixing. Having equipment plumb and square increases the stability of units and reflects the amount of care that has gone into planning the installation. Spirit levels and plumb lines or similar tools should be used throughout. This directly demonstrates the quality and workmanship of the installation teams.
34

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Performing a physical inspection

Power System
All exposed terminals are to be covered using adequate insulation materials, that is, heatshrink or blanks. Equipment racks and stacks are to be securely bolted to the floor and if necessary equipment racks are to be top supported. All conductor surfaces, that is, busbars, terminals, and so, are to be protected against corrosion by the application of an anti-oxidant compound. Where a hazard to health exists, whether in the distribution, generation or storage stages of the power system, it is to be clearly labelled as such. These warning labels are to be located at the hazard point and on all access doors into any equipment room where such a hazard is present. Power system distribution interconnections are to be made using stainless steel fixings. The use of any other fixing will introduce corrosion and reduce the efficiency and life of the system. Distribution busbars and cables are to be clearly labelled at both ends with the correct colour coding and circuit identification. Circuit breakers are to be of the correct rating and clearly labelled with the user unit identification.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

35

GMR-04

Performing a physical inspection

GSM-100-533

Cabling
All cables installed are to be of the correct size and specification for their intended use. They are to be run on appropriate cable tray, in suitable conduit or trunking, observing minimum bend radius restrictions and care is to be taken in the planning of routes to avoid cables crossing each other or the run containing twists or kinks. Where cables are run in conduit, care must be taken that the heat generated by the cable is below the conduit/cable manufacturers max recommendations. Cables running in conduit or trunking are not to be secured using cable ties for ease of maintenance. At intersections runs should be as close as possible to 90 degrees to prevent high electrical energy being induced from one cable to another. RF cables are to be run in neat square runs, divided into Cells and cabinets, that is, cables representing Cell A Cabinet 1 run together, Cell B Cabinet 2 together, and so on, dependent on individual configuration. Precautions should be taken to avoid any damage to cables and where appropriate, protective devices installed. Cables are not to be run over sharp edges or burrs. Where cables pass through or around metal panels, grommets or edging is to be used to prevent damage to the cable insulation. All cables are to be labelled at both ends, these being descriptive, unambiguous and permanent, indicating where the cable should be connected. They are to be run in straight parallel runs with smooth flowing curves. Crossing, twisting and tangles are to be avoided. Cable ties are to be used to support the cable when mounted on cable tray. Uniformity is to be observed throughout the installation, that is, all ties of the same type, colour and fixed in identical style, sized accordingly. Ties are to have the excess tail cut flush with the locking eye so as to prevent possible injury. Care is to be taken that no cable is damaged or distorted by cable ties. Cable lugs are, as far as possible, to be of the permanent compression type to minimize the possibility of connections coming loose. Lugs and Crimps are to be taped with the appropriate colour code but not as to obscure the inspection hole. All terminations are to be tight. Where cables enter or exit the equipment room they must be sealed to the wall. Wire wrapping connections are to have a minimum of 5 turns and are not to be connected to a previously soldered pin. Soldered connections are to be free from excess solder, the finish to be clean and bright, vividly highlighting the outline of the connecting conductor. Punch block connections are to have a maximum of 2 mm of wire protruding beyond the punch block cutter. Shielded cables are to be bonded at one end only. The other end cut or tied back sufficiently to avoid connection to ground. Screen foil is to be cut back far enough and protected using heatshrink or self vulcanising tape to remove the risk of shorting signal pins. Unused wires are not to be cut back, but folded back neatly and secured. Where co-axial cable crimps/splices are used there should be no visible braid or frays on the finished connector. Under no circumstances are cables to be cut down to fit connectors of incorrect size.

36

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Performing a physical inspection

Grounding
Grounding is to be completed in accordance with the Motorola Grounding Guideline. Grounding of all equipment cabinets and racks reduces noise and circulating currents. In the equipment room this revolves around the Main Ground Bar (MGB), complemented by an External Ground Bar (EGB). The MGB is in turn bonded to the building ground, lightning protection devices and feeders are to be bonded to the EGB where determined necessary by equipment manufacturer. Ground bars are to be wall / under floor mounted using insulated fixings. Ground bars and connections to them are to be clean, free from corrosion and treated with anti-oxidant compound. No more than one ground connection is to be made on the same point of contact, each grounding connection to be made using stainless steel nuts, bolts and split spring washers. Each ground bar connection is to be labelled identifying the user equipment. The point at which the bond is made is to be clean and free from paint, that is, to bare metal avoiding contact with galvanised materials. Galvanized or plated finishes are to be removed at the point of contact. All equipment racks are to be individually bonded to the MGB, no daisy chains. The minimum bend radii for ground is eight inches. #2 awg or larger. Stressed #6 or larger cable is to be secured using two hole lugs at the Ground Bar. Lightning arrester equipment is to be no more than three feet inside the building. Each individual section of metal cable tray is to be bonded to its neighbour, and then one ground run to the MGB. The bonding lead is to be made from minimum 35 square mm cable and 15cm long. Connection to the tray is to be made using correct gauge compression type lugs, stainless steel nuts, bolts and washers. Antioxidant compound is to be used on all ground connections to prevent the risk of corrosion.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

37

GMR-04

Annual physical inspection checklist

GSM-100-533

Annual physical inspection checklist

Purpose of the annual physical inspection
The annual physical inspection is to reveal whether each point is in accordance with Motorola Installation Standards (Pass) or not (Fail). Where the equipment installation has been installed by the customer or party not under the control of Motorola it is to be indicated by * (asterisk) in either the Pass or Fail column. If there in no such item then indicate with N/A.

Using the checklist

To perform the annual physical inspection, use the checklist in Table 3-1. Tick against Pass or Fail for each item checked. See Performing a physical inspection in this chapter for full details. Table 3-1 Annual physical inspection checklist Description of Check 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Adequate clearance maintained for access, maintenance and cooling Air conditioning is of adequate capacity and operating correctly Burrs removed from all metalwork Cabinets and racks are individually grounded to the MGB Cable bridge grounded to external ground bar Cable ends and terminations made up correctly with no exposed braid or conductor Cable runs are neat and straight Cable ties are cut flush with locking eye to prevent injury Cable ties are neat, evenly spaced and of uniform type, colour and style of attachment Cable ties do not compress, distort or damage any cables Cable tray (internal) is grounded to MGB by single cable Cable tray installed horizontal with respect to the floor Cable tray is adequately supported to prevent movement Cable tray is constructed and assembled using correct fixings Cable tray is of adequate specification and size Cable tray physically undamaged Cable tray sections are to be bonded to their neighbour section correctly Cables clearly labelled at both ends Cables not cut down to fit. Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
29 Aug 1997

38

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Annual physical inspection checklist

Description of Check 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 Cables observe minimum bend radii Cables of correct type and specification Cables run to prevent injury or hazards Circuit breakers correctly and clearly labelled Circuit breakers of correct type and specification DDF cable excess folded back and secured using heatshrink End plates and blanks are used where necessary Equipment clean and free from dust Equipment physically undamaged Equipment racks clearly labelled Exposed metal conductor surfaces treated with anti oxidant compound Ground bars are protected against corrosion using anti oxidant compound Ground bars have only one connection per contact point Ground cables correctly and individually labelled Grounding connections to be made using stainless steel fixings and anti oxidant compound Lightning arresters are of correct type and specification No ground connection is made to galvanised or plated surfaces Power cable lugs of correct type and size Power cables are to be correctly colour coded at both ends Power cables connections tight and secured using stainless fixings Protective covers, edging and grommets are fitted to protect cables Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail

Punch block cables to not protrude more that 2mm beyond Pass the cutter Shielded cables grounded at one end only (donor end) Soldered connections are correctly made Spare bungs and blanks are to be on site Wire wrap connections have minimum 5 turns Wire wrap connections not made to a previously soldered pin Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

39

GMR-04

Annual physical inspection checklist

GSM-100-533

310

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

Chapter 4

Replacement procedures

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

ii

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Chapter 4 Replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface board replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing an interface board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant clock extender (CLKX) module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing CLKXA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing CLKXB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-redundant CLKX replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the CLKX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a fan unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant GCLK module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a redundant GCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-redundant GCLK replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a single shelf configuration GCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a multi-shelf configuration GCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating the GCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GCLK calibration record form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPROC/GPROC2 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant GPROC considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nonredundant GPROC considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before going to the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locating the faulty GPROC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the GPROC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the GPROC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
41 41 41 41 42 42 42 42 43 43 43 44 45 45 45 45 46 47 47 47 47 48 48 48 49 49 49 49 411 411 411 411 411 412 412 413 413 413 413 414 415 416 416 416 416 416 417 417 418 418

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

iii

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Redundant KSW/DSW2 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-redundant KSW module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant KSWX module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing KSWX A and B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-redundant KSWX module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration and indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant LANX replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the LANX associated with the active LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the LANX associated with the standby LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-redundant LANX replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSI and MSI-2 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-redundant systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XCDR replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-redundant Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GDP/GDP2 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-redundant Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NVM replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosing faults on the NVM board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the NVM board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel controls and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv

419 419 419 419 420 421 421 421 421 421 423 423 423 424 425 426 426 426 426 427 427 427 427 428 429 429 429 430 430 430 430 430 431 432 432 432 432 432 433 434 434 434 434 435 435 437 437 437 437 438
29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

PIX replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the PIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power supply module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a non-redundant power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a redundant power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

439 439 439 439 440 440 440 440 441 441

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

vi

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Replacement procedures

Replacement procedures
Purpose
This chapter contains procedures for replacing various components within the BSS cabinets.

Description
The OMC-R can often diagnose problems at the BSS site. The OMC-R: S S S Receives alarms and statistics from the system. Interprets the alarms and statistics to pinpoint the problem in the system. Uses MMI command to try to further diagnose and possibly repair the system.

Sometimes the only possible way to fix the problem is to send field personnel to the BSS site to replace a component in the cabinet. As the OMC-R tries to diagnose the cause of the problems at the site, it may also be able to identify the specific component that needs replacement. In these cases further diagnosis and testing may be unnecessary; all that is required is to replace the component identified by the OMC-R. The rest of this chapter contains instructions for replacing: S S The individual full size digital boards. The individual half size digital boards.

Chapter structure
The replacement procedures are listed alphabetically, by device name (for example, CLKX, or GPROC/GPROC2). If there are different procedures for replacing a redundant device and a similar non-redundant device (such as redundant and non-redundant CLKX modules) the instructions for replacing the redundant device are given first.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

41

GMR-04

Air filter replacement

GSM-100-533

Air filter replacement

Introduction
Follow these instructions to replace the foam air filters in the BSSC cabinets. The cabinet air filters should be replaced with new or clean filters every six months. It is recommended that filters are not washed on site but replaced with new or previously washed filters.

Tools and equipment

This procedure requires the following tools and equipment. S New or previously washed air filters. Table 4-1 contains the details of the replacement air filter that can be ordered. Table 4-1 Replacement air filters Kit Number (10 Filters): SWEN4007A Filter Part Number: 3509601F03 Description: BSSC/2 air filter Approximate Size: 172mm x 610mm

Replacing the air filter

To replace the cabinet air filters proceed as follows: 1. 2. 3. Open the cabinet door. Lift the bar securing the filter and carefully lift it free. Remove the filter. CAUTION Do not install a wet filter. A wet filter will damage the equipment. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Position the new or previously washed filter. Refit the securing bar. Repeat step 2 to step 5 for the second filter, as necessary. Close and latch the cabinet door. Filters can be washed off site using warm water and mild soap (dishwashing soap or detergent) for later installation at a site.

42

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Interface board replacement

Interface board replacement

Introduction
This section gives instructions for removing and replacing a balanced line interface board (BIB) or a T43 interface board (T43). Since the procedure for both boards is the same, this section refers to either board as an interface board. CAUTION All channel traffic associated with an interface board is lost during the replacement procedure. If only one 2.048 Mbit/s link is affected by an interface board fault, replacement of the interface board should be performed during a period of low traffic so as not to interrupt service on the other 2.048 Mbit/s links connected to the interface board.

Illustrations
Figure 4-1 shows a sample of the balanced line interconnect board (BIB).

J0

J1

Figure 4-1 Balanced-line Interconnect Board Figure 4-2 shows a sample of the T43 interconnect board.

J0 J8 J14 J16 J13 J7 J17 J5 J11 J1 J10 J2 J4

Figure 4-2 Type 43 interconnect board

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

43

GMR-04

Interface board replacement

GSM-100-533

Replacing an interface board

1. Enter the lock_device command to take the affected MMS device out-of-service (OOS). MMS is the software name for the 2.048 Mbit/s links. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Note the order that the 2.048 Mbit/s links are connected to the interface board. Disconnect the 2.048 Mbit/s links from the interface board. Remove the four screws that secure the interface board to the cabinet interconnect panels. Lift the interface board free to disconnect the 37-pin D connector. Fit the replacement interface board to the 37-pin D connector on the cabinet interconnect panel. Secure the interface board to the interconnect panel using the four screws removed in step 4. Reconnect the 2.048 Mbit/s links to the replacement interface board. Enter the unlock_device command to bring the MMS device back in-service (INS).

44

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Redundant clock extender (CLKX) module replacement

Redundant clock extender (CLKX) module replacement

Overview
This section contains instructions for removing and replacing redundant clock extender modules (CLKX).

Illustration
Figure 4-3 shows a typical CLKX card.

Fibre optic clock outputs to local KSWXs

Backplane connector

Figure 4-3 Clock Extender (CLKX) module

Replacing CLKXA
Follow these steps to replace CLKX A. NOTE Replacing redundant CLKX modules may cause a system glitch when the CLKXs are being switched. 1. 2. 3. 4. Pull the CLKX forward just enough to disconnect it from the module backplane. This forces a changeover to CLKX B modules. Disconnect the fibre optic cables from the CLKX A module to be replaced. Remove the CLKX A module and insert the replacement CLKX. Reconnect all the fibre optic cables. NOTE Fibre optic cables used in conjunction with a CLKX board to transfer clock signals from a parent shelf to remote shelves, must be of the same length to maintain site synchronization integrity.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

45

GMR-04

Redundant clock extender (CLKX) module replacement

GSM-100-533

5.

Push the CLKX back into the shelf until it connects to the backplane.

Replacing CLKXB
Follow these steps to replace CLKX B. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Pull the CLKX forward just enough to disconnect it from the module backplane. This forces a changeover to CLKX A modules. Disconnect the fibre optic cables from the CLKX B module to be replaced. Remove the CLKX B module and insert the replacement CLKX. Reconnect all the fibre optic cables. Push the CLKX back into the shelf until it connects to the backplane.

46

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Non-redundant CLKX replacement

Non-redundant CLKX replacement

Overview
This section contains instructions for removing and replacing non-redundant clock extender modules (CLKX)

Illustration
Figure 4-3 shows a typical CLKX card.

Replacing the CLKX

Follow these instructions to remove and replace the CLKX. NOTE Replacing stand-alone CLKX modules causes system down-time. 1. 2. 3. 4. Disconnect all the fibre optic cables from the CLKX to be replaced. Remove the faulty CLKX. Insert the replacement CLKX. Reconnect all the fibre optic cables. NOTE Fibre optic cables used in conjunction with a CLKX board to transfer clock signals from a parent shelf to remote shelves, must be of the same length to maintain site synchronization integrity.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

47

GMR-04

Replacing a fan unit

GSM-100-533

Replacing a fan unit

Removing the fan
Follow these steps to replace a faulty fan: 1. 2. 3. 4. Locate the faulty fan. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to release the four quarter-turn fasteners which secure the fan to the shelf assembly. Grasp the fan and pull it outward away from the cabinet. Disconnect the fan power cable connector and lift it free of the cabinet.

Installing the fan

Follow these steps to install a fan unit: 1. 2. 3. 4. Connect the Fan Power cable connector to the new fan. Install the new fan into the cabinet. Using a flat blade screwdriver, tighten the four quarter-turn fasteners that secure the fan to the shelf assembly. Advise the OMC that the repair is complete and check that fuse and fan alarms at the OMC are cleared.

48

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Redundant GCLK module replacement

Redundant GCLK module replacement

Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing redundant generic clock (GCLK) modules.

Illustration
Figure 4-4 shows a GCLK board.

ALARM LED (RED) NORMALLY OFF ACTIVE (GREEN) LED MASTER = ON 2.048 MHz In 16.384 MHz OUT 6.12 S OUT 60mS OUT 125uS OUT GROUND

TEST PORTS

RESET/DISABLE SWITCH UP (MOMENTARY) = RESET MIDDLE = NORMAL OPERATION DOWN = DISABLE LATER VERSIONS OF THE GCLK DO NOT HAVE THE 6.12 S, 60mS AND 4.24uS OUTPUTS ON THE FRONT PANEL

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

FREQUENCY ADJUST

Figure 4-4 GCLK board

Replacing a redundant GCLK

Follow these steps to replace the GCLK module 1. Connect a local maintenance terminal (LMT) at the TTY port of the master GPROC. Refer to Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT), in Chapter 2 for instructions. Motorola recommends connecting the LMT to the TTY port of the master GPROC. However, if the master is unavailable, an LMT can connect to any available GPROC. NOTE If an LMT is unavailable, the OMC must enter all MMI commands.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

49

GMR-04

Redundant GCLK module replacement

GSM-100-533

2.

Determine which GCLK card needs replacement. Use the following table to determine the next action to take. If... the master GCLK card needs replacement... i. Then... In a TTY window, enter the swap_devices command to tell the software to make the redundant GCLK the master. Continue on to step 3.

ii. the stand-by GCLK card... 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Continue on to step 3.

In a TTY window, enter the lock_device command to take the faulty GCLK out of service (OOS). Disable the faulty GCLK using the front panel switch. Remove the faulty GCLK. Insert the replacement GCLK. Ensure front panel switch is set for normal operation. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the replacement GCLK back in service (INS).

410

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Non-redundant GCLK replacement

Non-redundant GCLK replacement

Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing non-redundant Generic Clock (GCLK) modules.

Prerequisite
If one is not already connected, connect a local maintenance terminal (LMT) at the TTY port of the master GPROC. Refer to Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT), in Chapter 2 for instructions. Motorola recommends connecting the LMT to the TTY port of the master GPROC. However, if the master is unavailable, an LMT can connect to any available GPROC. NOTE If an LMT is unavailable, the OMC must enter all MMI commands.

Illustration
Figure 4-4 shows a GCLK board.

Conditions
There are two configurations that may require GCLK replacement. The following table shows the two configurations and which instructions apply. If the cabinet contains: A single BSU shelf More than one BSU shelf Follow the appropriate procedure. Follow the steps in: Replacing a Single Shelf Configuration GCLK in this section Replacing a Multi-Shelf Configuration GCLK in this section.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

411

GMR-04

Non-redundant GCLK replacement

GSM-100-533

Replacing a single shelf configuration GCLK

Follow these steps to replace a GCLK in a single-shelf configuration cabinet. NOTE If an LMT is unavailable, the OMC-R must enter all MMI commands. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Insert the replacement GCLK into the empty GCLK slot. In a TTY window, enter the equip_device command to equip the replacement GCLK. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the replacement GCLK in-service (INS). Wait at least 30 minutes for the GCLK to stabilize. In a TTY window, enter the state command to verify the operational and administrative state of the GCLK. In a TTY window, enter the lock_device command to take the faulty GCLK out-of-service (OOS). Set the RESET/DISABLE switch down to the DISABLE position to disable the faulty GCLK. Remove the faulty GCLK. Secure a blanking plate to the empty GCLK slot..

Replacing a multi-shelf configuration GCLK

Follow these steps to replace a GCLK in a multi-shelf configuration cabinet. CAUTION If the system is operational, module replacement will cause down-time for the entire system. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. In a TTY window, enter the lock_device command to take the faulty GCLK out-of-service (OOS). Disable the faulty GCLK using the front panel switch. Remove the faulty GCLK. Insert the replacement GCLK. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the replacement GCLK in-service (INS). Wait at least 30 minutes for the GCLK to stabilize. In a TTY window, enter the state command to verify the operational and administrative state of the GCLK. Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O
29 Aug 1997

412

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Calibrating the GCLK

Calibrating the GCLK

Introduction
Follow this procedure to calibrate the GCLK in the field. The GCLK must be calibrated when more than one frame slip per hour is observed or when the GCLK is phase locked to the E1/T1 serial data stream and the system requests calibration. CAUTION The GCLK must be calibrated only by fully trained GSM qualified staff. Do not attempt this procedure under any circumstances unless the test equipment listed below is available.

Test equipment
The following test equipment is required: S S S S S S S An IBM-compatible personal computer (PC). An RS232 9 to 25-way cable. A Rubidium standard. Universal counter Hewlett Packard Model HP5385A or equivalent. Screened coaxial cable BNC to 2 mm multicontact AG connector. New calibration sticker(s). A non-ferrous tuning tool.

Commands
The following commands must be used to calibrate the GCLK: Command disp_equipment state Function Displays the active equipment at a specified site. Displays the status of specified devices or functions.

chg_element Turns the phase lock function on or off, where phase_lock_gclk <value> <value> is 0 for off and 1 for on, and <location> <location> is the site id. disp_element phase_lock_gclk <location> clear_gclk_avgs <location> gclk_id> Shows the status of the phase lock function <location> is the site id. Clears LTA values in memory for a specified GCLK.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

413

GMR-04

Calibrating the GCLK

GSM-100-533

Process
To calibrate the GCLK follow procedures: S S Initial preparation. GCLK calibration.

Before attempting this process record the board serial number, date of last calibration and present frequency on the calibration record shown at the end of this section, and remove the old calibration stickers from the GCLK front panels.

Initial preparation
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Connect the serial A port on the PC to a GPROC TTY port using the 9 to 25-way RS232 cable. At the PC start the terminal emulator program. Connect the output from the 10 MHz standard to the reference input of the frequency counter, select external standard. Set the frequency gate time to 10 second and set the display to give 10 significant digits. To check to see if phase lock is on, at the CUST MMI prompt type: disp_element phase_lock_gclk <location> Where: <location> is: 0 or bsc, for a BSC 0 for an XCDR

This gives the status of phase lock at the site, 0 is shown for phase lock off and 1 is shown for phase lock on. 6. If phase lock is on, at the CUST MMI prompt type: chg_element phase_lock_gclk 0 <location> Where: <location> is: 0 or bsc, for a BSC 0 for an XCDR

This turns off the phase lock to the selected site. 7. At the CUST MMI prompt type: disp_equip<site number> This gives the device id of the GCLKs. 8. At the CUST MMI prompt type: state<site number>GCLK<dev id><dev id><dev id> This displays the status for the GCLK. 9. At the CUST MMI prompt type: clear_gclk_avgs <location> <gclk_id> Where: <location> <gclk_id> is: 0 or bsc, for a BSC 0 for an XCDR 0 or 1

This clears the LTA values for the specified GCLK.

414

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Calibrating the GCLK

GCLK calibration
1. 2. 3. Connect the frequency counter to the front panel 16.384 MHz connection of the GCLK. Connect the cable to the input port of the frequency counter and the jack plug end to the front panel of the GCLK 16.384 MHz output and ground respectively. Using a non-ferrous tuning tool, adjust the potentiometer labelled FREQ ADJUST on the GCLK to 16.384 MHz. The GSM specified tolerance is +/ 0.8 Hz, although it is desirable (and should be possible) to adjust the frequency more accurately than this. This reads as 16.384 000 00 on the frequency counter. Adjusting the potentiometer clockwise increases the frequency and anticlockwise decreases the frequency. Repeat step 7 to step 3 if the other GCLK is to be calibrated. If phase locking of the GCLK(S) at the site is required type: chg_element phase_lock_gclk 1 <location> This turns the phase lock on for the specified site. 6. Place a new calibration sticker, indicating the date of calibration, over the potentiometer labelled FREQ ADJUST on each calibrated GCLK.

4. 5.

GCLK calibration record form

The GCLK calibration record form is shown below:
SITE NAME ........................................ SITE ID .............................................. TESTERS NAMES ..................................... .....................................

SERIAL NUMBER OF BOARD

DATE

DATE OF LAST CALIBRATION

FREQUENCY BEFORE CALIBRATION

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

415

GMR-04

GPROC/GPROC2 replacement

GSM-100-533

GPROC/GPROC2 replacement
Overview
This section provides the procedure for replacing redundant and non-redundant General Processor (GPROC) boards. The procedure for replacing the GPROC or GPROC2 is the same, only the procedure for the GPROC is given.

Redundant GPROC considerations

If the processing capability of a GPROC in a redundant system fails, the redundant GPROC should be loaded automatically with the appropriate code and enabled. The system then takes the failed GPROC Out Of Service (OOS). Therefore, no ill effects should be seen during GPROC replacement.

Nonredundant GPROC considerations

If a non-redundant system is still operational, GPROC replacement may cause a temporary system glitch when GPROCs are switched.

Before going to the site

The OMC must determine the following: S S S S Site number. Device ID. Cage number. Slot number.

416

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

GPROC/GPROC2 replacement

Locating the faulty GPROC

Use the information from the OMC together with the LED display on the GPROCs to locate the faulty board. The following table shows the various LED displays. If the Green LED is...
on...

And the Red LED is...

off...

The board is...

Additional action...

either: S operating normally S may be unequipped Use the site command to verify whether the board is equipped or not.

no further action is necessary.

flashing... flashing... flashing... off... on... off...

off... flashing... on... on... on... off...

waiting for code to download... undergoing normal ROM programming... in an alarm condition... continue with Removing g th GPROC. the GPROC

not receiving dc power...

Removing the GPROC

Follow these steps to set up the GPROC replacement: CAUTION Do not exchange all GPROCs connected to one LAN simultaneously or all DTE addresses will be lost. 1. Set up a local maintenance terminal (LMT) at the TTY port of a GPROC. Refer to Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT), beginning in Chapter 2 for instructions. Motorola recommends connecting the LMT to the TTY port of the master GPROC. However, if the master is unavailable, an LMT can connect to any available GPROC. NOTE If an LMT is unavailable the OMC must enter all the MMI commands. 2. 3. Enter the lock_device command to lock the faulty GPROC. Set the RESET/DISABLE switch of the faulty GPROC to the down (DISABLE) position and remove the faulty GPROC.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

417

GMR-04

GPROC/GPROC2 replacement

GSM-100-533

Installing the GPROC

Follow these steps to replace the GPROC. CAUTION Replacing the master GPROC will cause a site outage. 1. Insert the replacement GPROC into the empty GPROC slot. Make sure the GPROC locks firmly into the backplane. 2. 3. 4. 5. Set the RESET/DISABLE switch of the replacement GPROC to the middle (normal operation) position. The DTE addresses of a replacement master GPROC must be checked to ensure that it is correct for the site in which it is installed. In a TTY window, enter the equip_device command to inform the software to load code into the replacement GPROC. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the replacement GPROC back in-service (INS).

Illustration
Figure 4-5 shows a GPROC module.

ALARM LED (RED) NORMALLY OFF ACTIVE LED (GREEN) NORMALLY ON

RESET/DISABLE SWITCH UP (MOMENTARY) = RESET MIDDLE = NORMAL OPERATION DOWN = DISABLE TTY CONNECTOR THIS OPTICALLY ISOLATED TEST PORT ALLOWS CONTROL OF ON BOARD SELF DIAGNOSTICS.

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

ig.202.rh

Figure 4-5 GPROC module

418

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Redundant KSW/DSW2 replacement

Redundant KSW/DSW2 replacement

Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing redundant kiloport switches (KSWs/DSW2s). NOTE The procedures given in this chapter can be applied to both KSW and DSW2 module replacement. In the text, read KSW as DSW2 as appropriate.

Prerequisites
Connect a local maintenance terminal (LMT) before performing this procedure. Motorola recommends connecting the LMT to the TTY port of the master GPROC. However, if the master is unavailable, an LMT can connect to any available GPROC. Refer to Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT) in Chapter 2 for instructions. NOTE If an LMT is unavailable, the OMC must enter all MMI commands.

Illustration
Figure 4-6 shows a sample KSW board.

ALARM LED (RED) NORMALLY OFF ACTIVE LED (GREEN) NORMALLY ON

RESET/DISABLE SWITCH UP (MOMENTARY) = RESET MIDDLE = NORMAL OPERATION DOWN = DISABLE

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

ig.205.rh

Figure 4-6 KSW board

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

419

GMR-04

Redundant KSW/DSW2 replacement

GSM-100-533

Procedure
Follow these steps to replace a redundant KSW. CAUTION Module replacement may cause system down time.

NOTE If an LMT is unavailable, the OMC must enter this command. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. In a TTY window, enter the swap_device command to tell the software to switch to the replacement KSW (A/B). In a TTY window, enter the lock_device command to take the faulty KSW out-of-service (OOS). Set the RESET/DISABLE switch down to the DISABLE position to disable the faulty KSW. Remove the faulty KSW. Insert the replacement KSW. Set the RESET/DISABLE switch to the NORMAL OPERATION (middle) position. In a TTY window, enter the equip_device command to equip the replacement KSW. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the replacement KSW in-service (INS).

420

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Non-redundant KSW module replacement

Non-redundant KSW module replacement

Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing nonredundant kiloport switches (KSWs/DSW2s). NOTE The procedures given in this chapter can be applied to both KSW and DSW2 module replacement. In the text, read KSW as DSW2 as appropriate.

Prerequisites
Connect a local maintenance terminal (LMT) before performing this procedure. Motorola recommends connecting the LMT to the TTY port of the master GPROC/GPROC2. However, if the master is unavailable, an LMT can connect to any available GPROC/GPROC2. NOTE If an LMT is unavailable, the OMC must enter all MMI commands.

Illustration
Figure 4-6 shows a sample KSW board.

Procedure
Follow these steps to replace the KSW. CAUTION Module replacement may cause a short SITE outage when KSWs are switched. 1. Insert the replacement KSW into an empty KSW slot. NOTE If an LMT is unavailable, the OMC must enter the following commands. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. In a TTY window, enter the equip_device command to equip the replacement KSW. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the replacement KSW in-service (INS). In a TTY window, enter the swap_device command to tell the software to switch to the replacement KSW (A/B). In a TTY window, enter the lock_device command to take the faulty KSW out-of-service (OOS). Set the RESET/DISABLE switch down to the DISABLE position to disable the faulty KSW.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

421

GMR-04

Non-redundant KSW module replacement

GSM-100-533

7.

Remove the faulty KSW.

422

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Redundant KSWX module replacement

Redundant KSWX module replacement

Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing redundant kiloport switch and double kiloport switch extender (KSWX and DSWX) modules NOTE The procedures given in this chapter can be applied to both KSWX and DSWX module replacement. In the text, read KSWX as DSWX as appropriate.

CAUTION Module replacement will cause the site to self-reset. It is recommended that network appropriate action be implemented to minimize the effects of the reset when the KSWXs are switched.

Illustration
Figure 4-7 shows a typical KSWX module.

FIBRE OPTIC INPUT FROM ANOTHER KSWX FIBRE OPTIC INPUT FROM CLKX FIBRE OPTIC OUTPUT TO ANOTHER KSWX BACKPLANE CONNECTOR LED (GREEN)

RESET/DISABLE SWITCH

Figure 4-7 Kiloport switch extender (KSWX) module

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

423

GMR-04

Redundant KSWX module replacement

GSM-100-533

LED indications
The indications for the redundant and non-redundant KSWX are shown in Table 4-2. Table 4-2 LED indications LED (Green) Lit Action KSWX in local slot and KSWX is master and KSWX is receiving clocks from the fibre port and No GCLK alarms and No TDM receive violations from the fibre port and KSW not present or KSWX in local slot and KSWX is master and KSWX is receiving clocks from the fibre port and No GCLK alarms and KSW is present or KSWX in remote or expansion slot and No GCLK alarms and No TDM receive violations from the fibre port

Flashing

KSWX in local slot and KSWX is slave and KSWX is receiving clocks from the fibre port and No GCLK alarms and No TDM receive violations from the fibre port and KSW not present or KSWX in local slot and KSWX is slave and KSWX is receiving clocks from the fibre port and No GCLK alarms and KSW is present

OFF

When any of the lit or flashing criteria are not present or no power to the card

424

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Redundant KSWX module replacement

Replacing KSWX A and B

Follow these step to replace a KSWX A or KSWX B. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Take network appropriate actions to use KSWX B modules only or KSWX A modules only. The set that do not contain the the faulty KSWX are to be used. Disconnect the fibre optic cables from the faulty KSWX. Remove the faulty KSWX. Install the replacement KSWX in the slot from which the faulty KSWX was removed. Reconnect all fibre optic cables. If required, take network appropriate actions to restore KSWX usage back to the set from which the faulty module was removed. NOTE The fibre optic cables used with the KSWX cards to extend/expand the TDM highway, from one BSU/RXU to another BSU/RXU, must be of the same length. This allows correct operation of the TDM highway to be maintained.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

425

GMR-04

Non-redundant KSWX module replacement

GSM-100-533

Non-redundant KSWX module replacement

Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing non-redundant kiloport switch and double kiloport switch extender (KSWX and DSWX) modules NOTE The procedures given in this chapter can be applied to both KSWX and DSWX module replacement. In the text, read KSWX as DSWX as appropiate.

Illustration and indications

A board view of the redundant module is shown in Figure 4-7 and the LED indications in Table 4-2

Procedure
Follow these steps to replace a non-redundant kiloport switch extender module. 1. 2. 3. 4. Disconnect all fibre optic cables from the faulty KSWX. Remove the faulty KSWX. Install the replacement KSWX in the slot from which the fault KSWX was removed. Reconnect all fibre optic cables. NOTE The fibre optic cables used with the KSWX cards to extend/expand the TDM highway, from one BSU/RXU to another BSU/RXU, must be of the same length. This allows correct operation of the TDM highway to be maintained.

426

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Redundant LANX replacement

Redundant LANX replacement

Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing redundant local area network extender (LANX) cards. There are two sets of instructions: S S Replacing the LANX associated with the active LAN. Replacing the LANX associated with the standby LAN.

Follow the instructions that fit the situation.

Prerequisites
Connect a local maintenance terminal (LMT) before replacing this module. Motorola recommends connecting the LMT to the TTY port of the master GPROC. However, if the master is unavailable, an LMT can connect to any available GPROC. Refer to Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT) in Chapter 2 for instructions. NOTE If an LMT is unavailable, the OMC must enter all MMI commands.

Replacing the LANX associated with the active LAN

Follow these steps to replace the LANX card for the active LAN. CAUTION Module replacement will cause system down time. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. In a TTY window, enter the swap_device command to tell the software to use the standby LAN. Disconnect all fibre optic cables from the faulty LANX card. Remove the LANX card. Install the replacement LANX card in the slot from which the faulty LANX card was removed. Reconnect all fibre optic cables. Wait about 30 seconds. Enter the state command to verify that one LAN device is busy and unlocked (active) and one LAN is enabled and unlocked (standby). Enter the swap_device command to swap the active LAN back to standby and the replacement LAN to active.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

427

GMR-04

Redundant LANX replacement

GSM-100-533

Replacing the LANX associated with the standby LAN

Follow these steps to replace the LANX card for the standby LAN. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Disconnect all the fibre optic cables from the faulty LANX card. Remove the LANX card. Install the replacement LANX card in the slot from which the faulty LANX card was removed. Reconnect all fibre optic cables. Wait about 30 seconds. Enter the state command to verify that one LAN device is busy and unlocked (active) and one LAN is enabled and unlocked (standby) NOTE It may take the system up to 30 seconds to bring the standby LAN back in-service (INS).

428

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Non-redundant LANX replacement

Non-redundant LANX replacement

Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing non-redundant local area network extender (LANX) cards. LANA bus is controlled by the local area network extender module (LANX) module in upper slot 20 of the digital module shelf. LANB bus is controlled by the LANX module in upper slot 19 of the digital module shelf.

Procedure
Follow these steps to replace a non-redundant LANX module. CAUTION Module replacement will cause system down time. 1. 2. 3. 4. Disconnect all fibre optic cables from the faulty LANX card. Remove the faulty LANX card. Install the replacement LANX card in the slot from which the faulty LANX card was removed. Reconnect all the fibre optic cables.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

429

GMR-04

MSI and MSI-2 replacement

GSM-100-533

MSI and MSI-2 replacement

Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing the Multiple Serial Interface (MSI) module and the Multiple Serial Interface 2 (MSI2) module. The term MSI is used generically for MSI and MSI-2 modules, except where indicated.

Non-redundant systems
The following table shows the effects of replacing MSI boards in non-redundant systems. If the MSI being replaced... can still carry some channel traffic cannot carry any channel traffic Then... capacity for all associated 2.048/1.544 Mbit/s links is lost during MSI replacement. no other ill effects will be noticed

Redundant systems
MSI replacement should be transparent to the user in a redundant system.

Illustration
Figure 4-8 shows a typical MSI board.

ALARM LED (RED) NORMALLY OFF ACTIVE LED (GREEN) NORMALLY ON

RESET/DISABLE SWITCH UP (MOMENTARY) = RESET MIDDLE = NORMAL OPERATION DOWN = DISABLE

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

Figure 4-8 Multiple serial interface (MSI) module

430

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

MSI and MSI-2 replacement

Procedure
Follow these steps to replace an MSI board. 1. Set up a local maintenance terminal (LMT) at the TTY port of a GPROC. Refer to Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT) in Chapter 2 for instructions. Motorola recommends connecting the LMT to the TTY port of the master GPROC. However, if the master is unavailable, an LMT can connect to any available GPROC. NOTE If an LMT is unavailable the OMC must invoke all MMI commands. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Enter the lock_device command to take the MSI out of service (OOS). Set the RESET/DISABLE switch down to the DISABLE position to disable the faulty MSI board. Remove the faulty MSI board. Install the replacement MSI board in the slot from which the faulty MSI board was removed. Set the RESET/DISABLE switch to reset, then back to the NORMAL OPERATION position to bring the board into normal operating mode. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the MSI board back in-service (INS).

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

431

GMR-04

XCDR replacement

GSM-100-533

XCDR replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing a transcoder module (XCDR).

Non-redundant Systems
The following table shows the effects of replacing XCDR boards in non-redundant systems. If the XCDR being replaced... can still carry some channel traffic... Then... capacity for all E1/T links is lost during XCDR replacement.

cannot carry any channel traffic... no other ill effects will be noticed

Redundant Systems
XCDR replacement should be transparent to the system in a redundant system.

Illustration
Figure 4-9 shows a typical transcoder module.

ALARM LED (RED) NORMALLY OFF ACTIVE LED (GREEN) NORMALLY ON

RESET/DISABLE SWITCH UP (MOMENTARY) = RESET MIDDLE = NORMAL OPERATION DOWN = DISABLE

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

Figure 4-9 XCDR module

432

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

XCDR replacement

Procedure
Follow these steps to replace a transcoder board. 1. Set up a local maintenance terminal (LMT) and connect it to the TTY port of a GPROC. Refer to Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT) in Chapter 2 for instructions. Motorola recommends connecting the LMT to the TTY port of the master GPROC. However, if the master is unavailable, an LMT can connect to any available GPROC. NOTE If an LMT is unavailable the OMC must invoke all MMI commands. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. In a TTY window, enter the lock_device command to take the XCDR card out of service (OOS). Set the front panel switch down to the DISABLE position to disable the faulty XCDR card. Remove the faulty XCDR card. Install the replacement XCDR card in the slot from which the faulty XCDR card was removed. Set the front panel switch to the NORMAL OPERATION (middle) position. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the XCDR back in service (INS). NOTE If replacing an XCDR module with a GDP module, as an upgrade, the OMC requires command changes to recognize and use the different module. Ensure the OMC has made these changes before upgrading an XCDR module with a GDP module.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

433

GMR-04

GDP/GDP2 replacement

GSM-100-533

GDP/GDP2 replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing a Generic DSP Processor (GDP/GDP2) module when used as an XCDR. NOTE The procedures given in this section can be used for both GDP and GDP2 replacement. In the text, read GDP as GDP2 where appropriate.

NOTE The GDP has two configured types, one for E1 serial line use and one for T1 serial line use. Each GDP type has a different framer/transceiver with accompanying crystal oscillator, and two associated resistors. This means that a GDP used for E1 serial line use cannot be used for T1, and a GDP used for T1 serial line use cannot be used for E1. If a GDP2 is retrospectively installed in a BSSC2 installation, it supports a single E1 line interface.

Non-redundant Systems
The following table shows the effects of replacing GDP boards in non-redundant systems. If the GDP being replaced... can still carry some channel traffic... Then... capacity for all E1/T1 links is lost during GDP replacement.

cannot carry any channel traffic... no other ill effects will be noticed

Redundant Systems
GDP replacement should be transparent to the system in a redundant system, as long as all traffic has been routed away from the board to be replaced.

434

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

GDP/GDP2 replacement

Illustration
Figure 4-10 shows a typical GDP module.

ALARM LED (RED) NORMALLY OFF ACTIVE LED (GREEN) NORMALLY ON

RESET/DISABLE SWITCH UP (MOMENTARY) = RESET MIDDLE = NORMAL OPERATION DOWN = DISABLE

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

Figure 4-10 GDP module

Procedure
Follow these steps to replace a GDP transcoder module. 1. Set up a local maintenance terminal (LMT) and connect it to the TTY port of a GPROC. Refer to Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT) in Chapter 2 for instructions. Motorola recommends connecting the LMT to the TTY port of the master GPROC. However, if the master is unavailable, an LMT can connect to any available GPROC. NOTE If an LMT is unavailable the OMC-R must invoke all MMI commands. 2. 3. 4. 5. In a TTY window, enter the lock_device command to take the GDP card out of service (OOS). Set the front panel switch down to the DISABLE position to disable the faulty GDP card. Remove the faulty GDP card. Install the replacement GDP card in the slot from which the faulty GDP card was removed.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

435

GMR-04

GDP/GDP2 replacement

GSM-100-533

6. 7.

Set the front panel switch to the NORMAL OPERATION (middle) position. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the replacement GDP card in-service (INS). NOTE If replacing an XCDR module with a GDP module, as an upgrade, the OMC requires command changes to recognize and use the different module. Ensure the OMC has made these changes before upgrading an XCDR module with a GDP module.

436

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

NVM replacement

NVM replacement
Overview
This section contains the information required to replace a faulty NVM board. CAUTION Do Not remove the PCMCIA card from faulty NVM boards being returned to Motorola for repair. The returned unit must comprise the NVM board with PCMCIA card installed.

NOTE Notify the OMC-R before carrying out the following replacement procedures.

Diagnosing faults on the NVM board

Fault diagnosis is limited to viewing the front panel LEDs and ensuring that the switches are set to the correct positions for normal operation.

Replacing the NVM board

Carry out the following procedure to replace a faulty NVM board. This procedure assumes that the BSC/RXCDR is already initialized. CAUTION The NVM board contains devices that are sensitive to static. A suitable earth strap must be worn when handling the module. 1. 2. 3. 4. Set the RESET/DISABLE switch to the DISABLE position. When the red ALARM LED illuminates, remove the NVM board from the slot in the cage. Set the RESET/DISABLE switch on the new NVM board to DISABLE and then insert the board into the slot, ensuring that it locks firmly into the backplane. Move the RESET/DISABLE switch up to the RESET position and release. Once the software recognizes the NVM board, the the red ALARM LED extinguishes and the green ACTIVE LED illuminates to show that the NVM board is operational. When the software recognizes the PCMCIA card in slot 1, the green CARD 1 STATUS LED illuminates to show that the PCMCIA card is operational. The procedure for replacing the NVM board is now complete.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

437

GMR-04

NVM replacement

GSM-100-533

Front panel controls and indicators

Figure 4-11 shows the detail of the front panel controls and indicators on the NVM board.

NVM BOARD STATUS LEDs

NVM BOARD RESET/DISABLE SWITCH PCMCIA CARD STATUS LEDs

PCMCIA CARD EJECT BUTTON (See Note 1)

PCMCIA CARD SLOTS

NOTES 1. Do not use the PCMCIA card eject button. This feature is not currently supported. Do not use the PCMCIA CARD SWAP switch. This feature is not currently supported.

PCMCIA CARD SWAP SWITCH (See Note 2)

2.

Figure 4-11 Front panel controls and indicators on the NVM board

438

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

PIX replacement

PIX replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing a parallel interface extender (PIX) board in an external alarm system.

Illustration
Figure 4-12 shows a PIX board.

ALARM LED (GREEN) ON = NO ALARMS DETECTED OFF = CUSTOMER ALARM DETECTED

CONNECTOR IS CABLED TO TOP OF CABINET FOR CONNECTION TO CUSTOMER SITE EQUIPMENT

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

ig.240.rh

Figure 4-12 PIX board

Replacing the PIX

Follow these steps to replace a PIX board. CAUTION Replacing this module may trigger false customer alarms. 1. 2. 3. 4. Disconnect interconnect cable from the front of the faulty PIX card. Remove the faulty PIX card. Install the replacement PIX card in the slot from which the faulty PIX card was removed. Reconnect the interconnect cable to the front of the PIX card.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

439

GMR-04

Power supply module replacement

GSM-100-533

Power supply module replacement

Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing power supply modules. These are two sets of instructions: S S Replacing a non-redundant power supply module. Replacing a redundant power supply module.

Applications
This procedure applies to all of the various power supply modules used in Motorola BSC cabinets, including: S S S DPSMs. EPSMs. IPSMs.

Illustration
Figure 4-13 shows the DPSM:

GND (EARTH FOR +5 V OUTPUT) GND (EARTH FOR +5 V OUTPUT) +5 V +5 V

REAR VIEW

25-PIN D-TYPE CONNECTOR (FEMALE)

ACTIVE LED (GREEN): ON WHEN ALL OUTPUT VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT AND WITHIN TOLERANCE. CGND (CHASSIS EARTH) VINA (0 V INPUT) VINA + (+27 V INPUT)

ALARM LED (RED): ON WHEN ONE OR MORE ALARM CONDITIONS EXIST. OFF WHEN NO ALARM CONDITION EXISTS.

ig.242.rh

Figure 4-13 DPSM The other power supply modules are very similar in outward appearance. LED position may differ.
440

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Power supply module replacement

Replacing a non-redundant power supply module

Follow these steps to replace a non-redundant power supply module NOTE If the shelf served by the faulty power supply module is still operational, module replacement should be transparent to the system.

CAUTION Do not mix power supply modules; for example, if a cabinet is equipped with DPSMs, do not try to insert any other type of power supply module. Always replace a power supply module with the same type of module! 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the air baffle from the unused slot. Install the replacement power supply module in the empty slot. Remove the faulty power supply module. Re-install the air baffle in the slot from which the faulty power supply module was removed.

Replacing a redundant power supply module

Follow these steps to replace a redundant power supply module: NOTE If the shelf served by the faulty power supply module is still operational, module replacement should be transparent to the system. 1. 2. Remove the faulty power supply module. Install the replacement power supply module in the empty slot from which the fault DPSM was removed in the previous step.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

441

GMR-04

Power supply module replacement

GSM-100-533

442

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

Chapter 5

Miscellaneous repair

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

ii

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Chapter 5 Miscellaneous repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Miscellaneous repair procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Obtaining replacement authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing and replacing a circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a bus terminator card (BTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Obtaining replacement authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-redundant KSWs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant KSWs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the alarm board (DAB/PAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing a new board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement of PDB and AIB boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDB removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDB installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIB removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIB installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the BSU digital cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Obtaining replacement authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
51 51 51 52 52 52 52 53 54 54 54 54 54 55 56 56 58 58 58 510 510 510 510 511 512 513 513 513 513 514 515 515 516 517 517 517 517 518 519 521 523 523 523 523 524

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

iii

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

iv

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Miscellaneous repair procedures

Miscellaneous repair procedures

Introduction
This chapter contains instructions for removing and replacing various components, including: S S Circuit breakers. Bus terminator cards.

Failure of these items is unusual. Usually, replacement of any of these items is first recommended by Motorola, through its local offices, and may recommend these procedures. They also may require parts or supplies that are not part of the normal repair equipment.

Obtaining replacement authorization

Several of these replacement procedures require authorization or special parts from Motorola. The replaceable modules are not part of standard replacement kit. Contact the local Motorola office BEFORE attempting to replace these modules.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

51

GMR-04

Removing and replacing a circuit breaker

GSM-100-533

Removing and replacing a circuit breaker

Overview
This section contains instructions for: S S Removing a circuit breaker. Replacing a circuit breaker.

Indications
Circuit breakers are durable pieces of equipment. If a circuit breaker trips, it can usually be reset by setting it up to the ON position. However, sometimes a circuit breaker may not be able to be reset. That is, the circuit breaker switch will not click into the ON position, or will not engage. In these cases the circuit breaker is broken. The broken circuit breaker must be removed and a new one installed in its place.

Removing a circuit breaker

Follow these steps to remove a circuit breaker. 1. 2. Reroute all traffic to an unaffected cabinet. Switch off all dc power supplies to the cabinet before removing and replacing circuit breakers. WARNING The external dc power supplies must be OFF during circuit breaker removal or installation. 3. 4. Open the cabinet door and locate the Power Distribution Unit (PDU) at the top of the cabinet. Open the PDU cover to expose the circuit breakers and the Distribution Alarm Board (DAB). NOTE The DAB is located on the right side of the PDU. 5. 6. Remove all four M4 x 8 screws, and remove the circuit breaker cover. Grasp the faulty circuit breaker and pull it outward, away from the cabinet until the circuit breaker disengages from the mounting buses.

52

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Removing and replacing a circuit breaker

Installing a circuit breaker

Follow these steps to install a circuit breaker. 1. 2. 3. 4. Check the circuit breaker to make sure it is the correct type and rating. Install the circuit breaker. Verify the breaker engages the mounting buses correctly and push the circuit breaker firmly into place. Refit the circuit breaker cover. Step a. b. 5. 6. 7. 8. Action Install the four M4 x 8 screws that secure the circuit breaker cover. Torque the hex standoffs to 2.2 Nm.

Close the PDU cover. Close the cabinet door. Reconnect dc power to the cabinet if necessary. Switch on all dc power supplies to the cabinet.

It may be necessary to re-initialized the site after installing new circuit breakers and re-applying power to the cabinet. Refer to Resetting and re-initializing a site in Chapter 2 for more information.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

53

GMR-04

Replacing a bus terminator card (BTC)

GSM-100-533

Replacing a bus terminator card (BTC)

Overview
NOTE If DSW2 modules have been installed retrospectively in a BSSC installation, read KSW, as DSW2 where appropriate throughout this section. There are only two bus terminator cards (BTC) fitted in a shelf. There are no redundant BTCs to come into service when a BTC is removed. However, a BTC can be fitted into the KSW cards position, which is adjacent to the faulty BTC, to maintain the bus. Consequently BTC replacement procedures are split into two groups: non-redundant KSWs and redundant KSWs.

Obtaining replacement authorization

These procedures require authorization or special parts from Motorola. The replaceable modules are not part of standard replacement kit. Contact the local Motorola office BEFORE attempting to replace this module.

Non-redundant KSWs
Follow the appropriate procedure relating to, a particular situation with, conditions as stipulated in the table.

Conditions
There are 5 sets of conditions producing variants of the procedure to replace a BTC in a shelf with a non-redundant KSW. Follow the appropriate procedure relating to the situation and conditions, from procedures 1 to 5 inclusive. Procedure 5 lists the steps required to replace a BTC in a shelf with a redundant KSW. If these conditions apply: S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
54

Follow the steps in: Procedure 1.

Replacing BTC 0 (left side). KSW A is in the shelf. Spare KSW and BTC are available Replacing BTC 0 (left side). KSW B is in the shelf. A spare BTC is available. Replacing BTC 1 (right side). KSW B is in the shelf. Spare KSW and BTC are available. Replacing BTC 1 (right side). KSW A is in the shelf. A spare BTC is available. Replacing BTC 0 or BTC 1. A redundant KSW is in the shelf.

Procedure 2.

Procedure 3.

Procedure 4.

Procedure 5.

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Replacing a bus terminator card (BTC)

Procedure 1
Follow these steps to replace BTC 0 when: S S KSW A is in the shelf. A spare KSW and BTC are available.

This Procedure contains three sub-procedures: S S S Preparing the cabinet Replacing the BTC Restoring the cabinet NOTE Module replacement should be transparent to the system. The system retains as much system functionality as possible.

Preparing the cabinet

Follow these steps to prepare the cabinet for BTC replacement. 1. 2. Insert a spare KSW into the empty slot 1 (KSW B). Connect an LMT, if one is not already available. Refer to Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT), in Chapter 2 for instructions. 3. 4. In a TTY window, enter the equip_device command to equip the spare KSW. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the spare KSW in-service (INS).

Replacing the BTC

Follow these steps to replace the BTC. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Enter the swap_device command to inform the software to switch to KSW B. Disable KSW A in slot 27 using its front panel switch and remove KSW A. Insert the spare BTC into slot 27. Remove the covers from the module extractor tabs located on the front of BTC 0 in slot 28 and remove BTC 0. Insert the replacement BTC into slot 28 (BTC 0) and refit the extractor tabs.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

55

GMR-04

Replacing a bus terminator card (BTC)

GSM-100-533

Restoring the cabinet

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the spare BTC from slot 27. Re-insert KSW A into slot 27. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring KSW A in-service (INS). In a TTY window, enter the swap_device command to inform the software to switch back to KSW A. Remove the spare KSW B from slot 1.

Procedure 2
Follow these steps to replace BTC 0 when: S S KSW B is in the shelf. A spare BTC is available. NOTE Module replacement should be transparent to the system. The system retains as much system functionality as possible. 1. 2. 3. 4. Insert a spare BTC into the empty slot 27 (KSW A). Remove the covers from the module extractor tabs located on the front of BTC 0 in slot 28 and remove BTC 0. Insert the replacement BTC into slot 28 (BTC 0) and refit the extractor tabs. Remove the spare BTC from slot 27.

Procedure 3
Follow these steps to replace BTC 1 when: S S KSW B is in the shelf. A spare KSW and BTC are available.

This Procedure contains three sub-procedures: S S S Preparing the cabinet. Replacing the BTC. Restoring the cabinet. NOTE Module replacement should be transparent to the system. The system retains as much system functionality as possible.

56

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Replacing a bus terminator card (BTC)

Preparing the cabinet

Follow these steps to prepare the cabinet for BTC replacement. 1. 2. Insert a spare KSW into the empty slot 27 (KSW A). Connect an LMT, if one is not already available. Refer to Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT), in Chapter 2 for instructions. 3. 4. In a TTY window, enter the equip_device command to equip the spare KSW. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the spare KSW in-service (INS).

Replacing the BTC

Follow these steps to replace the BTC. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Enter the swap_device command to inform the software to switch to KSW A. In a TTY window, enter the lock_device command to take KSW B out-of-service (OOS). Disable KSW B in slot 1 using its front panel switch and remove KSW B. Insert the spare BTC into slot 1. Remove the covers from the module extractor tabs located on the front of BTC 1 in slot 0 and remove BTC 1. Insert the replacement BTC into slot 0 (BTC 1) and refit the extractor tabs.

Restoring the cabinet

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the spare BTC from slot 1. Re-insert KSW B into slot 1. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring KSW B in-service (INS). In a TTY window, enter the swap_device command to inform the software to switch back to KSW B. Remove the spare KSW A from slot 27.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

57

GMR-04

Replacing a bus terminator card (BTC)

GSM-100-533

Procedure 4
Follow these steps to replace BTC 1 when: S S KSW A is in the shelf. A spare BTC is available. NOTE Module replacement should be transparent to the system. The system retains as much system functionality as possible. 1. 2. 3. 4. Insert a spare BTC into the empty slot 1 (KSW B). Remove the covers from the module extractor tabs located on the front of BTC 1 in slot 0 and remove BTC 1. Insert the replacement BTC into slot 0 (BTC 1) and refit the extractor tabs. Remove the spare BTC from slot 1.

Redundant KSWs
The following procedure details the steps to follow when replacing a faulty BTC, in a shelf configured with a redundant KSW card. NOTE Module replacement should be transparent to the system. The system retains as much system functionality as possible.

Procedure 5
Follow these steps to replace BTC 0 or BTC 1 when: S S Both KSW A and KSW B are installed and configured. A spare BTC is available.

This procedure contains three sub-procedures: S S S Preparing the cabinet. Replacing the BTC. Restoring the cabinet.

Preparing the cabinet

1. Connect an LMT, if one is not already available. Refer to Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT), in Chapter 2 for instructions. 2. 3. If necessary, in a TTY window enter the swap_devices command to make the KSW, adjacent to the faulty BTC card, redundant. In a TTY window, enter the lock_devices command to take the redundant KSW card out-of-service (OOS). Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O
29 Aug 1997

58

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Replacing a bus terminator card (BTC)

Replacing the BTC

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Disable the redundant KSW card using its front panel switch and remove it from the shelf. Insert the spare BTC card into the vacant slot. Remove the covers from the module extractor tabs located on the front of the faulty BTC card and remove it from the shelf. Insert the replacement BTC card and refit the extractor tabs. Remove the spare BTC card installed in step 2. Refit the KSW card removed in step 1, ensuring the front panel switch is set to the NORMAL OPERATING position.

Restoring the cabinet

1. 2. 3. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the KSW in-service (INS). If necessary, enter the swap_devices command to make the refitted KSW the master for the shelf. Disconnect the LMT, connected in step 1 of Preparing the cabinet subprocedure.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

59

GMR-04

Replacing the alarm board (DAB/PAB)

GSM-100-533

Replacing the alarm board (DAB/PAB)

Introduction
This section explains how to replace a distribution alarm board (DAB). The removal and replacement procedures are also applicable for replacing the power alarm board (PAB).

Background
Under some circumstances, the alarm board in a BSSC cabinet may fail. In these circumstances it is necessary to replace the faulty board. Although alarm boards can be replaced in the field, they are not considered field replaceable boards. Replacing an alarm board is an extraordinary action which requires consultation with and authorization from the local Motorola office and the CNRC. Contact the local Motorola office before attempting to replace a DAB/PAB!

Precautions
Follow these precautions when removing or replacing the DAB and PAB: S Contact the local Motorola office for advice and authorization BEFORE attempting this procedure. WARNING Disconnect the external power supply from the cabinet before commencing this procedure. Hazardous voltages may remain inside the cabinet after power is disconnected. Remove all watches, rings and other jewelry before commencing work. S S Switch off all power to the cabinet. If possible, disconnect the power cables from the top of the cabinet. Do not cross input cables. Some of the cable links use similar connectors and it is possible to cross the cables when reconnecting. Label the cables, if necessary, to prevent mistakes during reconnection. S Use care when connecting and disconnecting cables. Some of the connectors are fragile. Note how the connectors fit, and pull or push them gently.

510

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Replacing the alarm board (DAB/PAB)

Removing the board

Follow these steps to remove a DAB or PAB: 1. Switch off the power to the cabinet. WARNING Disconnect the external power supply from the cabinet before commencing this procedure. Hazardous voltages may remain inside the cabinet after power is disconnected. Remove all watches, rings and other jewelry before commencing work. 2. Disconnect the various connectors from the board. There are several different types of cable connectors. A PAB will have the same physical dimensions as a DAB, securing to the cabinet in the same way and have similar connectors to remove. A diagram of a PAB can be found in category 333 under PAB. Figure 5-1 shows a DAB with cable connectors identified.
SCREW SCREW

SCREW

DIP SWITCHES

SCREW

Figure 5-1 Distribution alarm board 3. Loosen the screws that secure the board. The alarm board is held in place by four black Phillips head captive screws (screws which do not come out of the board). 4. Pull the board GENTLY away from the cabinet. The board may be firmly anchored to the cabinet. Make sure all the screws have been loosened fully. CAUTION Be careful when pulling on the alarm board. Try to pull from both ends, rather than from the middle of the board. If possible, try to rock the board free.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

511

GMR-04

Replacing the alarm board (DAB/PAB)

GSM-100-533

5.

Place the removed board to one side.

512

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Replacing the alarm board (DAB/PAB)

Installing a new board

Follow these steps to install the new alarm board: 1. Set the DIP switches on the new board to reflect the settings of the DIP switches on the removed faulty board. NOTE DIP switches are only present on a DAB. A PAB is configured with jumper settings. The jumpers must be configured on the replacement PAB to reflect the settings on the removed faulty PAB. 2. Line up the 0 V and +27 V posts on the new board with the input ports in the cabinet. Make sure the various cables are not positioned behind the board or obstructing the board. NOTE 0 V and +27 V posts are only found on the DAB. 3. 4. 5. 6. Press the board into the cabinet until it seats firmly into position. Tighten the screws until they are firm, to secure the board in the cabinet. Connect the cables removed in step 2 of Removing the board. Restore power to the cabinet.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

513

GMR-04

Replacement of PDB and AIB boards

GSM-100-533

Replacement of PDB and AIB boards

Introduction
This section explains how to remove and replace a power distribution board (PDB) and an alarm interface board (AIB). Removal and replacement procedures are detailed separately.

Background
Under some extraordinary circumstances, the PDB board and/or AIB board in a BSSC cabinet may fail. In these circumstances it is necessary to replace the faulty board. Although PDB and AIB boards can be replaced in the field, they are not considered field replaceable boards. Replacing PDB and AIB boards is an extraordinary action which requires consultation with and authorization from the local Motorola office and the CNRC. Contact the local Motorola office before attempting to replace a PDB or AIB board!

Precautions
Follow these precautions when replacing PDB and AIB boards: S Contact the local Motorola office for advice and authorization BEFORE attempting this procedure. WARNING Disconnect the external power supply from the cabinet before commencing this procedure. Hazardous voltages may remain inside the cabinet after power is disconnected. Remove all watches, rings and other jewelry before commencing work. S S Switch off all power to the cabinet. If possible, disconnect the power cables from the top of the cabinet. Do not cross input cables. Some of the cable links use similar connectors and it is possible to cross the cables when reconnecting. Label the cables, if necessary, to prevent mistakes during reconnection. S Use care when connecting and disconnecting cables. Some of the connectors are fragile. Note how the connectors fit, and pull or push them gently.

514

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Replacement of PDB and AIB boards

PDB removal
Follow these steps to remove a PDB board: 1. Switch off the power to the cabinet. WARNING Disconnect the external power supply from the cabinet before commencing this procedure. Hazardous voltages may remain inside the cabinet after power is disconnected. Remove all watches, rings and other jewelry before commencing work. 2. Disconnect connectors PC1, PC3, PC5, PC6, PC7 and PC8. There are several different types of cable connectors so correct reconnection is ensured. Figure 5-2 shows a PDB with cable connectors identified.
GND POSTS

+ 27 V POSTS

Figure 5-2 PDB board 3. Remove the plastic butterfly nuts from the + 27 V posts, and take off the plastic safety cover and stand-offs. The butterfly nuts attach to the stand-offs securing the plastic safety cover to the board. 4. Loosen and remove the nuts that secure the board, and remove the metal retaining bracket from GND posts. The PDB board is held in place by six nuts secured on to six brass threaded posts. The three uppermost posts provide the GND connection for the board, with the three lower posts providing the + 27 V connection. 5. Remove the final two connectors, PC2 and PC4.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

515

GMR-04

Replacement of PDB and AIB boards

GSM-100-533

6.

Pull the board GENTLY away from the cabinet. CAUTION Be careful when pulling on the alarm board. Try to pull from both ends, rather than from the middle of the board. If possible, try to rock the board free.

7.

Place the removed board to one side.

516

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Replacement of PDB and AIB boards

PDB installation
Follow these steps to install a replacement PDB board: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Line up the GND and + 27 V positions with the threaded brass posts on the cabinet. Press the board into the cabinet until it seats firmly into position, being careful to make sure no cables are positioned behind or are obstructing the board. Fit connectors PC2 and PC4. Position the metal retaining bracket over the brass GND posts, and fit and tighten the six nuts on to the six brass posts, securing the board in to the cabinet. Fit the plastic safety cover over the + 27 V posts using the stand-offs and butterfly nuts to secure it. Reconnect the connectors removed in step 2 of PDB removal (PC1, PC3, PC5, PC6, PC7, PC8). Restore power to the cabinet.

AIB removal
Follow these steps to remove the AIB board: 1. Switch off power to the cabinet. WARNING Do not continue with this procedure until the cabinet power is off! 2. Disconnect all the connectors from the board. There are several different types of cable connectors. Figure 5-3 shows an AIB board with cable connectors identified.
PC3 Serial chip F2 F1 PC1 PC6 PC3 PC7
JU5

DS1 PC2 PC8

JU1

JU4

JU3

JU2

PC9

ig.249.rh

Figure 5-3 Alarm interface board 3. Loosen the screws that secure the board. The board is held in place by four Torx head screws.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

517

GMR-04

Replacement of PDB and AIB boards

GSM-100-533

4.

Pull the board GENTLY away from the cabinet. The board may be firmly anchored to the cabinet. Make sure all the screws have been loosened or removed.

5.

Place the removed board to one side.

AIB installation
Follow these steps to install a replacement AIB board: 1. 2. Ensure jumpers JU1 to JU5 are set to match the jumper settings on the AIB board removed in step 4 of AIB removal. Align the board correctly with the screw holes for the four retaining screws and press the board into the cabinet until it seats firmly into position. Make sure the various cables are not positioned behind the board or are obstructing the board. 3. 4. 5. Tighten the screws until they are firm, to secure the board in the cabinet. Connect the cables removed in step 2 of AIB removal. Restore the power to the cabinet.

518

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Replacing the BSU digital cage

Replacing the BSU digital cage

Introduction
Under certain extraordinary circumstances, it may be necessary to replace the entire BSU cage/backplane assembly within a cabinet. This procedure explains how to replace the digital cage. The procedure takes the cabinet out of service for about four hours. Motorola recommends performing this procedure during hours of low traffic if possible.

Prerequisites
NOTE Contact Motorola with any questions about this procedure. Replacing a cage is an extraordinary action. Therefore, these instructions assume the person(s) performing this procedure are experienced in all aspects of site maintenance. Motorola recommends reading through the entire procedure, including the various related texts and references, before attempting to perform it.

Tools and equipment

The following tools and equipment are necessary to remove and replace the backplane: S S S S S Torx drivers. Antistatic mat. Antistatic bags, or other containers suitable for storing digital boards, in quantities sufficient to store all the boards in the cages(s). An approved earth strap. Labels and marking pens.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

519

GMR-04

Replacing the BSU digital cage

GSM-100-533

Obtaining replacement authorization

The digital cage is very reliable. Replacement is only necessary in certain limited circumstances. Therefore, the Customer Network Resolution Centre (CNRC) Swindon must issue a Service Request (SR) before Motorola will accept a cage or backplane for return. The SR shows that CNRC agreed to the backplane replacement. NOTE Do not attempt to remove or replace a cage until CNRC authorizes such action.

Procedure
Follow these steps to obtain an SR number: 1. Call the CNRC on +44 (0)1793 565444. This is a British telephone number (44 is the country code for the United Kingdom). Prefix this number with the international access code if you are calling from outside the United Kingdom. 2. Describe the problem to the CNRC representative, and explain why cage replacement is indicated. Be prepared to describe: What alarms/events/SWFMs accompanied the problem. What diagnostic actions , if any, were taken, and the result of those actions. What repair actions, if any, were taken, and the result of those actions.

CNRC review
The CNRC will review the problem and the steps taken so far. Depending on this review, the CNRC may either: S S Suggest further tests or procedures before authorizing the cage replacement. Authorize replacing the cage, and issue an SR number. NOTE Do not attempt to remove or replace a cage until CNRC authorizes such action. If CNRC issues an SR number authorizing the cage replacement: S S Write the number down. Quote the SR number, in addition to the normal returns number, in any communications with Motorola. NOTE Motorola will not accept returned digital cages without an CNRC authorization.

520

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Replacing the BSU digital cage

Removing the cage

Overview
This section contains three separate procedures: S S S Preparing the cabinet explains how to set up the cabinet so that it is safe to work on the digital cage. Disassembling the cage explains how to take the digital cage apart. Removing the cage explains how to take the cage out of the cabinet.

Perform these procedures in order, beginning with Preparing the cabinet.

Preparing the cabinet

Follow these steps to prepare the cabinet for cage replacement. 1. Determine which cage(s) need replacing. It is probable that only one cage has a faulty backplane. Use the following table to determine the appropriate actions. If the faulty cage... does not contain the BSP... continue with step 2. i. Reset the BSC. Then:

contains the BSP...

* CAUTION Resetting the site stops call processing. Determine whether call processing is occurring before deciding to reset the site. Disable call processing at the site before continuing with this procedure. ii. Continue with step 2.

2.

Use the circuit breakers to disconnect power to the cage(s). WARNING Hazardous voltages exist inside a powered cabinet and may remain present after power is disconnected.. Exercise caution when working on the equipment and remove all watches, rings and other jewellery before commencing work. If both cages in a BSSC cabinet require replacement, proceed with step 3. If only one cage of a BSSC cabinet requires backplane replacement, leave the power connected to the other cage, and proceed with Disassembling the cage. Disabling one cage lets call processing continue, providing the second cage is independent of the first. However, it also means dc power is still present in the cabinet.

3.

Remove the supply voltage from the cabinet.

The cage is ready for disassembly.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

521

GMR-04

Replacing the BSU digital cage

GSM-100-533

Disassembling the cage

Follow these steps to disassemble the cage. CAUTION Wear an approved earth strap when handling digital modules. Use the antistatic mat and antistatic containers to store the digital modules. 1. Remove all the power supply modules in the cage. Follow the procedure in Power supply module replacement in Chapter 4. 2. Remove all digital full and half size modules from the cage. Put the digital modules into suitable antistatic packaging or storage containers. These modules will go back into the new backplane. 3. Disconnect the dc supply to the fan assembly that corresponds to the cage being replaced. Follow the procedure beginning in Chapter 4. 4. 5. 6. Unscrew the fan assembly and remove it from the BSU cage. Disconnect the dc supply at the bottom of the BSU cage. Disconnect the MSI and Alarm board cables, and label the cables so they can be reconnected properly. The cables are at the top of the BSU cage. CAUTION Do not drop any of the nuts or washers into the lower BSU cage. Loose nuts or washers can damage the cage and the components if the cage is still powered up. 7. Note their respective positions and disconnect any fibre optic cables fitted to the cages.

The cage is ready for removal.

Removing the cage

Follow these steps to remove the cage. 1. 2. Remove the eight front screws which attach the cage to the cabinet. Lift the BSU cage out and set it aside. WARNING The cage is heavy! S Lift the cage carefully, to avoid physical injury. S Set the cage down carefully, to avoid further damage to the cage, or any damage to the site.

522

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Replacing the BSU digital cage

Installing the cage

Replacing the cage
Follow these steps to replace the cage. WARNING The cage is heavy. S When heavy equipment is to be lifted, a responsible person must ensure that adequate lifting facilities are available. Do not attempt to lift heavy equipment on your own. S 1. 2. Set the cage down carefully, to avoid damage to the cage or site.

Lift the new cage / backplane assembly into the cabinet. Secure the cage in place with the eight front screws

Equipping the cage

Follow these steps to equip the new cage with power and digital modules. 1. Connect the MSI and Alarm board cables. The cables are at the top of the BSU cage. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Reconnect any fibre optic cables if the cage is extended or expanded to to other cages. Connect the dc supply at the bottom of the BSU cage. Insert the fan assembly, and secure it to the cabinet with the front four screws. Connect the dc supply to the fan assembly. Choose an action from the following table: If... The upper cage is being replaced... The lower cage is being replaced... 7. 8. Then... secure the front cover plate below the fan assembly, and continue with step 7. continue with step 7.

Insert all the digital full size and half size modules. Insert the power supply modules.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

523

GMR-04

Replacing the BSU digital cage

GSM-100-533

Restoring power
Follow these steps to restore dc power to the cabinet. 1. 2. 3. Connect the power supply to the top of the cabinet. Restore power to the cage(s) by resetting the circuit breakers. Observe the LEDs on all the power supply modules, and choose an action from the following table. Valid Input the green LED is lit on all the power supply modules... the red LED is lit on all the power supply modules... the red LED is lit on any power supply module... 4. Hard reset all the digital cards. IMPORTANT S Reset the GPROCs last. S Step a. b. Reset the GPROC in slot 20 last of all. Action: Flip the switch on each digital card up to the RESET position. Release the switch. Result: The board is taken out of service (OOS). The card resets automatically. Default continue with step 4. use Power supply module replacement in Chapter 4 to diagnose and correct the problem. Continue with step 4 when all the green LEDs are lit.

Checking connections
Follow these steps to check the connections between the new backplane and the rest of the system. 1. 2. Connect a Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) to the TTY port on the master GPROC. Verify the connection to the OMC. NOTE The site will take about one hour to code load and initialize. 3. Verify that all site Message Transfer Links (MTLs) and Operations and Maintenance Links (OMLs) are operational. To verify the MTLs, type: state 0 MTL x 0 0, where x is the MTL identifier. To verify the OML, type: state 0 OML x y 0, where x and y are the OML identifiers.
unlocked>.

The status for the MTL and the OML should be <busy, further diagnosis is necessary.
524

If it is not,

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Fan replacement procedure

Fan replacement procedure

Purpose
This section explains how to replace the BSU/RXU cage fans. Procedure 1 details the steps to replace older type fans (5901694E01) with the new (5902872W01) type fans. NOTE The old type fans are not available as replacement parts. This procedure should only be used to replace an old style fan with the new style fan. Procedure 2 details the steps to replace a BSU/RXU fan where only new type fans are involved. Old fan assemblies can be identified as they have grey painted aluminium grills and four nickel plated quarter-turn captive screws fitted in the corners of the grill. New fan assemblies have plastic grilles and four black plastic quarter-turn fixings. Table 5-1 lists the new fan assembly components. Table 5-1 Fan assembly components Item Fan guard front Fan and rear guard Screw Quantity 1 1 4 Part number 1502392W01 5902872W01 0310907C72

Tools and equipment

The following tools and equipment are required: S S S A T20 Torx driver. A cross head screwdriver. A flat blade screwdriver.

Procedure 1
Follow these steps to replace the older type fan unit, with the new fan unit:

Preparation
1. 2. Locate the faulty fan. Identify and remove the correct fuse for the faulty fan (a chart on the inside of the PDU door identifies the fuses).

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

525

GMR-04

Fan replacement procedure

GSM-100-533

Fan removal
1. 2. 3. 4. Use a cross head screwdriver to release the four quarter-turn fasteners that secure the fan to the shelf assembly. Grasp the fan and pull it outward away from the cabinet. Disconnect the fan power cable and remove the fan from the cabinet. Unscrew and remove the four M4 star head screws securing the grill onto the fan. A T20 Torx driver is required. 5. Discard the old fan.

Fan replacement
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Unscrew and remove the two M4 star head screws securing the plastic grill onto the new fan. Retain the fan, but discard the plastic grill and the fixing screws. Fit the metal grill to the new fan using the original screws. Connect the power cable to the new fan. Install the new fan in the cabinet. Using the cross head screwdriver, tighten the four quarter-turn fasteners that secure the fan to the shelf assembly.

Restoration
1. 2. Insert the fuse removed in step 2 and check the fan works correctly. Advise the OMC that the repair is complete and check that fuse and fan alarms at the OMC are cleared.

Procedure 2
Follow these steps to replace the new type fan unit:

Preparation
1. 2. Locate the faulty fan. Identify and remove the correct fuse for the faulty fan (a chart on the inside of the DAB door identifies the fuses).

Fan removal
1. 2. 3. 4. Use a flat blade screwdriver to release the four black plastic quarter-turn fasteners that secure the fan to the shelf assembly. Grasp the fan and pull it outward away from the cabinet. Disconnect the fan power cable and remove the fan from the cabinet. Discard the old fan.

526

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-533

Fan replacement procedure

Fan replacement
1. 2. 3. Connect the power cable to the new fan. Install the new fan in the cabinet. Using the flat blade screwdriver, tighten the four black plastic quarter-turn fasteners that secure the fan to the shelf assembly.

Restoration
1. 2. Insert the fuse removed in step 2 and check the fan works correctly. Advise the OMC that the repair is complete and check that fuse and fan alarms at the OMC are cleared.

29 Aug 1997

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

527

GMR-04

Fan replacement procedure

GSM-100-533

528

Maintenance Information: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W09-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

Index

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR

29 Aug 1997

68P02901W38-O

I1

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

I2

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W38-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

A
air deflector installing in BSSC, 26 installing in BSSC2, 26 air filter cleaning procedure, 33 replacement procedure, 32, 42 alarm interface board (AIB), 322 arriving at a site, 110

B
backplane, replacement procedure, 517 installing the cage, 521 obtaining authorization, 518 removing the cage, 519 tools and equipment, 517 backplane connections BIB, 233 T43, 228 backup power, consumption, 22, 17 balanced line interconnect board (BIB), 331 base station unit shelf BSSC2, 18 slot assignment, 22 battery backup board (BBBX), 269 BBBX, installing, 219 before visiting a site, 110 bend radius, optical fibres, 19 BIB, backplane connections, 233 BSSC cabinet dimensions, 14 external view, 13 internal view, 15 cabling diagrams PAB type PDU, 133 PDB/AIB type PDU, 136 configuration, 12 decommissioning, 32 differences from BSSC2, 132 interconnect panel, 327

BSSC2 base station unit shelf, 18 cabinet external view, 13 internal view, 16 labelling, 124 cabling diagrams, 127 configuration, 12 fan cooling system, 119 interconnect panel, 120, 328 location, 12, 12 overview, 11, 11 power distribution unit, 118 remote transcoder unit shelf, 113 types, 11, 11 BSU, module plan, 220 BTC, replacement procedures, nonredundant cards, 54 bus terminator card (BTC), 28

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR

29 Aug 1997

68P02901W38-O

I3

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

C
cabinets BSSC cabling diagrams (PAB type PDU), 133 cabling diagrams (PDB/AIB type PDU), 136 configuration, 12 differences from BSSC2, 132 dimensions, 14 external view, 13 interconnect panel, 327 internal view, 15 BSSC2 cabling diagrams, 127 configuration, 12 external view, 13 fan cooling system, 119, 325 interconnect panel, 120, 328 internal view, 16 location, 12, 12 overview, 11, 11 power distribution unit, 118 types, 11, 11 BTS6, fan cooling system, 325 delivery, 21 dimensions, 15 environmental limitations, 15 labelling BSSC, 122 BSSC2, 124 lifting, 22, 31 overcurrent protection, 22, 17 packaging, 22 power requirements, 32 torque values, 11, 23 types covered, 21 weights, 22 cables BBBX, 219 control signal, 225 earth, 214 power, 214 cabling diagrams BSSC PAB type PDU, 133 PDB/AIB type PDU, 136 BSSC2, 127 calibrating, GCLK, 413 record form, 415 catering, on site, 110 checklist, annual physical inspection, 38 circuit breakers, 324 removing and replacing, 52

cleaning, optical fibres, 18 cleaning procedure, air filters, 33 clock extender (CLKX), 271 configurations BSSC, 12 BSSC2, 12 connecting, power cables negative earth cabinets, 215 positive earth cabinets, 215 control signal cabling, installing, 225

D
DAB, replacement procedure, 510 decommissioning BSSC, 32 checklist, 34 prerequisite, 31 digital cage replacement, authorization procedure, 518 replacement procedure, 517 installing the cage, 521 removing the cage, 519 tools and equipment, 517 digital modules BSU shelf slot assignments, 22 double kiloport switch, 29 factory installed, 218 front panels, 25 full size BTC, 28 DSW2, 29 GCLK, 216 GDP, 260 GDP2, 220 GPROC, 226 GPROC2, 232 KSW, 237 MSI, 244 MSI2, 249 NVM, 266 overview, 27 XCDR, 255 half size BBBX, 269 CLKX, 271 DSWX, 273 KSWX, 273, 277 overview, 268 PIX, 285 installing BBBXs, 219 RXU shelf slot assignments, 23

I4

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W38-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

digital power supply module (DPSM), 33 distribution alarm board (DAB), 313 double kiloport switch extender, 273 DPSM installing, 217 replacement procedure, 440 nonredundant modules, 441 redundant modules, 441 DSW2, 29 double rate TDM bus, 214 expansion TDM highways, 212 local highway, 211 purpose, 29 remote TDM highway, 211 standard rate TDM bus, 214 DSWX, 273 expansion, 274 local, 275 remote, 274 requirements, 273

F
fan cooling system BSSC2, 119 FPCU, 325 overview, 325 fan power converter unit (FPCU), 325 Fan replacement procedure, 523 full size digital modules BTC, 28 GCLK, 216 GDP, 260 GPROC, 226 GPROC2, 232 KSW, 237 MSI, 244 MSI2, 249 overview, 27 XCDR, 255

G
GCLK, calibrating, 413 record form, 415 GDP replacement procedure, 434 technical description, 260 GDP2 CRC error checking, 224 MCAP interface, 224 purpose, 220 general procedures, 21 generic clock (GCLK), 216 generic processor (GPROC), 226 generic processor2 (GPROC2), 232 GPROC/GPROC2, replacement, 416

E
earthing cable sizes, 214 site, 22 enhanced power supply module (EPSM), 36 EPSM installing, 217 replacement procedure, 440 nonredundant modules, 441 redundant modules, 441 external equipment, power cabling to DRAM backup battery, 213 to external multicoupler, 213 to external RTC, 213 eyebolts, inserting, 22, 31

H
half size digital modules BBBX, 269 CLKX, 271 KSWX, 273, 277 overview, 268 PIX, 285

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR

29 Aug 1997

68P02901W38-O

I5

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

handling, optical fibres, 18

leaving a site, 111

I
installing air deflector in BSSC,, 26 in BSSC2, 26 control signal cabling for E1/T1 line connections, 225 for end user I/O devices, 226 for inter cabinet fibre optics, 225 DPSM, 217 EPSM, 217 eyebolts, 22 IPSM, 217 PIX, 226 tool kits for, 12 integrated power supply module (IPSM), 39 interconnect panel BIB, 331 BSSC, 327 negative earth, 211 positive earth, 212 BSSC2, 120, 328, 210 overview, 326 T43, 329 IPSM installing, 217 replacement procedure, 440 nonredundant modules, 441 redundant modules, 441

M
maintenance annual physical inspection checklist, 38 cleaning cabinet air filters, 33 perfoming a physical inspection, 34 procedures, 31 miscellaneous repair procedures, 51 module plan BSU, 220 RXU, 221 MSI, replacement procedure, 430 multiple serial interface (MSI), 244 multiple serial interface (MSI2), 249

N
NPSM, replacement procedure, 440 nonredundant modules, 441 redundant modules, 441 NVM BSC installation, 222 fault diagnosis, 437 front panel, 438 functional desription, 267 installation, 222 installation procedure, 224 interrogating the board, 267 mechanical design, 266 replacement, 437 RXCDR installation, 223 technical description, 266

K
kiloport switch extender (KSWX), 273, 277 kiloport switch (KSW), 237 KSW, replacement procedure nonredundant modules, 421 redundant modules, 419 KSWX, replacement procedure nonredundant modules, 426 redundant modules, 423

O
obtaining authorization, 518 MCSC review, 518 optical fibre, bend radius, 19 optical fibres cleaning, 18 connection, 18 handling, 18 protection, 18

L
labelling, BSSC, 122 LANX, replacement procedure nonredundant modules, 429 redundant modules, 427

P
parallel interface extender (PIX), 285 periodic maintenance, air filters, 32, 42 Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W38-O

I6

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

Physical inspection, performing, 34 PIX connector, 226 definition, 439 installing, 226 replacement procedure, 439 power BBBX connections, 219 BSSC connections negative earth, 211 positive earth, 212 BSSC2 connections, 210 cable sizes, 214 connecting external equipment, 213 connecting to main source, 216 consumption backup, 22, 17 negative earth BSSC, 22, 17 positive earth BSSC, 22, 17 DAB setup, 29 input limits, 28 PAB setup, 29 preparing to connect, 28 supply modules, installing, 217 terminal sizes, 28 power alarm board, PAB, 317 power distribution board (PDB), 322 power distribution unit AIB, 322 BSSC2, 118 circuit breakers, 324 DAB, 313 overview, 312 PAB, 317 PDB, 322 power requirements, 32 power supply module, replacement procedure, 440 nonredundant modules, 441 redundant modules, 441 power supply modules DPSM, 33 EPSM, 36 IPSM, 39 overview, 32 protecting, optical fibres, 18

R
remote transcoder unit shelf BSSC2, 113 slot assignments, 23 replacement procedure GCLK, redundant, 49 redundant GCLK, 49 replacement procedures, 41 air filters, 32, 42 backplane replacement, 517 installing the cage, 521 removing the cage, 519 tools and equipment, 517 circuit breakers, 52 digital cage, obtaining authorization, 518 digital cage replacement, 517 installing the cage, 521 removing the cage, 519 tools and equipment, 517 fans, 48 GCLK multishelf configuration, 412 nonredundant, 411 single shelf configuration, 412 GDP, 434 GPROC/GPROC2, 416 interface boards, 43 MSI, 430 nonredundant BTC, 54 nonredundant CLKX, 47 nonredundant GCLK, 411 multishelf configuration, 412 single shelf configuration, 412 nonredundant KSW, 421 nonredundant KSWX, 426 nonredundant LANX, 429 PIX, 439 redundant CLKX, 45 redundant KSW, 419 redundant KSWX, 423 redundant LANX, 427 replacing an DAB, 510 XCDR, 432 replacing digital cages, authorization procedure, 518 rubbish, disposal on site, 111 rural sites, visiting, 111 RXU, module plan, 221

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR

29 Aug 1997

68P02901W38-O

I7

GMR-04

GSM-100-030

S
safety cabinet weights, 22 connecting mains power, 216 delivery, 21 earth cable sizes, 214 on site, 112 overcurrent protection, 22, 17 power cable sizes, 214 site earthing, 22 transient and lightning protection, 23 site requirements dimensions, 15 environmental, 15 structural, 15 specification, specification, 21 systems covered, 11

transcoder (GDP), 260 transcoder (XCDR), 255 transient and lightning protection, 23 transportation panel fillers, removing, 217

U
unpacking, cabinets, 24

V
visiting sites arriving, 110 before, 110 catering facilities, 110 leaving, 111 rubbish, 111 rural sites, 111 safety, 112

T
T43, backplane connections, 228 T43 interconnect board, 329 tool kits, installation one, 12 two, 14 torque values, 11, 23

X
XCDR replacement procedure, 432 technical description, 255

I8

Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W38-O

29 Aug 1997

GMR-04